- No category
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 860
Notice Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly. ® Programming Manual INT-2041 (UNIV) Issue 4.0 (Version 3000) NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time without notice. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Copyright 2009 NEC Infrontia, Inc. 6535 N. State Highway 161 Irving, TX 75039-2402 Technology Development Preface THIS MANUAL The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary information for programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system. Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a multiline terminal. SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS UNIVERGE SV8100 General Description Manual This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and can be used to present information to potential customers. UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed instructions for installing the SV8100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment. UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual This manual provides detailed information for each of the system features. If you are not familiar with the features, the Table of Contents lists each of the features and where to find the feature within the manual. UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual This manual provides information on networking the SV8100 using K-CCIS, IP K-CCIS, and NetLink. UNIVERGE SV8100 PC Programming Manual This manual provides information on installing and using the application that allows programming the SV8100 system via a computer. TABLE OF CONTENTS ___________________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1 Before You Start Programming ......................................................... 1-1 Section 2 How to Use This Manual .................................................................... 1-1 Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode ..................................................... 1-2 Section 4 How to Exit Programming Mode ....................................................... 1-3 Section 5 Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs ................................. 1-4 Section 6 Programming Names and Text Messages ....................................... 1-5 Section 7 Using Softkeys For Programming .................................................... 1-6 Section 8 What the Softkey Display Prompts Mean ......................................... 1-7 Section 9 System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2 Section 1 Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Your System ............................................................... 2-1 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-3 10-02 : Location Setup ........................................................................... 2-4 10-03 : ETU Setup ................................................................................. 2-5 10-04 : Music On Hold Setup ............................................................... 2-16 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup ................................................. 2-18 10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup ...................................................................... 2-19 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup ................................................................... 2-20 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup .......................................... 2-21 10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup .................................................. 2-23 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup ............................................................ 2-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual i Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 10-14 : Managed Network Setup ......................................................... 2-27 10-15 : Client Information Setup .......................................................... 2-28 10-16 : Option Information Setup ........................................................ 2-29 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup ......................................................... 2-33 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup ..................................................... 2-34 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection ................................................ 2-35 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment ......................................... 2-36 10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup ................................................ 2-38 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup .......................................... 2-39 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup ........................................................... 2-40 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup ................................................... 2-42 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup ..................................................... 2-43 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup ................................................ 2-44 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup .................................................. 2-46 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup ..................................... 2-49 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-50 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup ............................... 2-52 10-37 : UPnP Setup ............................................................................. 2-53 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup ............................................................. 2-54 10-39 : Fractional Setup ...................................................................... 2-55 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability ................................................................. 2-56 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting ................................................ 2-57 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup ........................................................... 2-58 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup ............................................. 2-59 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup ............................ 2-62 10-48 : License Activation ................................................................... 2-63 10-49 : License File Activation ............................................................. 2-64 10-50 : License Information ................................................................. 2-65 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA ................................................ 2-69 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information .............................................. 2-70 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package ................................ 2-71 10-55 : Package Network Setup .......................................................... 2-72 ___________________________________________________________________________________ ii Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone ............................................................... 2-74 10-58 : Network Address ..................................................................... 2-75 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering .................................................................. 2-77 11-02 : Extension Numbering .............................................................. 2-85 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering ................................................... 2-87 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering ....................................................... 2-89 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers ........................................... 2-90 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number .......................................................... 2-91 11-09 : Trunk Access Code ................................................................. 2-92 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) ...................... 2-94 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) .................... 2-97 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) ............................. 2-101 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) .............................................. 2-105 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) .............................................. 2-107 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) ..... 2-109 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup ........................................... 2-111 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number ...................................................... 2-113 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table ................................................ 2-114 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup ................................................... 2-115 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns .......................................... 2-116 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-118 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-120 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions ...................... 2-121 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks ............................ 2-122 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode ...................................................... 2-123 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range .................................................... 2-124 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup ............................................... 2-125 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins ..................................................... 2-126 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual iii Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions ................. 2-127 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name ......................................... 2-128 13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group ........................................................ 2-130 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name .............................. 2-131 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name ............................................. 2-132 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name ............................................... 2-133 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing ....................................................... 2-134 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup ........................................................ 2-135 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup ...................................................... 2-141 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup ................................................................. 2-144 14-05 : Trunk Group .......................................................................... 2-145 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing ............................................................. 2-146 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup ...................................................... 2-148 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks .......................................... 2-150 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks .................... 2-151 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk ............................................................. 2-152 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk ....................................... 2-153 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID .......................................................... 2-154 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment ................................................. 2-155 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup .................................................. 2-157 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup .................................. 2-159 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup .............................. 2-167 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup ............................. 2-170 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions ......................................... 2-174 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys ............................................... 2-175 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup ........................ 2-185 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment ....................................... 2-187 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup .............. 2-188 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment ......................... 2-190 ___________________________________________________________________________________ iv Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ............. 2-191 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ........................................... 2-192 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension ..................................... 2-193 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication ............................................ 2-194 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options .............................. 2-195 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension ....................... 2-196 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment .......................................... 2-197 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup ......................................................... 2-198 15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup ...................... 2-199 15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup ........................................................... 2-200 Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup .................................... 2-201 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions ..................... 2-204 16-03 : Secondary Department Group ............................................... 2-205 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups ....................... 2-206 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options ..................................................................... 2-207 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones .............................. 2-209 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones ......................... 2-212 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions .................................. 2-214 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions ............................................. 2-215 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) ..................... 2-216 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) ................. 2-219 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) ................. 2-222 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) ........................... 2-224 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) ................. 2-226 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) ................ 2-229 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) ............... 2-230 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M ................................ 2-235 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup ................................................................... 2-237 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages ................................................ 2-239 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual v Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 20-17 : Operator Extension ............................................................... 2-242 20-18 : Service Tone Timers ............................................................. 2-243 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID ................................................. 2-245 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data ................................. 2-246 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation ................................. 2-247 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service ..................... 2-248 20-23 : System Options for CTI ......................................................... 2-249 20-25 : ISDN Options ........................................................................ 2-250 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO ......................................................... 2-252 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation ................................................. 2-253 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension ..................................................... 2-254 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks .......................................................... 2-255 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment ............................................. 2-256 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting ................................................. 2-260 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting ....................................................... 2-261 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup .......................................... 2-262 20-38 : Operator Group Setting ......................................................... 2-263 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls ....................................... 2-265 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................................... 2-269 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks ............................................ 2-270 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions ..................................... 2-271 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class ............................................................. 2-272 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup .......................................... 2-275 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup ............................. 2-278 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup ................................................................. 2-279 21-09 : Dial Block Setup .................................................................... 2-280 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension ........................... 2-281 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment ........................... 2-282 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks ....................... 2-283 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions ................ 2-284 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup .............................. 2-285 ___________________________________________________________________________________ vi Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................... 2-286 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk ........... 2-287 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension ......................................................................... 2-288 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension ......................................................................... 2-289 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) ....... 2-290 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings ........... 2-291 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls ....................................... 2-293 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup .................................................... 2-295 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range ........................................................ 2-297 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment ........................ 2-299 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment ............................... 2-300 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode ................................................. 2-301 22-07 : DIL Assignment ..................................................................... 2-302 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination ............................................ 2-303 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup ............................................................ 2-304 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup ................................................. 2-306 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion ..................................... 2-308 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group ...................................................... 2-312 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment ............... 2-314 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG ............................................. 2-315 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group ..................... 2-317 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup ................................. 2-319 22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern ......... 2-320 22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup .............................................. 2-321 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup ....................................... 2-322 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups ................................................................ 2-323 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer ............................................. 2-324 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions ..................... 2-326 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual vii Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold ....................................................... 2-327 24-02 : System Options for Transfer ................................................. 2-329 24-03 : Park Group ............................................................................ 2-331 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup ................. 2-332 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup ............................ 2-333 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding ........................................................... 2-334 24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise ............................................ 2-335 24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex ....................................................... 2-336 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings .................................................... 2-337 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup ......................................... 2-339 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message ....................................................... 2-340 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing ......... 2-341 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy ........ 2-342 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment ................................. 2-343 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup ......................... 2-344 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA ............................................... 2-346 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup .............................................................. 2-348 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users ........................................... 2-349 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA .............................................. 2-350 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class ................................................... 2-351 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA ............................... 2-352 25-13 : System Option for DISA ........................................................ 2-353 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup .................................................. 2-354 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service ....................................... 2-357 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR .......................................... 2-359 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments ............................................................. 2-361 26-04 : ARS Class of Service ............................................................ 2-363 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table ....................................................... 2-364 ___________________________________________________________________________________ viii Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS .......................... 2-365 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode .............................................. 2-367 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment .................................... 2-368 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment .............................................. 2-369 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer ............................................. 2-376 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table ..................................................... 2-377 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup ........................................... 2-379 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging ......................... 2-381 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment ........................................ 2-383 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings ............................................. 2-384 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group ................................................. 2-387 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page ............................... 2-388 31-06 : External Speaker Control ...................................................... 2-389 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments ............................................ 2-391 31-08 : BGM on External Paging ....................................................... 2-392 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup ......................................................... 2-393 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment ................................................... 2-394 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup ........................................................... 2-395 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup ........................................................... 2-396 Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup .............................................................. 2-397 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group .............................................. 2-398 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup ..................................................... 2-399 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service .............................................. 2-401 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines ............................... 2-402 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class ...................................... 2-403 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual ix Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction ......................................... 2-404 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line ......................................... 2-405 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer ............................................................... 2-406 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines ................................ 2-407 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options .................................................... 2-408 34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment ..................................... 2-411 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options ...................................................................... 2-413 35-02 : SMDR Output Options ........................................................... 2-415 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group .............................. 2-418 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups ................... 2-419 35-05 : Account Code Setup ............................................................. 2-420 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table ................................................. 2-422 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup .......................................................... 2-423 40-02 : Mailbox Setup ........................................................................ 2-424 40-03 : Message Recording Setup .................................................... 2-425 40-04 : Live Recording Setup ............................................................ 2-426 40-05 : Call Information Setup ........................................................... 2-427 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup ........................ 2-428 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS ...................... 2-429 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes .............. 2-431 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup ............................. 2-432 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option .................................... 2-433 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment ............................................ 2-435 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-01 : System Options for ACD ....................................................... 2-437 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments ..................................... 2-438 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group ................ 2-439 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor .......................................................... 2-441 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules ................................................. 2-442 ___________________________________________________________________________________ x Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules .......................................................... 2-443 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup ................................................ 2-444 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options .......................................................... 2-445 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting .................................................. 2-447 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement ..................................................... 2-448 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement .................................................... 2-449 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup ................................................... 2-451 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement .................. 2-452 41-14 : ACD Options Setup ............................................................... 2-453 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information .............................................. 2-456 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow ....................................................... 2-458 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup ......................................................... 2-459 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ............................................ 2-460 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement .................................. 2-462 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings ................................................ 2-464 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel ............................................. 2-467 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup ................................................ 2-468 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) .................................. 2-469 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes .................................... 2-471 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer ..................................................... 2-472 42-06 : PMS Service Setting .............................................................. 2-473 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table .............................. 2-474 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route .......................................... 2-475 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access ........................ 2-476 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table ............................................... 2-478 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ........................... 2-480 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table ............................................................... 2-481 44-06 : Additional Dial Table .............................................................. 2-483 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access ..................................... 2-484 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual xi Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route ........................................... 2-486 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-488 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-489 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options .............................................. 2-491 45-02 : NSL Option Setup ................................................................. 2-494 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment .......................................... 2-495 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits ..................................................................................... 2-496 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options ............................................. 2-497 47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options ................................ 2-505 47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options ................................. 2-511 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options ....................................... 2-512 47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options ............................... 2-517 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options ................................................ 2-519 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options ........................................... 2-521 47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options ............................................... 2-523 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options .................................. 2-525 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules ........................................ 2-529 47-13 : SV8100 InMail Dial Action Tables ......................................... 2-538 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options ........................................ 2-545 47-16 : InMail Language License ...................................................... 2-546 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options .................................... 2-548 47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup ................................................. 2-549 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup ................................................. 2-550 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-01 : CCIS System Setting ............................................................. 2-551 50-02 : Connecting System Settings ................................................. 2-552 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings ........................................ 2-554 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment .............................................. 2-555 ___________________________________________________________________________________ xii Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter ...................... 2-556 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability ....................................................... 2-557 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office .................................. 2-558 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment .............. 2-559 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment ........................................................................... 2-560 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment .................. 2-562 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment ........................................................................... 2-563 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment ........................................................................... 2-564 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment ................ 2-565 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return ...................... 2-566 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting ................................. 2-567 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting ........................................... 2-569 51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting ......................................... 2-571 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting ...................... 2-573 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink .................................................................................. 2-574 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings .......................................................... 2-575 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting ...................... 2-577 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting ............... 2-578 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting ......................................................... 2-579 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings ................................... 2-580 51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting ................................................................. 2-582 51-11 : NetLink System Information .................................................. 2-583 51-12 : Primary System Information .................................................. 2-584 51-13 : NetLink Options ..................................................................... 2-585 51-14 : NetLink System Control ......................................................... 2-586 51-15 : Demonstration Setting ........................................................... 2-587 51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting .................... 2-588 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual xiii Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup ............................................................... 2-591 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup ................................................................. 2-597 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup .................................................. 2-599 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ....................................... 2-602 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System ...................................... 2-604 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup ..................... 2-605 80-09 : Short Ring Setup ................................................................... 2-606 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup ...................................................... 2-609 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-611 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup ....................................................... 2-614 81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-616 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ...................... 2-618 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ............ 2-619 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup .................... 2-621 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port ........................... 2-623 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup ........................................................... 2-624 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting .................................... 2-629 81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-632 81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup .............................................................. 2-634 81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup ................................................. 2-637 81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ....... 2-638 81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ..................... 2-641 81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ..................... 2-644 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup ................................. 2-647 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone .............................................................. 2-649 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup .......................................... 2-651 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-653 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port ......................... 2-655 ___________________________________________________________________________________ xiv Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup ......................................................... 2-656 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup .............................................. 2-657 82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-660 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-661 82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone ..................... 2-662 82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ............................. 2-663 82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup ................................ 2-666 82-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup ................................. 2-669 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup .................................... 2-671 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup ............................ 2-676 84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup ......................................... 2-678 84-06 : PVA Data Setting ................................................................... 2-680 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup .................................................... 2-682 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup ........................................................... 2-683 84-09 : VLAN Setup ........................................................................... 2-684 84-10 : ToS Setup .............................................................................. 2-685 84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-687 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup ......................... 2-690 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup ....................................... 2-694 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup ...................................... 2-696 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup ........................................... 2-697 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup ................... 2-698 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup ................................. 2-702 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .................... 2-703 84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup ............................. 2-707 84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup .............................. 2-709 84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup ................ 2-711 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup ............................. 2-714 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-718 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-720 84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup ................................. 2-722 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual xv Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup ................. 2-723 84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup ......................................... 2-724 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-01 : HUB(8) LAN Setup ................................................................ 3-727 85-02 : HUB(8) VLAN Setup .............................................................. 3-729 85-03 : Priority Setup ........................................................................ 3-731 85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup .............................................................. 3-733 85-05 : HUB(8) VLAN Group Settings ............................................... 3-734 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-01 : Installation Date ..................................................................... 2-737 90-02 : Programming Password Setup .............................................. 2-738 90-03 : Save Data .............................................................................. 2-740 90-04 : Load Data .............................................................................. 2-741 90-05 : Slot Control ............................................................................ 2-742 90-06 : Trunk Control ......................................................................... 2-743 90-07 : Station Control ....................................................................... 2-744 90-08 : System Reset ........................................................................ 2-745 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup .................................... 2-746 90-10 : System Alarm Setup .............................................................. 2-747 90-11 : System Alarm Report ............................................................ 2-756 90-12 : System Alarm Output ............................................................ 2-758 90-13 : System Information Output .................................................... 2-759 90-16 : Main Software Information .................................................... 2-760 90-17 : Firmware Information ............................................................ 2-761 90-19 : Dial Block Release ................................................................ 2-762 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup ...................................................... 2-763 90-21 : Traffic Report Output ............................................................. 2-765 90-22 : Terminal Version information ................................................ 2-766 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones ................................. 2-767 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup ...................... 2-768 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup .................................... 2-769 ___________________________________________________________________________________ xvi Table of Contents UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 ___________________________________________________________________________________ 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup ................................................ 2-770 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup ..................................... 2-771 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet ..................................................... 2-772 90-34 : Firmware Information ............................................................. 2-773 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup ......................................... 2-774 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting .............................................. 2-775 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup .................................... 2-777 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset ................................................ 2-780 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data ...................... 2-781 90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information ...................... 2-782 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 ..................................... 2-783 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface .......................... 2-784 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone ......... 2-785 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone ........................ 2-786 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone ..................... 2-787 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup ................................................. 2-788 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange ............................... 2-789 90-52 : System Alarm Save ............................................................... 2-791 90-53 : System Alarm Clear ............................................................... 2-792 90-54 : PC/Web Programming ........................................................... 2-793 90-55 : Free License Select ............................................................... 2-794 90-56 : NTP Setup ............................................................................. 2-795 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data .......................................................... 2-796 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data ......................................................... 2-797 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data ........................................................... 2-798 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information ......................................... 2-799 90-61 : Manual Slot Install ................................................................. 2-800 90-62 : Security ID Information .......................................................... 2-801 90-63 : DT700 Control ....................................................................... 2-802 90-64 : SNMP Setup .......................................................................... 2-803 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup ....................... 2-804 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual xvii Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy Program ....................................................................... 2-805 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers ............................................... 2-809 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number ............................................. 2-810 92-04 : Extension Data Swap ............................................................ 2-811 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password ........................................... 2-814 92-06 : Fill Command ........................................................................ 2-815 92-07 : Delete Command .................................................................. 2-817 ___________________________________________________________________________________ xviii Table of Contents LIST OF TABLES ___________________________________________________________________________________ Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data ...................................................................................... 1-4 Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names .................................................................................. 1-5 Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts ................................................................................... 1-7 Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................................... 1-8 Table 2-1 Programming Modes ......................................................................................... 2-1 Table 2-2 License Information ......................................................................................... 2-66 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings ............................................................... 2-79 Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern ............................................................... 2-166 Table 2-5 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-166 Table 2-6 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-186 Table 2-7 Ringing Cycles .............................................................................................. 2-238 Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-297 Table 2-9 LED Patterns for DSS Console ..................................................................... 2-378 Table 2-10 47-02-16 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-509 Table 2-11 47-06-14 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-516 Table 2-12 47-07-03 Default Table Table 2-13 47-10-03 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-524 Table 2-14 47-16-01 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-547 Table 2-15 Basic Tones ................................................................................................... 2-592 Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table ..................................................................................... 2-606 Table 2-17 Ring Cycle Table ........................................................................................... 2-607 Table 2-18 Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-608 Table 2-19 Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-610 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm ...................................................................................... 2-747 .............................................................................. 2-518 ___________________________________________________________________________________ Programming Manual xix Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 ___________________________________________________________________________________ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ___________________________________________________________________________________ xx List of Tables 1 Introduction SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory. SECTION 2 Introduction Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings: Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system access levels and passwords. SV8100 Programming Manual 1-1 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did not intend. Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory. For example: 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 15-07-01 15-07-01 TEL KY01 = *01 tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for the extension . The second row of the display “KY01 = 01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below. SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE To enter programming mode: 1. Go to any working display telephone. In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1). 2. Do not lift the handset. 3. Press Speaker. 4. ##. Password 5. 1-2 Dial the system password + Transfer. Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup. UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Password User Name Level 47544 necii 1 (MF) Programs at this Level Manufacturer (MF): All programs 12345678 tech 2 (IN) Installation (IN): All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB 0000 ADMIN1 3 (SA) System Administrator – Level 1 (SA): 10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08, 30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06, 41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14, 41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07, 90-18, 90-19 9999 ADMIN2 4 (SB) System Administrator – Level 2 (SB): 13-04, 13-05, 13-06 SECTION 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE To exit the programming mode: When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit (pressing the Answer key will exit the program option). 1. Press Answer key to exit the program options, if needed. Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 2. Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System Data" is displayed. 3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the telephone to an idle mode. To save a customer’s database, a blank USB Drive is required. Insert the USB Drive into the CD-CP00-US and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the USB Drive. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a USB Drive can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved requires a separate drive. SV8100 Programming Manual 1-3 Issue 4.0 SECTION 5 UNIVERGE SV8100 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and move around in the menus. Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data Keys for Entering Data Use this key... 0~9 and Transfer Recall Hold Answer When you want to... Enter data into a program. Complete the programming step you just made (e.g., pressing Enter on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press Transfer to bypass the entry without changing it. Delete the entry to the left (e.g., pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard). Delete or clear all characters to the right of the cursor. Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being viewed. For example, if programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing Answer allows you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing Answer again allows you to select a new program in the 15-XX series. Pressing Answer a third time allows you to enter a new program beginning with 1. Pressing Answer one last time brings you to the beginning program display, allowing you to enter any program number. MIC LINE KEYS Switch between the different input data fields by pressing MIC. The cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing MIC again moves the cursor back to the middle row. Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1 (on) to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE 3 = 15, etc. For programs with this option, the line key, which currently matches the programmed setting, lights steady. The display can also indicate Softkey, which will allow you to select the values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed settings.) 1-4 LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into a Speed Dialing bin. LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/flash into a Speed Dialing bin. LINE KEY 3 Program an @ into a Speed Dialing bin. UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data (Continued) Keys for Entering Data Use this key... VOL When you want to... Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table). If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling forward. VOL Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table). If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling backward. SECTION 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long. Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit . . . 1 When you want to. . . Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } 2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ SV8100 Programming Manual Æ ¨ % & ’ ( Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 1-5 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . . Enter characters: # SECTION 7 + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ £ # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.) Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time. Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right. USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING Each UNIVERGE SV8100 display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly. _ Base Program Mode Service OP1 OP2 Pressing the VOLUME or VOLUME will scroll between the menus. _ CCIS Program Mode Hard Mtnance 1-6 UNIVERGE SV8100 SECTION 8 Issue 4.0 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs. Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts Softkey Display Prompts If you press this Softkey . . . back The system will. . . Go back one step in the program display. You can press VOLUME or VOLUME to scroll forward or backward through a list of programs. Scroll down through the available programs. Scroll up through the available programs. select Select the currently displayed program. Move the cursor to the left. Move the cursor to the right. -1 Move back through the available program options. +1 Move forward through the available program options. SV8100 Programming Manual 1-7 Issue 4.0 SECTION 9 UNIVERGE SV8100 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES The following table provides the capacities for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system. Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities System Number Plan/Capacities System Type Number Plan/Capacities System Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP) 32/64 channels Classes of Service 15 Day/Night Mode Numbers 8 Day/Night Service Patterns 32 Dial Tone Detector DTMF Receiver 64 Toll Restriction Classes 15 Verifiable Account Code Table 2000 Trunk Trunk Port Number 200 Trunk Ports (Total): 200 176 176 200 44 88 200 Analog Trunks BRI Trunk Ports T1/PRI Trunk Ports E&M Analog Trunk Ports DID Analog Trunk Ports VoIP Trunk Ports DID Translation Tables DID Translation Table Entries 20 2000 DISA: 1-8 Classes of Service Users 15 15 Ring Groups 100 Tie Line Classes of Service 15 Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15 Trunk Access Maps 200 Trunk Group Numbers 100 Trunk Routes 100 UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued) System Number Plan/Capacities System Type Number Plan/Capacities Extension Telephone Extension Ports Multiline Terminals Single Line Phones/Analog Devices VoIP Extensions SIP DECT Wireless 512 256 256 512 504 DLCA: Physical Ports 01~16 Physical Ports 01~16 LCA: Telephone Extension Number Range 1~89999999* (*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9) Virtual Extension Ports Virtual Extension Number Range 256 1~89999999* (*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9) PGD(2)-U10 ADP 56 ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters 240 UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless – SIP DECT Access Points Door Boxes Door Box Numbers Unlimited 8 1~8 DSS Consoles Numbers: 60 Button DSS Console Operator Access Number 32 0 (Default) Operator Extension 15 Ringdown Assignments 512 SLT Adapters 16 HF-R Adapters 240 SV8100 Programming Manual 1-9 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued) System Number Plan/Capacities System Type Number Plan/Capacities Speed Dialing Speed Dialing Groups Speed Dialing Bins Speed Dialing Table-Common 64 0~1999 1000 ACD ACD Groups 64 ACD Agent Extensions 512 ACI ACI Groups 16 ACI Ports 96 Automated Attendant VRS Message Numbers 1~100 Conference Conference Circuits 64 - maximum (32 Parties Per Conference) Data Communication Interfaces APR Software Port Numbers 449~512 APA Adapters 240 APR Adapters 240 CTA or CTU Adapters 32 (Only works with DTH/DTR style telephones) Department and Pickup Groups Department (Extension) Group Numbers 1~64 Call Pickup Group Numbers 1~64 Hotline 1 - 10 Internal Hotline 512 External Hotline 512 UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued) System Number Plan/Capacities System Type Number Plan/Capacities Paging and Park Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 01~64 External Page Group Numbers 0, 1~8 External Speakers 9 (1) (1~8) CD-CP00-US( )-U10 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Park Group Numbers 1~64 Park Orbits 1~64 SMDR SMDR Ports 1~8 VRS/VM8000 InMail VRS/VM8000 InMail VRS/VM8000 InMail Channels VRS Attendant Messages VRS Recordable Messages VM8000 InMail Ports 1 16 (Note 1) 3 100 8 (Note 1) VoIP ADA2 (Recording Jack) Adapters 240 PSA (Power Failure) Adapters 256 RTP Ports 0~65535 RTCP Ports 0~65535 DSP Resources 128 (Note 2) Note 1: The PZ-VM21 supports up to 16 ports and they are shared by the VM8000 InMaill and VRS. Note 2: The maximum number of VOIP DSP Resources depend on which PZ-IPLA is installed. Passwords Programming Passwords: Level 1 (MF) PCPro/WebPro User Name: 47544 necii Level 2 (IN) PCPro/WebPro User Name: 12345678 tech SV8100 Programming Manual 1 - 11 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued) System Number Plan/Capacities System Type Number Plan/Capacities Level 3 (SA) PCPro/WebPro User Name: 0000 ADMIN1 Level 4 (SB) PCPro/WebPro User Name: 9999 ADMIN2 Programming Password Users 8 Footnotes Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual. 1 - 12 Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 SECTION 1 2 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes. Table 2-1 Programming Modes Program Number : Program Name Program 10 : System Configuration Setup Program 11 : System Numbering Program 12 : Night Mode Setup Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup Program 16 : Department Group Setup Program 20 : System Option Setup Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup Program 23 : Answer Features Setup Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your UNIVERGE UNIVERGE SV8100 system. Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup Program 26 : ARS Service Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup SV8100 Programming Manual 2-1 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-1 Programming Modes (Continued) Program Number : Program Name Program 31 : Paging Setup Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup Program 34 : Tie Line Setup Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup Program 40 : Voice Recording System Program 41 : ACD Setup Program 42 : Hotel Setup Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration Program 47 : In-Mail Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service (CCIS) Program 51 : NetLink Service Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup Program 90 : Maintenance Program Program 92 : Copy Program 2-2 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date Level: SA Description Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728 to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service. Program Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 01 Year 00~99 No Setting Enter 2 digits for year (00~99). 02 Month 01~12 No Setting Enter 2 digits (01~12) for the month. 03 Day 01~31 No Setting Enter 2 digits (01~31) for the day. 04 Week 1~7 (Sun~Sat) No Setting Enter digit for the day of the week (1=Sunday, 7=Saturday). 05 Hour 00~23 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the hour (00~23). 06 Minute 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the minute (00~59). 07 Second 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the second (00~59). 10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Clock/Calendar Display SV8100 Programming Manual 2-3 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-02 : Location Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 01 Country Code Dial (up to four digits): 0~9, , # 1 02 International Access Code Dial (up to four digits): 0~9, , # No setting 03 Other Area Access Code Dial (up to two digits): 0~9, , # 9 04 Area Code Dial (up to six digits): 0~9, , # No setting Enter the local area code. 05 Trunk Access Code Dial (up to eight digits): 0~9, , # No setting Enter the trunk access code digits required to place an outgoing call. Enter the country code. Enter the international access code. Enter the other area access code Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2-4 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : ETU Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each blade. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the blade. The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed. Input Data For CNF PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 Item Logical Port Number 01~16 Input Data Default 0~256 0 For DLCA PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 Item Terminal Type (B1) SV8100 Programming Manual 01~16 Input Data 0 = Not set 1 = Multiline Terminal 2 = SLT Adapter 3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer) 8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box) 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) 10 = DSS Console 11 = --- Not Used --- Default 0 2-5 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item 02 Logical Port Number (B1) 03 --- Not Used --- 04 05 Input Data Default 0 = Not set 1 = Multiline Terminal (1~512) 2 = SLT Adapter (1~512) 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) (1~8) 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone Ringer) (1~8) 8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) (1~8) 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI) (1~96) 10 = DSS (1~32) 11 = --- Not Used --- 0 Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only applies to DTH/ DTR–style telephones) 0 = None 1 = APR Module 2 = APA Module 3 = ADA Module 4 = CTA/CTU Module 0 Optional Installed Unit 2 0 = None 1 = APR Module 2 = APA Module 3 = ADA Module 4 = CTA/CTU Module 0 B-Channel 2 Item No. 2-6 Item Input Data Default 06 Terminal Type (B2) 0 = Not set 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer) 8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box) 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) 12 = APR (B2 Mode) 0 07 Logical Port Number (B2) 0 = Not set 6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext. Speaker) 7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/Tone Ringer) = (1~8) 8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) = (1~8) 9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) = (1~96) 12 = APR (for B2 mode) (193~512) 0 08 Multiline Telephone Type 0 = DT3** 1 = Dterm 8 2 = Dterm 7 0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 09 Side Option Information 0 = No option 1 = 8LK Unit 2 = 16LK Unit 3 = 24ADM 0 10 Bottom Option Information (Only applies to DTL–style telephones) 0 = No option 1 = APR 2 = ADA 3 = BHA 0 11 Handset Option Information 0 = No option 1 = PSA/PSD 2 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset 0 For LCA PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01~16 Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0~512 0 03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) 04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) For COTA Unit Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 Item Logical Port Number 1~8 Input Data Default 0~200 0 For CD-PVAA Unit Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 Item Logical Port Number SV8100 Programming Manual 01~16 Input Data Default 0~200 0 2-7 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 For ODTA PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. Item 01~04 Input Data Default 0~200 0 01 Logical Port Number 02 2/4 Wire 0 = 2 Wire 1 = 4 Wire 1 03 E&M Line Control Method 0 = TYPE I 1 = TYPE V 0 For DIOP PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 2-8 Item 01~04 Input Data Default 01 LD/OPX Specification 0 = LD Trunk 1 = OPX 0 02 Logical Port Number 0 = 1~200 (LD Trunk) 1 = 1~256 (OPX) 0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 For BRIA PKG Setup ISDN Line Number Item No 01~04 Item Input Data Default 01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not Used 1 = T-Point 1 02 Logical Port Number 0 = Not Used 1 = For T-Bus (1~200) 0 The starting port number of a BRI line is displayed. Two logic ports are automatically assigned to a BRI line. 03 Connection Type 0 = Point-to-Multipoint 1 = Point-to-Point 0 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Enblock Sending 1 = Overlap Sending 1 0 = Keypad Facility 1 = Called Party Number 0 0 = Slave System 1 = Master System 0 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 05 Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up for every type using Program 81-06 (T-Bus). CLIP Information Announcement Based on this setting, the system includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled. 06 --- Not Used --- 07 --- Not Used --- 08 Dial Sending Mode ISDN Protocol definition 09 Dial Information Element ISDN Protocol definition [Only when Dialing Sending Mode (10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending] 10 Master/Slave System If set to 0, system is synchronized to the network clock. If set to 1, system is not synchronized to the network clock. 11 --- Not Used --- 14 --- Not Used --- 15 --- Not Used --- 17 ISDN Line Ringback Tone If Telco does not provide ringback tone, SV8100 can if set to 1:Enable. SV8100 Programming Manual 2-9 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No 18 Item Type of Number ISDN Protocol definition 19 Numbering Plan Identification ISDN Protocol definition 2 - 10 22 --- Not Used --- 23 Straight/Cross Wiring 24 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default 0 = Unknown 1 = International number 2 = National number 3 = Network specific number 4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number 2 0 = Unknown 1 = ISDN numbering plan 2 = Data numbering plan 3 = Telex numbering plan 4 = National standard numbering plan 5 = Private numbering plan 1 0 = Auto 1 = Manual (Cross) 2 = Manual (Straight) 0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 For PRTA PKG Setup ISDN Line Number Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 Logical Port Number --- Not Used --- 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1 = for T-Bus 1~200 Default 1 1~5 1 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Level 1 1 = Level 2 2 = Level 3 3 = Level 4 4 = Level 5 2 0 = Enbloc Sending 1 = Overlap Sending 0 0 = Keypad Facility 1 = Called Party Number 0 Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program 81-06 (T-Bus) CLIP Information Based on this setting, the system includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled. 06 Length of Cable 07 --- Not Used --- 08 Dial Sending Mode ISDN Protocol definition 09 Input Data The start port number of a PRI line is displayed. 03 05 01~24 Dial Information Element ISDN Protocol definition (Only when Dialing Sending Mode (10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending) 10 --- Not Used --- 11 --- Not Used --- 12 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 11 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 13 Item Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit If the transmit/receive voltage is less than the setting in 10-03-13, the system considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and the PRTA does not come up. 14 --- Not Used --- 15 --- Not Used --- 16 --- Not Used --- 17 ISDN Ringback Tone If Telco does not provide ringback tone, SV8100 can if 10-03-17 is set to 1:Enable. 18 Type of Number ISDN Protocol definition. Select the number type for the ISDN circuit. 19 Numbering Plan Identification ISDN Protocol definition. Select the Numbering Plan used for the ISDN circuit. 20 Network Exchange Selection Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit. 2 - 12 21 Number of Ports 22 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default 0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity) 1 = Level 1 2 = Level 2 3 = Level 3 4 = Level 4 5 = Level 5 6 = Level 6 7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity) 2 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Unknown 1 = International number 2 = National number 3 = Network Specific number 4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number 2 0 = Unknown 1 = ISDN numbering plan 2 = Data numbering plan 3 = Telex numbering plan 4 = National standard numbering plan 5 = Private numbering plan 1 0 = Standard (same as NI-2) 1 = reserved 2 = reserved 3 = DMS (A211) 4 = 5ESS 5 = DMS (A233) 6 = 4ESS 7 = NI-2 0 0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports 0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 23 Item Straight/Cross Wiring Input Data Default 0 0 = Auto 1 = Manual (Cross) 2 = Manual (Straight) For DTI (T1) PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 01~24 Item Logical Port Number Input Data Default 0~200 0 The start port number of a T1 line is displayed, and 24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a DTI (T1) line. 02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame) 1 03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 1 = AMI/ZCS 0 04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet 2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet 3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet 4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet 0 05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1 = External 1 06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports 0 07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 1 = Manual (Cross) 2 = Manual (Straight) 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 13 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 For IPLA PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 001~200 Item Input Data Default 01 Trunk Logical Port Number 0~200 0 02 Trunk Type 0 = H.323 1 = SIP 1 03 CCIS Trunk 0 = Not CCIS 1 = CCIS 0 For VM00 PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 01~16 Item Logical Port Number Input Data Default 0 0~256 For CCTA PKG Setup Physical Port Number Item No. 01 01~24 Item Logical Port Number Input Data Default 0~200 0 The start port number of a T1 line is displayed, and 24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a DTI (T1) line. 2 - 14 02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame) 1 03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 1 = AMI/ZCS 0 04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet 2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet 3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet 4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet 0 05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1 = External 1 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports 0 07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 1 = Manual (Cross) 2 = Manual (Straight) 0 Conditions When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually. The system must have a blade installed to view/change the options for that type of blade. Feature Cross Reference Universal Slots SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 15 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-04 : Music On Hold Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized selections. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Music on Hold Source Selection Input Data Default 2 0 = Internal MOH 1 = External MOH 2 = Service Tone 3 = VMDB Description The Music on Hold (MOH) source can be internal (synthesized) or from a customer-provided music source. The customer-provided source can connect to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP or the connector on the side of the Base Cabinet MOH/ IN connection. Trunk MOH and Extension MOH music source use the same Music on Hold source. 2 - 16 02 Music on Hold Tone Selection [If Item 1 is 0] 1 = Download File1 2 = Download File2 3 = Download File3 [If Item 1 is 1, 2, or 3] 1~100 = VRS Message Number 1 03 Audio Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Background Music Music on Hold SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 17 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits (5~8) on PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for General Purpose Relay. Input Data General Purpose Relay No. Item No. 01 1~8 Item Input Data Slot No. Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No. Slot No: 0~24 DLCA Port: 0~16 Relay No: 0, 5~8 Default 0-0-0 After each entry, press the Transfer Key to advance to the next entry. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 18 Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-06 : ISDN - BRI Setup to configure the ISDN - BRI Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI), mode of operation, and Service Profile Identifier (SPID) number for each circuit B-Channels. Input Data SLOT Number 1 ~ 24 ISDN - BRI Circuit 1~4 Item No. 01 Item TEI Selection Select the method the system uses when assigning Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) values to BRI ports. Input Data Default 0 = Select by SPID number 1 = Select by Channel ID number 0 0 02 DID Mode 0 = Route by Called Party Number 1 = Route by Redirecting Number 03 SPID 1 Dial up to 20 digits No Setting 04 SPID 2 Dial up to 20 digits No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 19 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle. Input Data Item No. 01 Description Pre-Ringing Input Data 0 = No 1 = Yes Default 0 Conditions Used with Analog Trunks only. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 20 Central Office Calls, Answering Synchronous Ringing Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CD-CP00-US for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CD-CP00-US has 32 circuits initially, and an addition 64 circuits are added when a PZ-BS10 is installed. These are used as follows: Extension DTMF receiver for single line telephone Trunk DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection for analog trunks Input Data Circuit/Resource Number Item No. 01 Input Data 0 = Common Use 1 = Extension Only 2 = Trunk Only The CD-CP00-US has 32 channel DSP resources (receivers) only for basic chassis. When a PZ-BS10 is installed there are 64 DSP resources (receivers) available. In case 0 = Common is selected and if 14-02-10 (Caller ID receive ability) is set to “Yes”, DSP resources are always allocated to analog trunks not analog extensions. If 14-02-10 is set to “No”, DSP resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions. 01~160 Default Setting Circuit/Resource 01~08 = 1 (Extensions) Circuit/Resource 09~32 = 2 (Trunks) (Circuit/Resource 33~96 are not used.) Circuit/Resource 97~160 = 0 (Common) When PZ-BS10 is installed, 97~160 are available. Conditions None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 21 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Cross Reference 2 - 22 Caller ID Central Office Calls, Placing Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Tie Lines Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses. Caution! If any IP Address or NIC setting is changed, the system must be reset for the changes to take affect. Input Data Item No. Item 01 IP Address Input Data Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 Description 192.168.0.10 Set for CD-CP00-US. 255.255.255.0 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all Host Addresses are 0. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 02 Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 128.0, 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 191.255, 255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255 If the network section is: 0, 127, 192.0.0, 223.255.255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid. 03 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 IP Address for Router. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 23 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item 04 Time Zone 05 NIC Interface Input Data 0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours) 0 = Auto Detect Default Description +7 (-5 hours) Determine the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) time. Then enter its respective value. For example, Eastern Time (US and Canada) has a GMT offset of -5. The program data would then be 7 (0= -12, 1= -11, 2= -10, 3= -9, 4= 8, 5= -7, 6= -6, 7= -5, ……24= +12) 0 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex NIC Auto Negotiate (CD-CP00-US) 2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex 3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex 4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex 06 07 08 09 Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) Router Setup 0 = No (Disable) NAPT Router IP Address (Default Gateway [WAN]) 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 ICMP Redirect 0 = Enable IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0 If using an external NAPT Router or not. 0.0.0.0 Set the IP address on the WAN side of router. 0 When receiving ICMP redirect message, this determines if the IP Routing Table updates automatically or not. 1 = Yes (Enable) 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 1 = Disable 172.16.0.10 Set for IPLA. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 2 - 24 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 10 11 Item Input Data Subnet Mask NIC Setup Default 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255 0 = Auto Detect Description 255.255.0.0 Set for IPLA. 0 Set for IPLA. 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex 2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex 3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex 4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex 5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex 6 = 1 Gbps, Half Duplex Conditions The system must be reset for these changes to take affect. Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 25 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CD-CP00-US blade. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the built-in DHCP Server. 02 Lease Time Days 0~255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to a client. Hour 0~23 0 hour Minutes 1~59 05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Press the Transfer Key to increment to the next setting data. 30 minutes 1 If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting determines if DHCP resource is enabled or disabled. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 26 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-14 : Managed Network Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP Server leases to a client. Item No. Item 01 The Range of the IP address to Lease. When Maximum has not been entered, the maximum value equals the minimum value. Input Data Minimum: Default Related Program 172.16.0.100 1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254 When Single is selected in 10-13-04, only 1 scope range can be entered. Maximum: When Divide Same Network is selected in 10-13-04, a maximum of 10 scope ranges can be entered. 128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 172.16.5.254 1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 27 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-15 : Client Information Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients. Input Data Client Number Item No. 01 1~512 Item The IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program 10-14. Input Data MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Default 00-00-00-00-00-00 0.0.0.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 28 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to each client. Input Data Item No. 01 Item 3 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 6 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 TFTP Server Code number 0~255 66 (Fixed) Set the name for the TFTP Server. Maximum 64 character strings No setting MGC Code number 0~255 129 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 172.16.0.10 Code number 0~255 12 (Fixed) Maximum 64 character strings No setting Code number 0~255 15 (Fixed) Maximum 20 character strings No setting DNS Server Set IP address of DNS Server. 03 05 06 Client Host Name Set the Client Host Name. 07 Default Code number 0~255 Router Set the Router IP address. 02 Input Data DNS Domain Name Set the DNS Domain Name. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 29 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 16 2 - 30 Item Input Data Default Download Protocol Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed) Set Download Protocol used for AutoConfig (for DT700 Series). Sub code number 163 1 = FTP 2 = HTTP 1 Encryption Information Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed) Set an Encryption Information used for AutoConfig (for DT700 series). Sub code number 164 Maximum 128 character strings No setting FTP Server Address Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed) Set a FTP Server Address used for AutoConfig. Sub code number 141 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Config File Name Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed) Set a File Name used for AutoConfig. Sub code number 151 Maximum 15 character strings No setting Code number 0~255 60 (Fixed) Maximum 256 character strings NECDT700 Code number 0~255 69 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 70 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 172.16.0.10 Vender Class ID SNMP Server POP3 Server SIP Server (IP Address) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item 17 SIP Server (Domain Name) 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 FTP Server Config File Name LDS Server 1 LDS Server 2 LDS Server 3 LDS Server 4 Next Server IP Address SIP Server Receive Port SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Default Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed) Maximum 20 character strings No setting Code number 0~255 141 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 151 (Fixed) Maximum 15 character strings No setting Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed) IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Code number 0~255 168 (Fixed) Port: 1~65535 5080 2 - 31 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 32 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper information. Item 01 Name Gatekeeper Mode Set IP Address either automatically or manually if using an external Gatekeeper. Input Data 0 = No Gatekeeper 1 = Automatic 2 = Manual 02 Gatekeeper IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 04 Preferred Gatekeeper Maximum 124 characters Default 0 0.0.0.0 No setting When 10-17-01 is set to 1, use this to set the preferred ID of multiple Gatekeepers. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference IP Trunk – H.323 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 33 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered to the outside H.323 Gatekeeper. Input Data Number of Alias Item 01 Name Alias Address Set the telephone number (Alias Address) to external gatekeeper. 02 1~6 Alias Address Type Input Data Dial up to 12 digits (0~9, , #) 0 = E164 Default No setting 0 Set the Alias Address Type to external gatekeeper. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 34 IP Trunk – H.323 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection Level: SA Description Use Program 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource on the VoIP blade. Input Data Slot Number 1 DSP Resource Number 01~128 Input Data Input Data Item No. 01 Item VoIP DSP Resource Selection Input Data Default 0 = Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 = IP Extension 2 = SIP Trunk 3 = CCIS 4 = Use for NetLink 5 = Blocked 6 = Common without Unicast Paging 7 = Multicast Paging 8 = Unicast Paging Resource 1 = 1 Resource 2~128 = 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 35 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment Level: IN Description Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/ address/etc. for communicating to external equipment. Input Data Type of External Equipment Item No. 2 - 36 Item 1 = CTI Server 2 = ACD MIS 3 = Not Used 4 = Networking System 5 = SMDR Output 6 = DIM Output 7 = Reserved 8 = Reserved 9 = 1st Party CTI 10 = ACD Agent Control 11 = O&M Server 12 = Traffic Report Output 13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service 14 = IP-DECT Directory Access Input Data Default 01 TCP Port 0~65535 External Device 1 (CTI Server) = 0 External Device 2 (ACD MIS) = 4000 External Device 5 (SMDR Output) = 0 External Device 6 (DIM Output) = 0 External Device 11 (O&M Server) = 8010 External Device 12 (Traffic Report Output) = 0 External Device 13 (Room Data Output for Hotel Service) = 0 External Device 14 (IP-DECT Directory Access) = 0 03 Keep Alive Time 1~255 (sec) 30 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 37 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such as the baud rate of COM port and the switch for control on CD-CP00-US blade. Input Data Item No. 04 Item External Source I/O Selection on CD-CP00-US Determines the external music source input/ output selection for CD-CP00-US CN8 and CN9. Input Data Default 0 = External MOH (CN8)/ External Speaker(CN9) 1 = BGM source (CN8)/ External Speaker(CN9) 2 = External MOH (CN8)/BGM source (CN9) 1 Related Program Relationships between CN number and Relay number are as follows: CN8 = Relay2 CN9 = Relay1 05 General Purpose Relay Switch Selection on CD-CP00-US 0 = Off 1 = Relay 1 on CD-CP00-US 2 = Relay 2 on CD-CP00-US 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 38 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for SV8100 system interconnection. Input Data System Number 001~1000 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 System Interconnection 0 = No (Disable) 1 = Yes (Enable) 02 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 03 Call Procedure Port 1~65535 1720 04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits (0~9) None 0 0.0.0.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 39 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Daylight Savings Mode Enable/Disable the system ability to adjust the time for daylight savings/standard time. 02 Time for Daylight Savings Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 00:00~23:59 02:00 Enter the time of day when the system should adjust for daylight savings time. 03 Start Month (Summer Time) Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01~12). 04 Start of Week Enter the week of the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time. The week will start on the day listed in 10-24-05. 05 Start of Week Day Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.). 06 End of Month Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for standard time (01~12). 07 End of Week Enter the week of the month when the system should adjust the time for standard time. The week will start on the Day listed in 10-24-08. 2 - 40 1~12 (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.) 3 0 = Last Week of Month 0~5 2 1~7 (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.) 1 1~12 (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.) 11 0 = Last Week of Month 0~5 1 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 08 Item End of Week Day Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.). Input Data Default 1~7 (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.) 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Clock/Calendar Display SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 41 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix registered to the outside gatekeeper. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Gateway Prefix Entry 0 = Off 1 = On 02 Gateway Prefix Value Up to 12 digits (0~9, , #) Default 0 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 42 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP MLT and SIP IP stations. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 1 02 RTP Forwarding Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 1 04 DT700 Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 1 Conditions Disabling 10-26-04 results in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource. (V2000 or higher) SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and results in using a DSP resource. (V1200 or lower) Disabling 10-26-03 results in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 43 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Domain Name Set the domain name of the SIP-URL. 02 Host Name Set the host name of the SIP-URL. 03 Transport Protocol Set the protocol for the connection. 04 UserID User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message. Use it for outbound caller ID information if no information is assigned in commands 21-17, 21-19, 15-16, 14-12, and 10-36. A call cannot be completed across the span if there is no outbound CID info. The reason for this is: the from and display portions of the invite message would be blank, and it would not know where the call originated from. 2 - 44 Input Data Default Up to 64 Characters (ex.:[email protected]) None Up to 48 Characters (ex.:[email protected]) None 0 0 = UDP 1 = TCP Up to 32 Characters When assigning the User ID, the ID may contain only alpha characters. (A space and/or special characters are not allowed in the User ID field). (ex.:[email protected]) None Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data 05 Domain Assignment If the information from Telco was a domain name ([email protected]) then set to domain. If the information for Telco was a IP address then set to IP Address. 06 IP Trunk Port Binding Trunk port binding is only used for SIP trunks to the provider in NonRegistration Mode only. When this is disabled, an inbound call comes in and follows your DID routing but it comes in on the first available trunk. When enabled, the inbound call comes in and follows your normal DID routing but maps to that specified trunk. If that trunk is busy, it sends back a busy unless you build a hunt group. To build the hunt group, it references command 14-12-02 (pilot register ID). This points you to command 10-36-02. All numbers with the same pilot are in the same hunt group. 0 = IP Address 1 = Domain Name 0 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 45 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound/inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode. If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the SV8100 still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Default Proxy (Outbound) Set whether or not the SIP message is always sent through the Default Proxy. 02 Default Proxy (Inbound) Need to be registered in registration mode. Input Data Default 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Set whether or not the SIP message is always received through the Default Proxy. 03 Default Proxy IP Address This is optional and used if the provider gives you a proxy address that is different than the registration address. If the provider is using domain names instead of IP addresses, leave this at default. 2 - 46 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item 04 Default Proxy Port Number Input Data Default 0 ~ 65535 5060 0 = None 1 = Manual 0 Set the port number of the Default Proxy. 05 Registrar Mode Set the mode registered in the registration server. 06 Registrar IP Address Set the IP address of the SIP registration server. 07 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Registrar Port Number 0 ~ 65535 DNS Server Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 0.0.0.0 5060 Set the port number of the SIP registration server. 08 Determine if the DNS server is used. 09 DNS Server IP Address If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. Set the IP address of the DNS server. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0 0.0.0.0 53 10 DNS Port Number 0 ~ 65535 11 Registrar Domain Name Up to 128 Characters None Up to 64 Characters None Up to 48 Characters None If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. Set the the port number of the DNS server. Set the domain name of the registration server. 12 Domain Name Specify the domain name of the SIP server. 13 SV8100 Programming Manual Proxy Host Name Specify the host name of the SIP server. 2 - 47 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item 14 SIP Carrier Choice Select the carrier type of the SIP server. 15 Registration Expiry (Expire) Time Input Data 0~7 0 = Standard 1 = Carrier A 2 = Carrier B 3 = Carrier C 4 = Carrier D 5 = Carrier E 6 = Carrier F 7 = Carrier G 120 ~ 65535 seconds Default 0 3600 Set the expiration time when the SIP trunk registers to the SIP server. When half the time set here passes, the registration update is automatically done. 16 Register Sub Mode Prevents an invalid Invite message. If "the register information that SV8100 send to SIP server" and "the Invite information that SV8100 receive" are different, SV8100 sends “404 Not Found” Message. If PRG10-29-05 Register Mode is 0:Off, it is necessary to set 0:off in PRG10-29-16. 17 DNS Source Port 0 = Off (Allow invalid Invite message) 1 = On (Deny invalid Invite message) 0~65535 0 53 (10-29-08 must be On) Set the DNS source port number. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 48 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. 02 Item User Name Input Data Default Up to 64 Characters None Up to 32 Characters None Set the user name of the SIP trunk. 03 Password Set the SIP trunk password. 04 Authentication Trial 0~9 1 Select how many times it tries an authenticate before timing out and not registering. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 49 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Registration Expire Time Input Data Default 60 ~ 65535 3600 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 After this time expires, the UAs are forced to reregister with the CPU. This allows the CPU to keep a current location of the entire end UAs. 02 Authentication Mode Check here if a password is desired for the IP SIP phones to register. When checked, 15-05-16 must have a password entered and the SIP phone must have the same password. When using Authentication, the station number is the authorization name. 03 Registrar/Proxy Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. 2 - 50 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data 04 Registrar/Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters None Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 51 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration information. Input Data Register ID 1~31 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Registration Determine if the SIP trunk information is registered. 02 Input Data Default 0 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Up to 32 Characters None Authentication User ID Up to 64 Characters None Authentication Password Up to 32 Characters None User ID Set the SIP trunk User ID. 03 Set the SIP trunk Authentication User ID. 04 Set the SIP trunk authentication password. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 52 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-37 : UPnP Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. 01 Item UPnP Mode Router must support UPnP. 02 Retry Time Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 0,60 ~ 3600 (1~59 cannot be input) 60 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 53 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup to configure the Background Music Source input. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 BGM Resource Type 0 = CD-CP00-US (MOH/IN) 1 = ACI Port 0 02 ACI Port Number for BGM Source (only used if 10-38-01 is set to 1) 0 ~ 96 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 54 Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Background Music Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-39 : Fractional Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Fractional Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 55 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability Level: IN Description Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled. Input Data Slot Number 1 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 IP Trunk Availability 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 02 Number of Ports 0~200 0 04 Number of IP CCIS Ports 0~200 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 56 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0~30 (0 = No setting) 0 02 Logical Trunk Port Number 0~168 0 03 Logical Station Port Number 0~480 0 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1 05 Calling Party Number 0 = No 1 = Yes 1 06 --- Not Used --- 07 --- Not Used --- Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 57 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table. Input Data Routing Table Number 001~100 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Network Address Input Data Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.0 ~ 191.254.255.254 0.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254 02 03 Subnet Mask Default Gateway 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 0.0.0.0 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 58 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup to setup the information of SIP Multiline (DT700 series) Server. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Register Mode Normal:: When the phone boots up, it reports the ext. assigned in the phone or chooses the next available extension in the system. Password is not required. Input Data 0 = Normal 1 = Auto 2 = Manual Default Related Program 0 Auto: If set to Auto, the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone. These settings must match 84-22/15-0527, or the phone does not come on-line. Manual: When the phone boots up, it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in. If the user name and password are programmed in the SIP User settings in the telephone, it comes up without prompting the user. It checks this user ID/ password against 84-22/ 15-05-27. If there is no match, the phone does not come on-line. 04 Server Name Up to 32 characters sipphd Assign the Server name to be used in the SIP URL. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 59 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 06 Item Register Port Input Data Default Related Program 5080 0~65535 Assign the port number in which the SIP messages are sent to on the IPLA. This same port number must be assigned in the SIP Multiline terminals. If this command is changed, it requires a CPU reset. 07 Encryption Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 0 08 Encryption Type 0 = Mode1 0 09 One Time Password Up to 10 characters (0~9, , #) 10 Start Port 1~512 11 Multicast IP Address 224.0.0.0~ 239.255.255.255 Set the Multicast IP address so that two or more main devices don’t overlap on the same network, or if Multicast is used by other IP services. 2 - 60 None 10-46-07 1 10-46-01 224.0.0.10 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 12 Item Multicast Port Input Data Default 0~65535 30000 5081 Related Program The port number that is used for paging will change based upon the following information. The formula for the ports that will be used is: Starting port number assigned in 10-46-12 + Management ID * 2 The value of the Management ID is from 1 to 64. The Management ID will count up sequentially, for example: 10-46-12 = 3000 The first page the system makes will use port 30002 (3000 + 1*2). The second page the system makes will use port 30004 (3000 + 2*2). The Management ID will increment every time the page is used. After the Management ID reaches 64 it will start over, so the next page will use Management ID 1. The max. port starting from 3000 would be 30128 (3000 +64*2) 13 Subscribe Session Port 0~65535 14 NAT Mode 0 = Off 1 = On When the system controls the SIP multiline terminal via the NAT router, this system data is set to On. 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 61 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of Terminal License Server. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Register Port of TCP I/F 0~65535 02 TCP Keep Alive Time 1~255 seconds Default Description 6080 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 62 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-48 : License Activation Level: IN Description Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Software Key Code 20-digit character None 02 Activation Code 8-digit hexadecimal number None 03 Feature Code 7-digit number None Key Operation for Item 03 Transfer key: Edit next feature code • • Up to 10 feature codes are possible to input at once. Register the license when 10th feature code is edited. Soft Key2 (BACK): Edit previous feature code Soft Key3 (SUBMIT): Register the license Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 63 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-49 : License File Activation Level: IN Description Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via USB memory which is issued from the license server. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Save License File on USB Drive Input Data Dial 1 + TRF (Press TRF to cancel) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 64 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-50 : License Information Level: IN Description Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system. Input Data Item No. Item Read Data 01 License Name None 02 License Quantity 0~32767 03 Free License Quantity 0~32767 04 Free License Remaining Days 0~9999 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 65 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Refer to the following table to assist with licensing information. Table 2-2 License Information 2 - 66 License Code License Name Reset Required 0001 Max. Port Yes 0002 NetLink Yes 0007 Hotel/Motel (PMS) Yes 0008 SMDR 0009 Remote Upgrade Yes 0014 256 Port Yes 0030 Encryption On/Off 0031 V3000 Enhanced On/Off 0111 1stPartyCTI Ether 0112 3rdPartyCTI Clien 0123 SOAI Interface 0141 DTPlusWare User 1 64 1001 VRS 1 16 1002 InMail 1 8 Min Max Note On/Off 1 49 On/Off On/Off On USB Drive required to load software On/Off 1 Yes 128 On/Off On/Off 1011 InMail Multi Lan 1013 Email Notify No 1 20 1014 InMail Email Clnt No 1401 UMS Port No 1402 UMS Fax Port 1403 UMS TTS Port 1 6 1404 UMS Client 1 512 1406 UMS Multi Languag 1 25 1407 UMS Hosp. and PMS 1408 UMS Hosp. Languag 1409 UMS Amis/Plus Net On/Off 0 512 1 16 1 4 InMail Email Clients On/Off 1 10 On/Off Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-2 License Information (Continued) Reset Required License Code License Name 1410 UMS TTS Language 1424 UMS LITE 2Basic 1425 UMS LITE Ch 1426 UMS LITE 2UP On/Off 2-Port LITE Upgrade Kit. 1427 UMS LITE FULL On/Off Upgrade from UMS LITE to FULL License. 2001 ACD On/Off 2102 ACD-MIS Basic On/Off 2103 ACD-MIS Add.Monit 1 2104 ACD-MIS Agent 1 3000 CA-Basic On/Off 3001 CA-256 Station On/Off 3002 CA-Up 20 to 256 3003 CA-Network Client 1 999 3004 CA-AddRemote Site 1 999 3005 CARemoteSiteSoft 1 999 3006 CA-Traffic Analys On/Off 3007 CA-PMS Intergratio On/Off 3008 CA-Web Reporting On/Off SV8100 Programming Manual Min Max 1 10 Note On/Off 1 8 UMS Port License. The Lite license does not support Textto-speech, Networking and will support up to two ports for fax. 4 197 On/Off 2 - 67 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-2 License Information (Continued) Reset Required License Code License Name Min Max 3009 CA-IPKII CA Migra On/Off 3010 CA-IPKII CESMigra On/Off 3013 CA-Add Stations 3200 IP Recorder Basic 3201 Note 1 256 IP Recorder Basic SUPV 1 256 3202 IP Recorder Basic Port 1 256 5001 IP Trunk 1 128 Limited by IPL Channels 5101 IP Terminal Basic 1 512 Limited by IPL Channels 5102 IP Terminal SoftPhone 1 128 Limited by IPL Channels 5111 IP Terminal Advan 1 512 Limited by IPL Channels 5301 SoftPhone 1 128 5303 SoftPhone Enhance 1 128 5304 Shared Services 1 128 5305 Desktop Client 1 128 6000 PVA-CONF Port 1 16 6101 PVA-IVR Port 1 16 6200 PVA-CCIS Port 1 200 Conditions Confirm license by entering Feature Code No. (0~9999) Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 68 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA Level: IN Description Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA to select whether the CD-PRTA works as PRI or T1. Input Data System ID 0~50 Slot Number 01~24 Input Data Input Data Item No. 01 Item PRI/T1 Selection Choose whether the CD-PRTA works as PRI or T1. Input Data 0 = PRI 1 = T1 Default 0 = PRI Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 69 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information Level: IN Description Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo license. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Remaining days of Free/ Demo License Read Data 0~9999 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 70 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package Level: IN Description Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license information for each unit. Input Data Slot Number 1~24 License Index Number 1~32 Input Data Input Data Item No. Item Read Data 01 License Code 0000~9999 02 License Quantity 0~255 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 71 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-55 : Package Network Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 10-55 : Package Network Setup to set the network information for each unit. This program sets the SPOE of each package. Input Data Slot Number 1~24 Input Data Item No. Item 01 IP Address 02 --- Not Used --- 03 04 Input Data 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254 172.16.1.100 Main/Add-on 0 = Main 1 = Add-on 1 Sub Net Mask 128.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.254 05 2 - 72 Default Default Gateway 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 73 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone Level: IN Description Use Program 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone to set the contents of XML portal page provided to the IP Phone. The XML Portal Page is included in the XML application name and URL Link information. XML URL Link Information can be set for up to five system bases. Input Data XML URL Information Link 1~5 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Name Up to 40 characters. No Setting 02 URL Up to 256 characters. No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 74 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-58 : Network Address Level: IN Description Use Program 10-58 : Network Address to set the local network address when the SIP multiline terminal connects the system via a local router. Input Data Area Table 1~8 Input Data Item No. 01 Network Address Sets local network address. 02 Default Related Program 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 10-46-14 248.0.0.0 / 252.0.0.0 / 254.0.0.0 / 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 / 255.192.0.0 / 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 / 255.248.0.0 / 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 / 255.255.0.0 / 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 / 255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 / 255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 / 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0 / 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 / 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 / 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 / 255.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 10-46-14 Item Subnet Mask Sets local subnet mask. Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 75 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 76 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering Level: IN Description Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site. CAUTION! Program 11 Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-79 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes. Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data. Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps: Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change You can make either single- or two-digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-79 table, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes. Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected are 600~699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are 6000~6999.) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 77 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined. Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (PRG 11-20) to define the codes. Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single- or two-digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-79 table. Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-79 table. The choices are: Dial Types 2 - 78 Dial Type Description Related Program 0 --- Not Used --- 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access Code 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code 4 Special Trunk Access 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code 5 Operator Access 6 ARS/F-Route Access 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup 11-02 : Extension Numbering 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number 20-17 : Operator Extension 44-xx Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Dial Types 9 Dial Type Description Dial Extension Analyze Related Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. To make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 ~ 11-16.) Default See the following tables for default settings. Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default SV8100 Programming Manual New Dial Type Default 1X 3 2 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1# 0 0 2X 3 2 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 New 2 - 79 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued) Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default 2 - 80 New Dial Type Default 27 0 0 28 0 0 29 0 0 20 0 0 2 0 0 2# 0 0 3X 4 2 31 0 0 32 0 0 33 0 0 34 0 0 35 0 0 36 0 0 37 0 0 38 0 0 39 0 0 30 0 0 3 0 0 3# 0 0 4X 3 1 41 0 0 42 0 0 43 0 0 44 0 0 45 0 0 46 0 0 47 0 0 48 0 0 49 0 0 New Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued) Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default SV8100 Programming Manual New Dial Type Default 40 0 0 4 0 0 4# 0 0 5X 3 1 51 0 0 52 0 0 53 0 0 54 0 0 55 0 0 56 0 0 57 0 0 58 0 0 59 0 0 50 0 0 5 0 0 5# 0 0 6X 3 1 61 0 0 62 0 0 63 0 0 64 0 0 65 0 0 66 0 0 67 0 0 68 0 0 69 0 0 60 0 0 6 0 0 6# 0 0 New 2 - 81 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued) Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default 2 - 82 New Dial Type Default 7X 3 1 71 0 0 72 0 0 73 0 0 74 0 0 75 0 0 76 0 0 77 0 0 78 0 0 79 0 0 70 0 0 7 0 0 7# 0 0 8X 1 1 81 0 0 82 0 0 83 0 0 84 0 0 85 0 0 86 0 0 87 0 0 88 0 0 89 0 0 80 0 0 8 0 0 8# 0 0 9X 1 3 91 0 0 92 0 0 New Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued) Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default SV8100 Programming Manual New Dial Type Default 93 0 0 94 0 0 95 0 0 96 0 0 97 0 0 98 0 0 99 0 0 90 0 0 9 0 0 9# 0 0 0X 1 5 01 0 0 02 0 0 03 0 0 04 0 0 05 0 0 06 0 0 07 0 0 08 0 0 09 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0# 0 0 X 2 1 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 New 2 - 83 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued) Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 # 0 0 #X 0 0 #1 2 1 #2 2 1 #3 2 1 #4 2 1 #5 2 1 #6 2 1 #7 2 1 #8 2 1 #9 2 1 #0 2 1 # 4 1 ## 2 1 New Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 84 Flexible System Numbering Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-02 : Extension Numbering Level: IN Description Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number. Input Data Extension Port Number Item No. Extension Number 01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) 001 ~ 512 Description Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line telephones (including SLTII Adapter, APR), and IP telephones. Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17. Default 1 101 2 102 3 103 SV8100 Programming Manual 199 100 3101 ~ 99 ~ ~ Extension Number ~ Extension Port Number 512 3513 2 - 85 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 86 Department Calling Flexible System Numbering Intercom Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering Level: IN Description Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. Input Data Virtual Extension Numbers Item No. 01 Virtual Extension Number Dial (up to 8 digits) 001~256 Description Set up Virtual Extension numbers. The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17. Default 1 201 2 202 3 203 SV8100 Programming Manual 299 100 3601 ~ 99 ~ ~ Extension Number ~ Virtual Port Number 256 3857 2 - 87 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 88 Flexible System Numbering Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering Level: IN Description Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number used for the ACI. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. Input Data ACI Port Number Item No. ACI Extension Number 01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) 01~96 Description The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17. Related Program 10-03 : Basic Configuration for each blade. Default ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Flexible System Numbering SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 89 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers Level: IN Description Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2. Input Data Department (Extension) Group Number Item No. Extension Group Pilot Number 01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) 01~64 Description Assign department group pilot numbers. The number set up by Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering) cannot be used. The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-08, and 11-17. Related Program 16-01 : Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions 16-03 : Secondary Department Group Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 90 Department Calling Department Step Calling Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number Level: IN Description Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI Groups set in Program 33-02. The pilot number can have up to four digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2. Input Data ACI Group Number Item No. 01 ACI Group Pilot Number Dial (Up to 8 digits) 01~16 Description The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-07, and 11-17. Related Program 33-02 Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 91 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-09 : Trunk Access Code Level: IN Description Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9). The trunk access code can be set from 1~8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection. The individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line. Caution! The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01. Input Data 2 - 92 Item No. Trunk Access Code 01 Dial (Up to four digits) Description Default Assign the trunk access code (normally 9). This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection. 9 Related Program 11-01 : System Numbering 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing 21-02: Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Description Default Define additional trunk access codes. When a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code, the system routes their call to the Alternate Trunk Route. No Setting Related Program 11-01 : System Numbering 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection Central Office Calls, Placing Trunk Group Routing SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 93 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11~11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~42). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing Item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect. Input Data Item No. 2 - 94 Item Terminals Default MLT, SLT 718 Related Program 12-xx 20-07-01 01 Night Mode Switching 02 --- Not Used --- 03 Setting the System Time MLT 728 04 Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers MLT 753 05 Storing Group Speed Dialing Numbers MLT 754 06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line MLT 733 24-04-01 07 Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line MLT 734 24-04-01 08 Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer MLT 735 24-04-01 09 Charging Cost Display by the Supervisor MLT Not Set 10 --- Not Used --- 11 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction MLT Not Set Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Related Program Terminals Default MLT 618 12-xx 20-07-01 12 Night Mode Switching for Other Group 13 --- Not Used --- 14 --- Not Used --- 15 --- Not Used --- 16 Leaving Message Waiting (Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel/Motel) MLT 626 11-11-09 17 Dial Block by Supervisor MLT 601 90-19 18 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box MLT 722 13-05 19 --- Not Used --- 20 VRS - Record/Erase Message MLT, SLT 616 20-07-13 21 VRS - General Message Playback MLT, SLT 611 20-07-14 22 VRS - Record or Erase General Message MLT, SLT 612 20-07-15 23 SMDR - Extension Accumulated Printout Code MLT 621 20-07-18 24 SMDR - Group Accumulated Printout Code MLT 622 20-07-19 25 Account Code Accumulated Printout Code MLT 623 20-07-20 26 Forced Trunk Disconnect MLT, SLT Not Set 20-07-11 27 Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing Calls MLT, SLT 645 20-07-12 28 --- Not Used --- 29 --- Not Used --- 30 --- Not Used --- 31 --- Not Used --- 32 Set Private Call Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set 33 Entry Caller ID Refuse MLT Not Set 34 Set Caller ID Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set 35 Dial-In Mode Switching MLT, SLT Not Set SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 95 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default MLT, SLT Not Set 36 Change the Guidance Message Number on Voice Mail Auto Attendant 41 Date Setting MLT Not Set 42 Maintenance Service MLT Not Set Related Program 20-07-30 MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 96 Refer to Input Data chart on the previous pages. Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~65). The function of the Service Code. What type of telephones can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing 725 (Item 18) allows users to turn on or turn off Background Music. Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default Related Program 01 Call Forward – All MLT, SLT 741 02 Call Forward – Busy MLT, SLT 742 03 Call Forward – No Answer MLT, SLT 743 04 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer MLT, SLT 744 05 Call Forward – Both Ring MLT, SLT 745 06 --- Not Used --- 07 Call Forwarding – Follow-Me MLT, SLT 746 08 Do Not Disturb MLT, SLT 747 09 Answer Message Waiting MLT, SLT 0 10 Cancel All Messages Waiting MLT, SLT 773 11 Cancel Message Waiting MLT, SLT 771 12 Alarm Clock MLT, SLT 727 20-01-06 13 Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal MLT 678 15-02 SV8100 Programming Manual 11-10-16 2 - 97 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item Terminals Default Related Program 14 Text Message Setting MLT No Setting 15 Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 721 20-09-05 20-02-12 16 Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 723 20-09-05 20-02-12 17 Programmable Function Key Programming (2-Digit Service Codes) MLT 751 15-07 11-11-38 18 BGM On/Off MLT 725 19 Key Touch Tone On/Off MLT 724 20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones MLT 720 21 Check Incoming Ring Tones MLT 711 22 Extension Name Programming MLT 700 23 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL MLT 679 24 Change Station Class of Service MLT 677 20-13-28 20-11-17 24-05 15-02 15-01 Allow an extension user to change the COS of another extension. Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28. 2 - 98 25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 602 26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 603 27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group MLT 604 20-11-17 24-05 28 Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group MLT, SLT 605 20-11-17 24-05 24-02-08 29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 606 20-11-17 30 DND Setup for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 607 31 DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 608 32 --- Not Used --- 33 Dial Block MLT, SLT 600 34 Temporary Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 775 35 Pilot Group Withdrawing MLT, SLT 650 36 Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 663 21-07 21-14 Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item Terminals Default Related Program 37 Ring Volume Set MLT 729 38 Programmable Function Key Programming (3-Digit Service Codes) MLT 752 39 Station Speed Dial Number Entry MLT, SLT 755 40 --- Not Used --- 41 Tandem Ringing MLT, SLT No Setting 42 --- Not Used --- 43 Headset Mode Switching MLT, SLT 688 44 Auto Attendant MLT, SLT No Setting 45 Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split) MLT, SLT No Setting 46 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split) MLT, SLT No Setting 47 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT No Setting 48 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT No Setting 49 Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split) MLT, SLT No Setting 50 Set Message Waiting Indication SLT No Setting 15-03-03 45-01-01 51 Cancel Message Waiting Indication SLT No Setting 15-03-03 45-01-01 52 Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No Split) MLT, SLT 790 53 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No Split) MLT, SLT 791 54 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination (No Split) MLT, SLT 792 55 Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No Split) MLT, SLT 793 56 Telephone Book Lock Service MLT No Setting 57 Set Do Not Call Table MLT, SLT No Setting SV8100 Programming Manual 15-07 11-11-17 15-07 30-03 2 - 99 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item Terminals Default Related Program 58 Call Forward with Personal Greeting MLT, SLT 713 59 Call Forward to Attendant except Busy MLT, SLT No Setting 15-01-08 60 Call Forward to Attendant/No Answer MLT, SLT No Setting 15-01-09 62 Headset Ring Volume Adjustment MLT 662 11-11-37 15-02-12 15-02-41 15-02-42 63 Double Height Character Indication MLT No Setting 15-02-45 64 Reverse Display Indication MLT No Setting 15-02-44 65 Headset Mode Switching MLT No Setting MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 100 Refer to the Input Data chart above. Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~59). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing 770 (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp-On. Programs that may be affected with the changing the code. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Bypass Call Terminals Default Related Program MLT, SLT 707 11-16-09 Activate Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override. This code is available only if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09. 02 Conference MLT, SLT #1 03 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) MLT, SLT 709 04 Set Camp-On MLT, SLT 750 05 Cancel Camp-On MLT, SLT 770 06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call MLT, SLT 712 07 Step Call MLT, SLT 708 08 Barge-In MLT, SLT 710 09 Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring MLT, SLT No Setting 10 Station Speed Dialing MLT, SLT #2 SV8100 Programming Manual 16-02 2 - 101 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 2 - 102 Item Terminals Default Related Program 11 Group Speed Dialing MLT, SLT #4 12 Last Number Dial MLT, SLT #5 13 Saved Number Dial MLT, SLT 715 14 Trunk Group Access MLT, SLT 704 15 Specified Trunk Access MLT, SLT #9 16 Trunk Access Via Networking MLT, SLT No Setting 17 Clear Last Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 776 18 Clear Saved Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 785 19 Internal Group Paging MLT, SLT 701 20 External Paging MLT, SLT 703 21 Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group MLT, SLT 764 22 Meet-Me Answer to External Paging MLT, SLT 765 23 Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group MLT, SLT 763 31-02-01 24 Combined Paging MLT, SLT 1 31-02-01 31-07 25 Direct Call Pickup - Own Group MLT, SLT 756 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group MLT, SLT 768 23-02 27 Call Pickup MLT, SLT # 23-02 28 Call Pickup for Another Group MLT, SLT 769 23-02 29 Direct Extension Call Pickup MLT, SLT 30 Specified Trunk Answer MLT, SLT 672 31 Park Hold MLT, SLT #6 24-03 32 Answer for Park Hold MLT, SLT 6 24-03 33 Group Hold MLT, SLT 732 34 Answer for Group Hold MLT, SLT 762 35 Station Park Hold MLT, SLT 757 36 Door Box Access MLT, SLT 702 37 Common Canceling Service Code MLT, SLT 620 31-01-01 31-02-01 Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. Item Terminals Default MLT 783 MLT, SLT #7 Related Program 38 General Purpose Indication 15-07-56 15-07-57 39 --- Not Used --- 40 Station Speed Dialing 41 Voice Over MLT 690 42 Flash on Trunk lines SLT #3 43 Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) MLT, SLT #0 44 Callback Test for SLT SLT 799 45 Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 749 15-03-07 46 Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 759 15-03-08 47 Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer SLT 794 11-12-03 SLT ## 11-16-08 14-05 14-06 Splitting (switching) between calls 48 Account Code 49 --- Not Used --- 50 General Purpose Relay MLT, SLT 780 51 VM Access (SV8100 InMail and VMS) MLT, SLT 8 52 Live Monitoring (SV8100 InMail) MLT No Setting 53 Live Recording at SLT MLT, SLT 654 54 VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS MLT, SLT 782 MLT 786 Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS. 55 --- Not Used --- 56 E911 Alarm Shut Off Enter the Service Code that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring. 57 Tandem Trunking MLT, SLT #8 58 Transfer Into Conference MLT, SLT 624 Assign the Service Code a user dials to Transfer a call to a Conference call. SV8100 Programming Manual 21-01-13 21-01-14 20-13-10 20-13-15 20-13-16 2 - 103 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 59 Item Trunk Drop Operation for SLT Terminals Default SLT No Setting Related Program MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 104 Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages. Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~13). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default MLT, SLT 5 ACD Log Out (for SLT) SLT 655 03 Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 656 04 Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 657 05 Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 658 06 Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 659 07 --- Not Used --- 08 Agent ID Code Login MLT No Setting MLT No Setting MLT 667 MLT 668 01 ACD Log In/Log Out (for KTS) 02 Allow an AIC Agent to log into a group. 09 Agent ID Code Logout Allow an AIC Agent to log out of a group. 10 ACD Agent Login by Supervisor Allow an ACD Supervisor to log into a group. 11 ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor Allow an ACD Supervisor to log out of a group. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 105 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 12 Terminals Item Change Agent ACD Group by Supervisor Default MLT 669 MLT 670 When using service code 669 to change an agent ACD group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit number for the group. For example, to change to ACD group 4, the entry would be 669 04. 13 ACD Agent Changing Own ACD Group Using this service code, an ACD Agent can reassign themselves to another ACD Group. MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 106 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~18). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default 01 Set DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 627 02 Cancel DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 628 03 Set DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 629 04 Cancel DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 630 05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 631 06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 632 07 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 633 08 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 634 09 Set Room to Room Call Restriction MLT, SLT 635 10 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) MLT, SLT 636 11 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension MLT, SLT 637 12 Check-In MLT, SLT 638 13 Check-Out MLT, SLT 639 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 107 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default 14 Room Status Change for Own Extension MLT, SLT 640 15 Room Status Change for Other Extension MLT, SLT 641 16 Room Status Output MLT 642 17 Hotel Room Monitor MLT, SLT 675 18 Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction MLT 666 MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 108 Hotel/Motel Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) Level: IN Description Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~14). The function of the Service Code. What type of telephones can use the Service Code. The default entry. Programs that may be affected when changing the code. Input Data Item No. Item Terminals Default 01 Remote Maintenance 730 02 ACD Access in Dial-In Conversion Table 760 03 Backup Data Save MLT ##9 Related Program 22-04 22-11 Save the user’s soft key settings (extension programmed Call Forwards, DND, etc.). This feature should be used before upgrading the system software. 04 --- Not Used --- 05 System Programming Mode, Log-On MLT ## 11-01 06 Wake on LAN to APSU Unit MLT No Setting 10-22 07 --- Not Used --- 08 Network Message Lamp Control SV8100 Programming Manual 766 2 - 109 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item 09 Transfer to Incoming Ring Group 10 --- Not Used --- 11 Ethernet Port Reset 12 Extension Data Swap 13 Remote Access from DISA 14 Modem Access Terminals Default Related Program No Setting MLT 92-04 No Setting 22-02 740 MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 110 Hotel/Motel Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01~11). The function of the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension switches the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined). Programs that may be affected by changing these codes. Input Data Item No. Item Default Related Program 01 Step Call 2 11-12-07 02 Barge-In No Setting 11-12-08 03 Switching of Voice/Signal Call 1 11-12-06 04 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling 11-12-03 05 Camp-On # 11-12-04 06 DND/Call Forward Override Bypass No Setting 11-12-01 07 Message Waiting 0 11-12-09 08 Voice Over 6 11-12-41 09 Access to Voice Mail 8 11-12-51 10 (Department) STG All Ring Mode No Setting 11-12-09 16-01-05 11 Station Park Hold No Setting 11-12-35 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 111 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 112 Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages. Program 11 : System Numbering UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number Level: IN Description Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD Group. This is the number a user dials to transfer calls to the ACD Group. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 500) for the master number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default, has a port number assigned (for example: in the 101~199, 3101~3257), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as an ACD Master Number, first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment. Input Data ACD Group Number 01~64 Item No. ACD Group Pilot Number 01 Dial (Up to eight digits) Default No ACD Group Pilot Number assigned to any ACD Group (1~64). Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 113 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 11 : System Numbering 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Level: IN Description Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more digits. This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze). Input Data Dial Extension Analyze Table 01~128 Item No. Dial Extension Analyze Table 01 Dial (Up to eight digits: 0, 1~9, #, , @) 02 Type of Dials: 0 = Not used 1 = Service Code 2 = Extension Number 5 = Operator Access 6 = F-Route Access Default Dial Extension Analyze Tables are not set at default. Conditions When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to determine the dial type. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 114 Program 11 : System Numbering Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Program Input Data Item No. Item 01 Manual Night Mode Switching 02 Automatic Night Mode Switching Input Data Related Program Default Description 0 = Off 1 = On 1 Allow/Prevent activating Night Service by dialing a service code. 11-10-01 0 = Off 1 = On 0 According to a preset schedule, enable or disable Automatic Night Service for the system. 12-02 12-03 12-04 12 Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the schedule set up. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 115 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns Level: SA Description Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32 Time Pattern Number 01~10 Set Time Number 01~20 Item Description Input Data 01 Start Time 0000~2359 02 End Time 0000~2359 03 Operation Mode 1~8 Example: Time Pattern 1 0:00 Mode 3 (midnight) 9:00 Mode 1 (day) 12:00 Mode 4 (rest) 13:00 Mode 1 (day) 17:00 Mode 4 (rest) 18:00 Mode 2 (night) 22:00 Mode 3 (midnight) 0:00 To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows: Time setting 01: Time setting 02: Time setting 03: Time setting 04: Time setting 05: Time setting 06: Time setting 07: 2 - 116 00:00 to 09:00 09:00 to 12:00 12:00 to 13:00 13:00 to 17:00 17:00 to 18:00 18:00 to 22:00 22:00 to 00:00 Mode 3 (midnight) Mode 1 (day) Mode 4 (rest) Mode 1 (day) Mode 4 (rest) Mode 2 (night) Mode 3 (midnight) Program 12 : Night Mode Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Time Pattern 2 0:00 Mode 2 (night) 0:00 Time setting 01: 00:00 to 00:00 Mode 2 (night) Default All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1 Time Pattern 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 02 03 04 : 20 0000 0800 1700 0000 : 0000 0800 1700 0000 0000 : 0000 2 1 2 1 : 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 02 : 20 0000 0000 : 0000 0000 0000 : 0000 2 1 : 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 : 20 0000 : 0000 0000 : 0000 1 : 1 Time Pattern 2 Time Pattern 3~10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 117 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching Level: SA Description Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch settings. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number Item No. 01~32 Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 = Sunday 02 = Monday 03 = Tuesday 01 04 = Wednesday 0~10 05 = Thursday 06 = Friday 07 = Saturday Default Day of the Week 2 - 118 Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 = Sunday 2 02 = Monday 1 03 = Tuesday 1 04 = Wednesday 1 05 = Thursday 1 06 = Friday 1 07 = Saturday 2 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 119 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching Level: SA Description Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday night-switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number Item No. 01 01~32 Days and Months Time Pattern Number 0101~1231 (e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec. 31) 0~10 (0 = No Setting) Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 120 Night Service Program 12 : Night Mode Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to assign a Day/Night Mode Group for each extension. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No. Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 01~32 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 121 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/ Night Mode Group for each trunk port. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 01~32 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 122 Night Service Program 12 : Night Mode Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode Level: IN Description Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of multiline telephone in each Mode. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32 Day/Night Mode 1~8 Item No. Text Message 01 Maximum 12 Characters (alphabetic or numeric) Default Mode 1 = No setting Mode 2 = <Night> Mode 3 = <Midnight> Mode 4 = <Rest> Mode 5 = <Day2> Mode 6 = <Night2> Mode 7 = <Midnight2> Mode 8 = <Rest2> Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 123 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range Level: IN Description Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each Day/Night Mode. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32 Item No. Range 01 2~8 (default = 2) Example: When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed (SC 751, 09 +0), the following modes are switched: Press once = Night Press twice = Mid-night Press third = Day Default = 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 124 Night Service Program 12 : Night Mode Setup Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode 0 = Trunk Outgoing Mode 1 = Intercom Outgoing Mode 0 13-05 1000 13-04 Set whether the Speed Dial bins use Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin as though it is an Intercom number (1). 02 --- Not Used --- 03 Number of Common Speed Dialing Bins Assign the number of Speed Dial bins that are used for System Speed Dials. 0~2000 0 = No Common Speed Dialing Program 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial – System/Group/Station SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 125 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins Level: IN Description Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions). Input Data Item No. Speed Dialing Group Number Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin End Address of Speed Dialing Bin 01 01~64 0~1990 0, 9~1999 Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 126 Speed Dial - System/Group/Station Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing Group for each extension. There are 64 available Speed Dialing groups. Input Data Extension Number Maximum of eight digits Item No. Group Number Default Value 01 01~64 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial - System/Group/Station SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 127 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name Level: SB Description Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers. Input Data Speed Dialing Bin Number Item No. Item 0~1999 Input Data Default 01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/Flash (Press line key 2), @ = Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN (Press line key 3) (max. 24 digits) No Setting 02 Name Maximum 12 Characters (Use dial pad to enter name) No Setting 03 Transfer Mode 0 = Not Used 1 = Internal Dial 2 = Incoming Ring Group (IRG) 04 Transfer Destination Number If Transfer mode is (Refer to 13-04-03): Related Program 0 No Setting 13-04-03 1 = Internal Dial Mode 1~9, 0, , #, P, R, @ (Maximum 24 Characters) 2 = Incoming Ring Group 0 ~ 100 (IRG Number) P = Pause R = Recall @ = Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality 2 - 128 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 05 Item Incoming Ring Pattern Input Data Incoming Ring Pattern 0 = Normal Pattern 1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1~4) 5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1~5) Default Related Program 0 13-04-03 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial – System/Group/Station SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 129 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group Level: SB Description Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each Speed Dialing number. If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01). Input Data Speed Dialing Bin Number 0~1999 Item No. Trunk Group Number 01 0~100 Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 130 Speed Dial – System/Group/Station Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name Level: SB Description Use Program 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each Telephone Book Number. Input Data Telephone Book Number Item No. 0~100 Item Input Data Default 01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/Flash (Press line key 2), @ = Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN (Press line key 3) (max. 24 digits) No Setting 02 Name Maximum 12 Characters (Use dial pad to enter name) No Setting 04 Group Number 1~20 Related Program 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 131 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name Level: SB Description Use Program 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name to set up the name of the Telephone Book. Input Data Telephone Book Number Item No. 01 Item Telephone Book Name 0~100 Input Data Default Up to six characters No Setting Related Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 132 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name Level: SB Description Use Program 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name to set up the group name of the Telephone Book. Input Data Telephone Book Number Item No. 01 0~100 Item No. Group Number 01 0~20 Item Input Data Group Name Up to 12 characters Default Related Program 1 = Group 01 2 = Group 02 3 = Group 03 : : : 20 = Group 20 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 133 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing Level: SB Description Use Program 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing to set up outgoing mode when using the Telephone Book. Trunk outgoing mode follows Program 14-06 setting. Input Data Telephone Book Number Item No. 01 Item Outgoing Mode 0~100 Input Data 0 = Trunk Outgoing 1 = Intercom Outgoing Default Related Program 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 134 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item Trunk Name Set the names for trunks. The trunk name displays on a multiline terminal for incoming and outgoing calls. 02 Transmit Level Select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming. 03 Receive Level Select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming. SV8100 Programming Manual 14 001~200 Input Data Default Up to 12 Characters Line 001 Line 002 Line 003 : Line 200 1~63 (-15.5dB~ +15.5dB in 0.5dB intervals) 32 (0dB) 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB in 0.5dB intervals) 32 (0dB) Program Related Program 2 - 135 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 04 Item Input Data Default Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB in 0.5dB intervals) 32 (0dB) 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB in 0.5dB intervals) 16 (-8dB) 0 = No Print Out 1 = Prints Out 0 0 = Deny (No) 1 = Allow (Yes) 1 0 = Restriction Disabled (No) 1 = Restriction Enabled (Yes) 1 0 = Disable Private Line (Normal) 1 = Enable Private Line (Private Line) 0 Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference. 05 Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference. 06 SMDR Printout Include/Exclude the trunk you are programming from the SMDR printout. Refer to Program 35-01 and 35-02 for SMDR printout options. 07 Outgoing Calls Allow/Prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming. 08 Toll Restriction Enable/Disable Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Toll Restriction programming (example: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If disabled, the trunk is a toll free line. 09 2 - 136 Private Line Related Program 35-01 35-02 21-04 21-05 21-06 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 10 Item DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls Related Program Input Data Default 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 20-21-03 20-21-04 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 20-21-01 20-21-02 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 24-01-01 24-01-05 Enable/ Disable DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls. 11 Account Code Required 12 --- Not Used --- 13 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Enable/Disable loop supervision for the trunk. This option is required for Call Forwarding Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking only. 14 Long Conversation Cutoff Enable/Disable the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for each trunk. 15 Long Conversation Alarm Before Cutoff Enable/Disable the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk. 16 Forced Release of Held Call Enable/Disable forced release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a programmed interval (Program 24-01-05). If disabled, forced disconnection does not occur. Program 24-01-01 also affects this option. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 137 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 17 Item Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation Alarm Input Data Default 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 Related Program Enable/Disable the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature for DISA callers. 18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 19 Privacy Mode Toggle Option 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 14-01-21 Dial (up to eight digits) 67 14-01-20 Enable/Disable a trunk ability to be switched from private to non-private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Release function key. 20 Block Outgoing Caller ID Allow (1)/Prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits. 21 Caller ID Block Code Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to 1. 2 - 138 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 22 Item Caller ID to Voice Mail Related Program Input Data Default 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 24-02-11 24-02-12 Enable/ Disable the system ability to send the Caller ID digits (Remote Log-On Protocol) to voice mail. 23 --- Not Used --- 24 Trunk-to-Trunk Outgoing Caller ID through Mode Enable/Disable the ability to send the original Caller ID through when the call is Forward Off-Premise. 25 Continued/ Discontinued Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation Enable/Disable the ability to dial a service code to continue or disconnect the Trunkto-Trunk conversation after the alert tone is heard. 26 Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode 0 = Normal Transfer (Normal) 1 = Step Transfer (Step) 0 27 Caller ID Refuse Setup 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 28 Effectivity of Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 0 = No Effect (No) 1 = Available (Yes) 1 15-12 30 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1 13-04 32 Anti-trombone Function 0 = No Effect (No) 1 = Available (Yes) 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 139 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 33 Item APSU Trunk Receive Gain Additional PAD when a trunk call connects to APSU Voice Mail. 35 DT700 Large LED Illumination Setup Sets LED color for incoming trunk call. In DT700 local terminal setting menu, illumination setting must be ‘Automatic’, otherwise the terminal will ignore PRG 1401-35, PRG 15-05-37 and PRG 15-23 settings. 36 Calling Party Name Indication (ISDN Trunk) Input Data Default 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB in 0.5dB intervals) 32 (0dB) 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Blue 5 = Yellow 6 = Purple 7 = Light Blue 8 = White 9 = Rotation 2 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Related Program Shows sending caller name on outgoing ISDN calls. Default Trunk Port Number Name 1 Line 001 2 Line 002 : : 200 Line 200 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 140 Refer to features in the Input Data table. Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port. Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) Set the signaling type for the trunk. 02 Ring Detect Type Set Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly. 03 Flash Type Select the flash type (open loop flash or ground). Always set this option for open loop flash. 04 Hooking Type Use Flash for Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or Disconnect (Program 8101-15). (A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk call.) 05 Dial Tone Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Enable/Disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks. If disabled, the system outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial tone. 06 Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in Manual Dial Mode SV8100 Programming Manual 001~200 Related Program Input Data Default 0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 1 = Dial Pulse (20 PPS) 2 = DTMF 2 0 = Normal/delayed 1 = Immediate Ringing 1 0 = Open Loop Flash 1 = Ground 0 0 = Timed Flash (Hooking) 1 = Disconnect (Cut) 0 81-10-07 81-10-08 0 = Dial Tone Detection Not Used 1 = Dial Tone Detection Used 0 21-01-04 0 = No Pause (No) 1 = Pause (Yes) 1 21-01-06 2 - 141 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 07 Default Related Program 0 = Automatic 1 = Automatic and Manual 2 = Manual 2 21-01-03 21-01-03 Item DP to DTMF Conversion Options Determine how a user can convert a Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF conversion required. There are three conversion options: Automatic (0), Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual (2). Input Data Automatic: DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. Automatic and Manual: DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. In addition, the user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing. Manual: Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing. 08 Answering Condition 0 = Polarity Reversing (Polarity) 1 = Polarity Reversing or Timer (Int Digit) 1 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 10 Caller ID 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 Enable/Disable a trunk ability to receive Caller ID information. 11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Enable/Disable the system ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls. 2 - 142 12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 0 1 = Disable (No) = Enable (Yes) 1 13 Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation 0 1 = Disable (No) = Enable (Yes) 0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item 14 Loop Start/Ground Start 16 --- Not Used --- 17 Sync. Ringing Specify whether or not CO/PBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing. Input Data Default 0 = Loop Start (Loop) 1 = Ground Start (Ground) 0 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 Related Program Synchronous Ringing does not apply to incoming DID calls, off-hook ringing calls, or CO/ PBX ring transfer calls. 18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 19 Busy Tone Detection Frequency 1~255 1 14-02-18 20 Busy Tone Detection Interval 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 14-10 21 Fax Branch Connection 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 23 Caller ID Receiving Method 0 = Wait Caller ID 1 = Immediate Ring 1 Rings extension before receiving Caller ID (1) or after receiving Caller ID (0). Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 143 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one item for each mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 1~200 Type of Connection 0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 1 = Behind PBX (PBX) 2 = Not Used 3 = CTX assume 9 Default Related Program 0 22-02 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 144 Central Office Calls, Placing Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group Level: IN Description Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Trunk Group Number 01 0~100 001~200 Priority Number 1~200 Default Trunk Port Group Priority 1 1 1 : : : 200 1 200 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Groups SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 145 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing Level: IN Description Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dials 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access. There are 100 available Trunk Group Numbers. Example for setting: With less than four trunk groups, Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1 : Order 2 – Trunk Group 2 For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2. With more than four trunk groups, Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1 : Order 2 – Trunk Group 2 : Order 3 – Trunk Group 3 : Order 4 – 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2) Route Number 2 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 4 : Order 2 – Trunk Group 5 For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5. 2 - 146 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Route Table Number Item No. Priority Order Number 01 1~4 001~100 Input Data 0 = Not Specified 1~100 : (Trunk Group Number) 1001~1100 : (1000 + Route Table Number) Related Program 14-01-07 14-05 15-01-02 21-02 Default Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1). Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified). All Other Routes (2~100) and Order Numbers (1~4) = 0 (Not Specified). Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 147 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200 Access Maps with all 200 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access. An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map. 911 calls will override Program 14-07 settings. Input Data Access Map Number Item No. Trunk Port Number 01 001~200 001~200 Input Data 0 = No access 1 = Outgoing access only 2 = Incoming access only 3 = Access only when trunk on Hold 4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 = Incoming and Outgoing access 7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Default 2 - 148 Access Maps 1~200 = Trunk Ports 1~200 assigned with option 7 access (incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold). Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 149 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk as either the ACI or COI port. If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be selected in Item 2. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 02 001~200 Item Input Data Default 0 = Internal synthesized/external MOH 1 = A customer-provided source connected to BGM port 2 = A customer-provided source connected to ACI port 0 Select a Music on Hold source for the trunk. If the MOH Type is 2, the source port number is 0~96. 0 MOH Type Source Port Number Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 150 Music on Hold Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each trunk. If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item ACI Recording Destination Extension Number 001~200 Input Data Maximum eight digits Default No Setting Enter the ACI extension number where the trunk calls should be recorded. 02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls Determine if incoming trunk calls should be automatically recorded in the ACI. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 151 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk Level: IN Description Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is used only for H.323. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item IP Trunk ID 001~200 Input Data 0~65535 (0 = No setting) Default 0 Conditions This Data is called IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call. This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call. It is not notified when ID is 0. Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 152 IP Trunk – H.323 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk Level: IN Description Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 001~200 Item Input Data Default 01 Register ID 0 ~ 31 0 02 Pilot Register ID 0 ~ 31 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 153 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID Level: IN Description Use Program 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID to define the CCIS route ID to the trunk group used for K-CCIS. Input Data Trunk Group Number Item No. 01 Trunk Group Number 001~100 001~100 Input Data Default 0 0 = Not Assigned 1 ~ 8 =CCIS Route IDs CCIS Route IDs 5~ 8 are for future use and should not be used. Related Program 14-05-01 50-02-01 50-02-02 50-02-03 50-02-04 50-02-05 50-02-06 Conditions Not used for IP-CCIS Feature Cross Reference 2 - 154 Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment to define the CIC (Circuit Identifier Code) to each voice channel (trunk port) used for K-CCIS. Input Data Trunk Group Number Item No. 01 001 ~ 200 Trunk Group Number 001~200 Input Data 0 = Not Assigned 1~127 = CIC Numbers Default Related Program 0 14-05-01 Conditions CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly. The D-Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment. This is not used for IP-CCIS. Feature Cross Reference Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 155 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 156 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension. Program Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Extension Name Maximum eight digits Input Data Up to 12 Characters Define the extension/virtual extension name. 02 Outgoing Trunk Line Preference Default Related Program 15 STA 101 = Ext 101 STA 102 = Ext 102, etc. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Do not print on SMDR report 1 = Include on SMDR report 1 14-06 21-02 Set the extension outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If enabled, the extension user receives trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07 and 15-06). Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details. 03 SMDR Printout Include/Exclude the extension in the SMDR report. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 157 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 04 Item ISDN Caller ID If both Program 15-01-04 and 10-03-05 are enabled, the system includes Caller ID in the Setup message as Presentation Allowed. If these options are disabled, it is Presentation Restricted. 05 Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Default Related Program 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 10-03-05 20-08-13 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 21-01-15 21-01-16 21-01-17 80-03-01 Input Data Enable/Disable supervised dial detection for an extension. 07 Do-Not-Call 0 = Off 1 = On 0 21-01-19 08 Call Attendant Busy Message 0~100 (0 = No setting) 0 11-11-59 40-10-08 09 Call Attendant Answer Message 0~100 (0 = No setting) 0 11-11-60 40-10-09 10 Extension Number 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Sends caller name on outgoing ISDN calls. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 158 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various multiline telephone options. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Display Language Selection (To select options 8~10, press either 8 or Recall, then press line keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.) 02 Trunk Ring Tone Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are programming. DTU/DTP-style telephones only follow high, medium and low range ring tone settings. They do not follow Melodies. SV8100 Programming Manual Maximum eight digits Default Related Program 0 = Japanese 1 = English 2 = German 3 = French 4 = Italian 5 = Spanish 6 = Dutch 7 = Portuguese 8 = Norwegian 9 = Danish 10 = Swedish 11 = Turkish 12 = Latin American Spanish 13 = Romanian 14 = Polish 1 11-11-13 1 = High 2 = Medium 3 = Low 4 = Ring Tone 1 5 = Ring Tone 2 6 = Ring Tone 3 7 = Ring Tone 4 8 = Ring Tone 5 2 22-03 Input Data 2 - 159 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 03 Item Extension Ring Tone Set the tone (pitch) of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming. Also refer to Program 15-08. 04 DTU/DTP style telephones only follow high, medium and low range ring tone settings. They do not follow Melodies. Redial (Speed Dial) Control Control the function of the extension Redial key when used with Speed Dialing. The Redial key can access either the Common or Group Speed Dialing numbers. 05 Transfer Key Operation Mode Set the operating mode of the extension CONF key. The keys can be for Call Transfer, Serial Calling or Flash. When selecting the Flash option (selection 2), refer also to Program 81-01-14. 06 Hold Key Operating Mode Set the function of the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold. 07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines When talking on a CO call and another CO line key is pressed, the original trunk is placed on Hold or Disconnected. 08 Automatic Handsfree Set whether pressing a key accesses a One-Touch Key or if it preselects the key. 10 Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Input Data Default 1 = High 2 = Medium 3 = Low 4 = Ring Tone 1 5 = Ring Tone 2 6 = Ring Tone 3 7 = Ring Tone 4 8 = Ring Tone 5 8 0 = Common and Individual Speed Dialing 1 = Group Speed Dialing 0 0 = Transfer 1 = Call back 2 = Hook 0 0 = Normal (Common) 1 = Exclusive Hold 0 0 = Hold 1 = Disconnect (Cut) 1 0 = Preselect 1 = One-Touch (Automatic Handsfree) 1 0 = Idle (Off) 1 = Ringing (On) 1 Related Program Select between Idle and Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls. 2 - 160 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 11 Item Callback Automatic Answer Enable/Disable automatic answer of calls recalling to a station. For example, if a Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is ringing back to a station, the following happens: Input Data Default 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing 2 = Not Used 3 = Beep in Speaker (SP) 4 = Beep in Handset (HS) 5 = Speaker & Handset Beep 5 0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/ Trunk Mode) 1 = Trunk Mode 1 Related Program If PRG 15-02-11 is enabled, the station automatically answers the recall when it goes off-hook. If PRG 15-02-11 is disabled, a station does not automatically answer the recall when it goes offhook. The user must first press the line appearance of the recalling call or press the answer key. 12 Off-Hook Ringing Set the telephone Off-Hook signaling. Off-hook signaling occurs when a telephone user receives a second call while busy on a handset call. To enable/ disable Off-Hook Signaling for an extension Class of Service, use Program 20-13-06. 13 Redial List Mode Select whether the Redial List feature should store internal and external numbers (0), or only external numbers (1). 15 Storage of Caller-ID for answered call 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 16 Handsfree Operation 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 Enable/Disable an extension user ability to use the speakerphone on outside calls. When disabled, users can hear the conversation, but cannot respond handsfree. 18 Power-Saving Mode 0 = Normal mode 1 = Power-Saving Mode (Eco-Mode) 1 20-02-10 19 CTA Data Communication Mode 0 = CTI Mode 1 = Non Procedural Mode (Non-SCS) 0 15-02-20 Select 0 if the dip switch settings on the CTA Adapter are set to PC connection (1=on, 2~8=off) or select 1 if the DIP switches are set to printer connection (1~2=on, 3~8=off). SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 161 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 20 Item Baud Rate for CTA Port Select the baud rate used by the CTA Adapter. 21 Virtual Extension Access Mode (when idle Virtual Extension key pressed) Determine whether a Virtual Extension/Call Arrival Key(CAR) should function as a DSS key, a Virtual Extension, or a CAR key. When DSS (0) is selected, the key functions as a DSS key to the extension and for incoming calls to that extension. When Outgoing (1) is selected, the key functions as a virtual extension and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls. When Ignore (2) is selected, the key functions as a CAR key and can receive incoming calls only. 22 Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk Default Related Program 0 = 4800 1 = 9600 2 = 19200 2 15-02-19 0 = DSS 1 = Outgoing (OTG) 2 = Ignore 2 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Preview 1 = Outgoing Immediately 0 Input Data 22-01-01 If enabled, this affects how a Hotline key lights, based on the setting in Program 22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk priority, the Hotline key lights solid when a trunk call rings in. If 2201-01 is set to 0 for intercom priority, the Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk calls, but lights solid for intercom calls. If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys light solid for any incoming calls regardless of the setting in Program 22-01-01. 23 Speed Dial Preview Mode Define how a speed dial key functions when pressed. If set to Preview (0), the speed dial number can be previewed before dialing. If set to Outgoing Immediately (1), the number is dialed immediately. 2 - 162 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 24 Item Conference Key Mode Allow an extension Conf key to be programmed for Conference or for Transfer. When set for 1, the user places a call on hold, dials the extension to which it should be transferred, then presses the Conf key. The call is then transferred. When set for 0, with an active call, the user presses the Conf key, places a second call, then presses the Conf key twice. All the calls are then connected. 26 MSG Key Operation Mode Determine whether an extension MSG key should function as a Message key or Voice Mail key. If set as a Message key, users can press the key to call the voice mail only when they have new messages. 27 Handset Volume Determine how an extension handset volume is set after it is adjusted during a call. 28 0 = Conference 1 = Transfer 0 0 = Message Key 1 = Voice Mail Key 0 0 = Back to Default (Back) 1 = Stay at previous level (Stay) 1 Message Waiting Lamp Color 0 = Green 1 = Red 1 PB Back Tone Level 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) Allow adjustment of the PB Back Tone Level when you are calling an ISDN Line. 30 Toll Restriction Class Select the Toll Restriction Class to use when placing a call from a virtual extension. 34 Default Related Program When 1 is assigned in this program and a user sets the volume to maximum, the volume is reset to a level to meet FCC standards when the user hangs up. Determine whether an extension Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received. 29 Input Data Call Register Mode The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk calls only (0), or both Internal and Trunk calls (1). SV8100 Programming Manual 15-02-35 15-02-36 15-02-37 15-02-38 32 (0dB) 0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual Extension Class) 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension Class) 1 0 = Trunk Mode 1 = Extension/Trunk Mode 0 2 - 163 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item 35 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling Extension 37 Default 7 15-02-28 15-02-36 15-02-37 15-02-38 3 Select the cycle method that the Large LED flashes when the extension has Message Waiting set to the extension. 1 = Cycle 1 2 = Cycle 2 3 = Cycle 3 4 = Cycle 4 5 = Cycle 5 6 = Cycle 6 7 = Cycle 7 15-02-28 15-02-35 15-02-37 15-02-38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color 0 = Green 1 = Red 1 15-02-28 15-02-35 15-02-36 15-02-38 1 = Cycle 1 2 = Cycle 2 3 = Cycle 3 4 = Cycle 4 5 = Cycle 5 6 = Cycle 6 7 = Cycle 7 3 15-02-28 15-02-35 15-02-36 15-02-37 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension Select the color of the Large LED when a voice mail message is waiting at the extension. 38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle Select the cycle method that the Large LED flashes when the extension has a VM Message Waiting set to the extension. 40 Related Program 1 = Cycle 1 2 = Cycle 2 3 = Cycle 3 4 = Cycle 4 5 = Cycle 5 6 = Cycle 6 7 = Cycle 7 Select the cycle method that the Large LED flashes when the extension has set Message Waiting. 36 Input Data Additional Dial for Caller ID Call Return Up to four digits (0, 1~9, #, ) 10-02-04 Enter the digits to be dialed in front of the Caller ID when using the Caller ID Return function. 2 - 164 41 Incoming Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Normal Ring 1 = Headset Ring 0 42 Incoming Off-Hook Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Off-Hook Ring 1 = Headset Off-Hook Ring 0 43 Headset Ring Duration 0 = No Switch to Speaker Ring 1 = 10 seconds 2 = 20 seconds 3 = 30 seconds 4 = 40 seconds 5 = 50 seconds 6 = 1 minute 0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 44 Item Reversing Display Indication The display on the DT300/DT700 style telephones can be set to Normal or Reversed. 45 Double Height Character Indication On the DT300/DT700 style phones Name and Number Line (2), Calender Line (1) or No Line (0) set to has double height characters. 46 Backlight LCD duration On the DT300/DT700 style phones set the time the Backlight LCD stays on. 47 Icon display of DESI-less On the DTL/ITL-8LD style phones are icons displayed (1), or not displayed (0). Input Data Default Related Program 0 = Normal Indication 1 = Reversing Indication 0 0 = Normal Indication 1 = Double height character indication of calendar display line 2 = Double height character indication of name and number display line 0 0 = Continuous on 1 = 5 seconds 2 = 10 seconds 3 = 15 seconds 4 = 30 seconds 5 = 60 seconds 2 0 = Off 1 = On 1 11-11-17 15-07-01 15-20-01 48 Short Ring Setup 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 80-09-01 49 Button Kit Information for Multiline Telephone 0 = No setting 1 = Not Used 2 = Type-A with Cursor Key 3~9 = Not Used 10 = Type-A without Cursor Key (Retrofit) 0 90-48-01 51 Alarm Notification to other NetLink System 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 20-08-16 52 Voice Mail Message Waiting Lamp Setup 0 = Light the VM function key only. 1 = Light the Message Waiting lamp only. 2 = Light the MW lamp and VM key. 54 Menu Operation Mode 0 = Automatic Close 1 = Manual Close SV8100 Programming Manual 15-07-01 0 2 - 165 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38 Input Cycle 1 Cycle 1 500ms – ON / 500ms – OFF 2 Cycle 2 250ms – ON / 250ms – OFF 3 Cycle 3 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF 4 Cycle 4 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 625ms – OFF 5 Cycle 5 875ms – ON / 125ms – OFF 6 Cycle 6 625ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF 7 Cycle 7 1000ms – ON Table 2-5 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 1) High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 2) High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 3) High Middle Low 2000Hz 1400Hz 1100Hz 760Hz 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 4) High Middle Low 2000Hz 1400Hz 1100Hz 760Hz 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Internal Incoming Signal Frequency High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 166 Refer to the Input Data chart. Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line telephone options. Input Data Extension Number Item No 01 Item SLT Signaling Type Select the type of dialing the connected telephone uses. Maximum eight digits Input Data Default Related Program 0 = DP 1 = DTMF 1 15-03-03 45-01-01 0 = Normal 1 = Special 0 15-03-01 45-01-01 0 = No 1 = Yes 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 For the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless telephones to function correctly, this must be set to 0. If this option is set for DTMF, after an outside call is placed, the system cannot dial any additional digit. This program change is automatically performed when the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless telephone is registered. When upgrading software from prior versions, the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed manually. 03 Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones). 04 Flashing Enable/Disable Flash for single line (500/2500 type) telephones. 05 Trunk Polarity Reverse Not Used in U.S. – Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 167 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No 06 Item Extension Polarity Reverse Not Used in U.S. -Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail. Input Data Default 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 Related Program 07 Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) 0 = No 1 = Yes 1 11-12-45 08 Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Yes (Enable) 1 11-12-46 09 Caller ID Function - For External Module 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = FSK 1 = DTMF 0 0 = Calling Extension Number (Calling) 1 = External Caller ID (Forward) 0 0 = Normal 1 = Disc. 0 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 Enable/Disable the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party vendor telephone with Caller ID display. Important: If voice mail is used, this setting must be disabled for the system integration codes to be correct. With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed, this must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a talk path. 10 Caller ID Name Determine if an extension user telephone should display the Caller ID name. 11 Caller ID Type Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or DTMF. 14 Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode Determine what the display shows when a multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside call. 15 Disconnect without dial after hooking hold Determine whether or not to disconnect a held call when on-hook without any dialing after hooking-hold. 16 Special DTMF Protocol Send Determine whether or not to send the extension number of the phone forwarded to the extension when PRG 15-03-03 is set to Special (1) and not in the VM group. 2 - 168 15-03-09 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No Item 17 Input Data Dial Tone Select When the function of MW was set from another extension or VM, the dial tone is selected upon off hook. (1) (2) 0 = Normal 1 = New DT (3) (4) Default Related Program 0 (5) Normal Outgoing Call Idle Reverse Normal Incoming Call Idle Reverse Normal Call Pickup Idle Reverse (1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 169 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP telephone. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item Input Data 01 Terminal Type 0 1 2 3 4 02 IP Phone Fixed Port Assignment MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 04 Nickname Up to 48 characters 07 Using IP Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 CODEC Type 1-Type 1 2-Type 2 3-Type 3 4-Type 4 5-Type 5 15 2 - 170 = NGT = H.323 = SIP = MEGACO = SIP-MLT Maximum eight digits Related Program Default Description 0 Viewing Only – No changes permitted 00-00-00-00-00-00 MAC Address of registered SIP MLT phone is stored and/or can input the MAC address of an SIP MLT phone so when it comes online it is provided with the extension in which the MAC address matches. 15-05-01 No setting Nickname section on Invite message. Example: Extension 100 has a Nickname set to PAUL. Extension 101 has command 15-05-17 set to Nickname. The inbound call to extension 101, from 100, shows PAUL. 15-05-17 Informational Only 15-05-01 0.0.0.0 registered IP Phones 1 Assign the CODEC Type of the MLT SIP. 84-24-XX Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item 16 Authentication Password Up to 24 characters 17 Calling Party Display Info 0 = Nickname 1 = Display Name 2 = User Part 3 = Extension Input Data Default Description None Assign the authentication password for SIP single line telephones. 0 Related Program 15-05-01 The part of the Invite message the calling party information is taken from. There are four choices: Nickname: Displays the nickname programmed in 15-05-04. Display Name: Some SIP phones have a Field called Display Name. If configured, in the SIP phone, this displays upon a call from that station. User Part: Some SIP phones have a field called User Part. If configured in the SIP phone, this displays upon a call from that station. Extension: Display shows extension of the SIP phone. 18 IP Duplication Allowed Group 0 = Not Used 1 = Group 1 2 = Group 2 3 = Group 3 4 = Group 4 5 = Group 5 6 = Group 6 7 = Group 7 8 = Group 8 9 = Group 9 10 = Group 10 0 If an adapter has one IP address coming into it but has multiple extensions off of it. Assign all the extensions to a group so the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions. 15-05-01 19 Side Option Information 0 = No Option 1 = 8LK Unit 2 = 16LK Unit 3 = 24ADM 0 This is a read only program that shows what type of Line Key unit is installed on the ITH-style telephone. 10-03-09 15-05-22 20 Bottom Option Information 0 = No Option 1 = ADA 2 = BHA 0 This is a read only program that shows what type of adapter is installed on the ITH-style telephone. 10-03-10 21 Handset Option Information 0 = Normal Handset 1 = Handset for power failure (PSA/PSD) 2 = BCH 0 This is a read only program that shows what type of Handset is installed on the ITH-style telephone. 10-03-11 15-05-23 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 171 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Default Description Related Program 22 Side Option Additional Data 0 = No Setting 1~32 = DSS Console number 0 This is a read only program that shows the DSS console number when one is installed on a ITH-style telephone. 30-01 30-02 30-03 30-04 30-05 30-06 23 Handset Option Additional Information 0 = No Setting 1~16 = Terminal equipment number (TEN) of Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) 0 Determine to use TEN or not. 24 Protection Service 0 = Not Used 1 = Used 0 When enabled this allows the MLT SIP telephones to use the security key. If disabled, and the key is pressed, nothing happens. 90-40-01 90-40-02 26 DT700 Terminal Type 0 = Not Set 1 = ITL-( )E-1D/IP- ()E-1 2 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL24BT1D/ITL- 4PA-1D [without 8LKI(LCD)-L] 3 = ITL-( )D-1D/ITL24BT1D/ITL-24PA-1D [with 8LKI(LCD)-L] 4 = ITL-320C-1 5 = Softphone 6 = CTI 7 = AGW 0 27 Personal ID Index 0~512 0 Used when the SIP Multiline telephone is using manual/ auto registration. Assign each phone a unique personal index. Then go to command 84-22 to assign the user name and password. 84-22-XX 28 Addition Information Setup 0 = Do not inform 1 = Inform 0 Select whether or not to inform of additional information. 29 Terminal WANside IP Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 30 DTMF Play during Conversation at Receive Extension 0 = Do Not Play 1 = Play 2 - 172 Input Data 0.0.0.0 0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Issue 4.0 Item Input Data Default Description 31 Alarm Tone during Conversation (RTP packet loss alarm) 0 = Off 1 = On 1 32 Ten Key Pad Talkie 0 = Off 1 = On 0 33 LAN Side IP Address of Terminal 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 34 Terminal Touch Panel On/Off 0 = Off 1 = On 1 35 Encryption Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 0 36 DT700 Firmware Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 37 DT700 Large LED Illumination Setup 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Blue 5 = Yellow 6 = Purple 7 = Light Blue 8 = White 9 = Rotation 3 Sets LED color for internal Intercom call. In DT700 local terminal setting menu, illumination setting must be ‘Automatic’, otherwise the terminal will ignore PRG 14-01-35, PRG 15-05-37 and PRG 15-23 settings. 38 Paging Protocol Mode 0 = Multicast 1 = Unicast 2 = Auto 0 Sets the protocol mode for the Paging function. 39 CTI Override Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Sets the override function against the terminal that is controlled by the CTI. 0.0.0.0 Related Program Read-only Select whether the touch screen used on ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL can be used (1) or cannot be used (0). 00.00.00.00 Conditions 15-05-04 – Nickname must be unique in the system. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 173 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access maps. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Day/Night Mode 1~8 Item No. Trunk Access Map Number Default Related Program 01 1~200 1 14-07 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 174 Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Level: SA Description Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line keys. For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes. To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Default Settings Line Key Function Number Additional Data LK01 01 (Trunk Line Key) 1 : : : LK08 01 (Trunk Line Key) 8 LK09 0 (No Setting) 0 : : : LK48 0 (No Setting) 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 175 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Line Key Number 01 1~48 Function Number Additional Data 0~99 (Normal Function Code) (Service Code 751 by default) * 00 ~ *99 (Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 752 by default) Refer to Function Number List. Default Programmable keys 1~8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined. Function Number List [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number List [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 Not Defined 01 DSS/One-Touch 02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic Off Off: Mic On 03 DND Key Red On: DND 04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On Off: BGM Off 05 Headset Red On: Headset in use 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key Extension number or any numbers (up to 24 digits) Red On: Extension Busy Off: Extension Idle Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call Forward Red On: Conference call setup occurring 08 Incoming Call Log 09 Day/Night Mode Switch 10 Call Forward – Immediate 2 - 176 Rapid Blink (Red): New call log Red On: Call log Off: No call log Mode number (1~8) Red On: Mode active Red On: Forwarded Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 11 Call Forward – Busy Red On: Forwarded 12 Call Forward – No Answer Red On: Forwarded 13 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Red On: Forwarded 14 Call Forward – Both Ring Red On: Forwarded 15 Follow Me Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded 18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature activated by Function Key External Group Paging 20 External All Call Paging 21 Internal Group Paging 22 Internal All Call Paging None 23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal Paging None 24 Call Pickup None 25 Call Pickup for Another Group None 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group Call Pickup Group Number None 27 Speed Dial – Common/ Private Speed Dial Number (Common / Private) None 28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None 29 Repeat Redial Red On: Waiting to redial 30 Saved Number Redial None 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet – Me Conference None 33 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) None 34 Break – In None 35 Camp On Red On: While camp-on activated SV8100 Programming Manual External Paging Number (1~8) Red On: Page Active 19 Red On: Page Active Internal Paging Number (01~64) Red On: Page Active 2 - 177 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List (Continued) [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 36 Step Call None 37 DND/FWD Override Call None 38 Message Waiting None 39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): While being monitored Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring 40 Handset Transmission Cutoff Red On: Transmission cut-off 41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side 42 Boss – Secretary Call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary mode 43 Series Call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive None 46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out 47 Reverse Voice Over 48 Voice Over 49 Call Redirect 50 Account Code Extension Number Red On: extension busy Off: extension idle Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call Forward Green: Reverse Voice Over to extension in progress Slow Blink (Red): Voice Over – Active Extension Number or Voice Mail Number None Red On: While account code being entered 51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~8) Red On: Relay On 52 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup Incoming Ring Group (001~100) Red On: Under setting 53 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Start Red On: Active 54 External Call Forward by Door Box Red On: Active 55 Extension Name Change None 2 - 178 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 56 General Purpose LED Operation Blink (Red): Active 57 General Purpose LED Indication Blink (Red): Active 58 Automatic Transfer at Department Group Call Extension Group Number ( 01~64) Blink (Red): Active 59 Delayed Transfer at Department Group Call Extension Group Number (01~64) Blink (Red): Active 60 DND at Department Group Call Extension Group Number (01~64) Blink (Red): Active 61 --- Not Used --- 63 Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) 64 --- Not Used --- 66 CTI 67 --- Not Used --- 68 --- Not Used --- 70 --- Not Used --- 71 --- Not Used --- 72 Keypad Facility Key 73 Keypad HOLD Key 74 Keypad RETRIEVE Key 75 Keypad Conference Key 76 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual Red On: Active Red On: CTI active 2 - 179 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List (Continued) [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function Additional Data <InMail> Fast Flash (Green): New Message(s) in own Mailbox. Slow Flash (Red): New Message(s) in other Mailbox. <APSU(VM00)/External VM> Red On: Access to Voice Mail Fast Flash (Green): New Message(s) in own Mailbox. Slow Flash (Red): New Message(s) in other Mailbox. 77 Voice Mail 78 Conversation Recording – Voice Mail 79 Automated Attendant (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On: Set Up for All Calls Fast Blink (Red): Set Up for No Answer Calls Stutter Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy Calls Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No Answer Calls 80 Tandem Ringing 1 = Set 0 = Cancel Extension Number to Tandem Ring Red On: Active 81 Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key Trunk Line No. (001~200) Slow Flash: Set 82 Dterm IP Call Log 83 Conversation Recording Function (VMSU) 0 = Pause 1 = Re-recording 2 = Address 3 = Erase 4 = Urgent Page 84 Drop Key None 85 Directory Dialing 86 Private Call Refuse None Slow Flash: Set 87 Caller ID Refuse None Slow Flash: Set 2 - 180 Extension Number or Pilot Number LED Indication Rapid Blink (Red): Recording Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751) Function Number Function 88 Dial-In Mode Switching 89 Do-Not-Call Setup 90 Do-Not-Call Data Registration 91 Live Recording Key SV8100 InMail 94 Call Attendant 97 Door Box Access Key 98~99 Additional Data PRG 22-17 Table No. (1~100) LED Indication Off: Pattern 1, Pattern 5~8 On: Pattern 2 Slow flash: Pattern 3 Fast flash: Pattern 4 Fast flash: Setup – No Answer Calls Slow flash: 125ms:on 125ms:off 125ms:on 625ms:off On: Setup – Busy/No Answer Calls Door Box Number (1~8) On: Door Box Busy Off: Door Box Idle Fast flash: Door Box Incoming --- Not Used --- Function Number List [2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 ICM Key None Red On: Off Hook on Intercom Call Red Blink: Intercom Call on Hold 01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001~200) Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension 02 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number (001~100) Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension 03 Virtual Extension Key Extension Number or Department Group Number Red On: Trunk busy by another user Slow Blink (Red): Incoming Call 04 Park Key Park Number (01~64) Slow Blink (Red): Call Placed in Park by Another User Fast Blink (Green): Extension Placed Call in Park SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 181 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List (Continued) [2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752) 06 Trunk Access Via Networking 07 Station Park Hold None 08 CAP Key Network System Number (01~50) CAP Orbit No. (0001~9999) 10 ACD Log-In/Log-Out 12 ACD Emergency Call If CAP Orbit No.0000 is used, the next available orbit is automatically selected. Red On: Under log-on Off: Under log-off Red On: Under monitor, Override, Standby Fast Blink (Red): Supervisor Telephone Receiving Emergency Call 13 ACD Off Duty Mode Red On: Under Off Duty Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation 14 ACD Start/End Red On: ACD Operation End 15 ACD Terminal Speech Monitor Red On: Under Monitor 16 ACD Waiting Red On: Standby 17 ACD Work Wrap Up Time Red On: Under Work Time Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation 18 ACD Overflow Control 19 ACD Queue Status Display Check 2 - 182 ACD Group Number Red On: Enable Slow Blink (Red): Disable Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 LED Indication Reference: ON = LED pattern 7 (On). OFF = LED pattern 0 (Off). Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW). Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5 (IL). Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1 (FL). Fast Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW). Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4 (IR). SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 183 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions When a key is programmed using service code 752, it cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 + 04 must be undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 + 48. When assigning a CAP key, 08, an orbit number must be used. If orbit 000 is used, it automatically assigns the next available orbit. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 184 Refer to Function Number List. Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0~4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 256 available extension ports. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Incoming Ring Pattern 0 = Tone Pattern 1 1 = Tone Pattern 2 2 = Tone Pattern 3 3 = Tone Pattern 4 4 = Incoming Ring Tone Extension SV8100 Programming Manual Maximum eight digits Default Description 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key. For ACD CAR keys, only tone pattern 1 (entry 0) can be used. The remaining patterns are not checked with this feature. 2 - 185 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-6 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 2 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Pattern 3 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 4 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Internal Incoming Signal Frequency High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 186 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Level: SA Description Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). There are 256 Virtual Extension Ports. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Key Number 01~48 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Ringing 0 = No Ringing 1 = Ring Default 0 Conditions Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 187 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1~4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There are 256 Virtual Extension ports. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Priority Order 01 1~4 Data 0 = Tone Pattern 1 1 = Tone Pattern 2 2 = Tone Pattern 3 3 = Tone Pattern 4 4 = Incoming Extension Ring Tone Up to eight digits Description When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone, and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs, the priority of ring sound is set up. Related Program 15-08 Default 2 - 188 By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order: Priority Order Ring Tone (Set in Program 15-08) 1 0 (Tone Pattern 1) 2 1 (Tone Pattern 2) 3 2 (Tone Pattern 3) 4 3 (Tone Pattern 4) Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 189 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Level: SA Description Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 256 Virtual Extension Ports. Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01~48 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Ringing 0 = Immediate Ring 1 = Delayed Ring Default Related Program 0 20-04-03 15-09-01 Conditions Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming. PRG 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the CAR/VE key to Delay Ring. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 190 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each extension. If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed. Input Data Extension Number Item Number 01 Maximum eight digits Item ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk calls should be recorded. 02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls Determine if an extension incoming calls should be automatically recorded to the ACI. Input Data Default Maximum eight digits No Setting 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 191 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys Level: IN Description Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each multiline terminal. For each UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature, enter the destination number (up to 24 digits) and name (up to 12 characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either through 15-14-01 or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also changed. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Key Number 01~10 Item No. Dial Data Name Default 01 1~0, , #, Pause, Hookflash, @ (Code for Answer-Wait) Up to 24 digits Up to 24 Digits No Setting 02 Name Up to 12 Digits No Setting Default No entries for any extension. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 192 One-Touch Keys Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for Extensions. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Register ID Maximum eight digits Input Data None, 0~31 Default None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 193 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication Level: IN Description Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash assignment on each CO line. Input Data Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. 01 Item LED Flash Assignment Input Data 0 = LED Off 1 = LED On Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 194 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Level: IN Description Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a Virtual Extension Key is pressed. Input Data Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Item No. 01 Item Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode Define if calls to a Virtual Extension Key land on the Virtual or on the extension/ CAP/CO appearance. Up to eight digits Default Related Program 0 = Release 1 = Land on the key 0 20-04-01 0 = Secondary Extension Name 1 = Actual Station Name 0 Input Data This is assigned for the Virtual Extension Key, not the extension it resides on. 02 Display mode when placing a call on Virtual Extension Key Defines if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of the extension it resides on. Default Settings If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1, or the multiline terminal must have a CAP Key. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 195 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension to set the operations of the Telephone Book for each extension. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item Up to eight digits Input Data Default 01 Telephone Book 1 0~100 Port 1 : 1 Port 2 : 2 : : Port 100 : 100 02 Telephone Book 2 0~100 0 06 Locking of Telephone Book 0 = On 1 = Off 0 07 Password 0000~9999 (Fixed four digits) Related Program 0000 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 196 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assigns a name to each LCD Line Key of the SV8100 telephones and ADM option. Up to 13 characters can be assigned. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Key Number 01~48 Name Assignment Up to 13 characters Default Settings Line Key Name LK01 CO 001 : : LK06 CO 006 LK07 All Blank : : LK48 All Blank Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 197 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension feature. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item 01 Mobile Extension Target Setup Up to eight digits Input Data Default 0~1999 (0 = No setting/1~1999 = target of mobile extension) 0 0 = Always 1 = On Analog Line 2 = Never 0 0 = Use normal trunk access code (11-09-01) 1 = Use individual trunk access code (11-09-02) 0 Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call when the Mobile extension is called. 02 Connect Confirmation Select when a confirmation (dial ) is required to allow the call to cut over to the called mobile number. 03 Trunk Access Code Select if the Normal or Individual Trunk access is used when making the call to the mobile number. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 198 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-23 : Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup to set the color of the large LED, when the Virtual Extension rings. (Requires software Version 3.00 or higher) Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item DT700 Large LED Illumination Setup SV8100 Programming Manual Up to eight digits Input Data 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Blue 5 = Yellow 6 = Purple 7 = Light Blue 8 = White 9 = Rotation Default 5 2 - 199 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 15-25 : DESI-less Page Setup to define the page of each DESI-less extension. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Incoming Call Notify Event Up to eight digits Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = Disable 1~4 = DESI-less Page 0 0 = Disable 1~4 = DESI-less Page 0 Enable or disables the screen number icon on display. 02 Automatic Screen Change on Incoming Call Automatically changes display to show Incoming Call number. 03 Automatic Display Setting While Idle This setting set which screen displays during the idle state. 04 Automatic Display Setting While Speaking This setting set which screen displays while speaking. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 200 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group. There are 64 available Department Groups. 16 Input Data Department Group Number Item No. Item 1~64 Input Data Default Related Program 01 Department Name Maximum 12 characters No setting 11-07 02 Department Calling Cycle 0 = Normal Routing (Priority) 1 = Easy – UCD Routing (Circular) 0 16-02 0 = Normal (Intercom caller to busy department member hears busy) 1 = Circular (Intercom callers to busy department member routes to idle member) 0 16-02 Set the call routing for Department Calling. Routing can be either circular (cycles to all phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest priority extensions first). 03 Department Routing when Busy (Auto Step Call) Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number. This only occurs for calls to the extension directly, not the department number assigned in Program 11-07. SV8100 Programming Manual Program 2 - 201 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 04 Item Hunting Mode Set the action taken when a call reaches the last extension in the Department Group (0 = hunting stopped, 1 = hunting repeats with circular routing through the Department Group). 05 Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation Input Data Default 0 = Last extension is called and hunting is stopped 1 = Circular 0 0 = Manual 1 = Automatic 0 Related Program 11-16-10 Determine whether calls ringing a Department Group should ring all extensions in the group simultaneously automatically or manually when using the service code defined in Program 11-12-09. When set to (1) Automatic, only ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all the stations in the Department Group. 06 STG Withdraw Mode 0 = Disable (Camp On) 1 = Enable (Overflow Mode) 0 07 Call Recall Restriction for STG 0 = Disable (Recall) 1 = Enable (No Recall) 0 0~64800 seconds 15 0 = No queuing 1 = Hunting When Busy 2 = Hunting When Not Answered 3 = Hunting When Busy or No Answer 0 Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred. 08 --- Not Used --- 09 Department Hunting No Answer Time Set the time a call rings a Department group extension before hunting occurs. 10 Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension (Department) Group. Conditions None 2 - 202 Program 16 : Department Group Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Feature Cross Reference Department Calling SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 203 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department Groups. The system uses these groups (64 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group. When a call comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority. Input Data Extension Number Maximum 8 digits Item No. Group Number Priority Default Description 01 1~64 1~999 1 – xxx (See Note) Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called. Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-02. Related Program 11-07 16-01 The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02 and 11-04. (Extension ports are 1~ 256. Virtual extension ports are 1~256.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 204 Department Calling Program 16 : Department Group Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-03 : Secondary Department Group Level: IN Description Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per Department Group. There are 64 available Department Groups. Input Data Department (Extension) Group Number Item No. Secondary Extension Number 01 1~16 01~64 Extension Number Priority Order Maximum 8 digits 0~999 Description This program is set up when placing telephones in two or more groups. Default All extension groups : No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 205 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups Level: IN Description Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted per group. Each department group can restrict calls to up to eight department groups in Department Group - Departmental Call Restriction. Input Data Extension (Department) Group Number 1~64 Restricted Group Index 1~8 Restrict Department Group Number 0~64 Description Calls between members of different Department (Station) groups can be restricted per group. Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 206 Program 16 : Department Group Setup Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options Level: IN Description Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options. Program Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 Operator Access Mode 0 = Step Call 1 = Circular 0 Set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone. 02 Text Message Mode 0 = Call mode 1 = No Answer/ Busy mode 1 Select the mode when calling the telephone which set up the text message. 11-11-14 15-07-08 04 --- Not Used --- 05 DTMF Receive Active Time 0~64800 seconds 10 For OPXs, analog telephones and certain analog trunks (like DISA), the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this time. The system releases the receiver after the time expires. 25-07-01 06 Alarm Duration 0~64800 seconds 30 This time sets the duration of the alarm signal. 11-12-05 07 Callback Ring Duration Time 0~64800 seconds 15 Callback rings an extension for this time. 11-12-05 15-07-35 08 Trunk Queuing Callback Time 0~64800 seconds 15 Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this time. 11-12-05 15-07-35 09 Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 0~64800 seconds 64800 The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this time. 11-12-05 15-07-35 10 Trunk Guard Timer 0~64800 seconds 1 The time the system waits to seize the next outside line after the system releases an outside line. 12 Telephone/Web Pro Logout Time 1~84600 seconds (84600 sec = 1 day) 900 The system automatically logs out of a Telephone/Web Pro session after inactivity lasting this time. SV8100 Programming Manual 20-17 20 2 - 207 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 208 Refer to the Input Data table at the beginning of this section. Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones Level: IN Description Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for multiline telephones. Input Data Item No. 02 Item Trunk Group Access Key Operating Mode Set the operating mode of the extension trunk group keys. The keys are for incoming access, outgoing access, or both. 04 Retrieve the Line After Transfer Enable (1)/Disable (0) an extension ability to answer a call after it has been transferred, but before it is answered. 05 Headset Busy Mode Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers. 06 Preselection Time Input Data Default 0 = Outgoing / Incoming 1 = Outgoing 2 = Incoming 0 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) 1 = Holding (Keep) 1 0 = No (Disable) 1 = Yes (Enable) 0 0~64800 (sec) 5 Related Programming 20-09-07 When a multiline terminal user preselects a line key, the system remembers the preselection for this time. 07 Time and Date Display Mode Set how the Time and Date appear on display telephones. There are eight display modes. 08 LCD Display Holding Time SV8100 Programming Manual 1~8 Type 1 = (12 hour) Type 2 = (12 hour) Type 3 = (12 hour) Type 4 = (12 hour) Type 5 = (24 hour) Type 6 = (24 hour) Type 7 = (24 hour) Type 8 = (24 hour) 0~64800 (sec) 3 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR 10 MAR TUE 15:15 15:15 MAR 10 TUE 3-10 TUE 15:15 15:15 TUE 10 MAR 5 2 - 209 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 09 Item Disconnect Supervision Enable/Disable disconnect supervision for the system trunks. Input Data Default 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 10 Time Before Shifting to Power-Saving Mode 0 = No shift 1 = 1 minute 2 = 2 minutes 3 = 4 minutes 4 = 8 minutes 5 = 16 minutes 6 = 32 minutes 7 = 64 minutes 0 11 Handsfree Microphone Control 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Disable (Voice) 1 = Enable (Signal) 0 Control the setting for Multiline Terminal Handsfree microphone after being disconnected and reconnected. If set to 0, the microphone is always off when the terminal is reconnected. If set to 1, the microphone remains in the same state it was in when the terminal is reconnected. 12 Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call Type) Related Programming 15-02-18 Enable/Disable Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled, incoming Intercom calls normally ring. If disabled, Intercom calls voice-announce. 13 --- Not Used --- 15 Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Name and Number (Both) 1 = Name 2 = Number 0 18 Dialing Record Display Time 0~64800 seconds 30 19 Virtual Extension Mode 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 Set the mode of a virtual extension key that appears on a DSS console. 2 - 210 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 211 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones Level: IN Description Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for single line telephones. Input Data Item No. 01 Item SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode For a busy single line (500/2500 type) telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call. 02 Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port Define whether the system should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals (1). 03 SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines Type 0: The system keeps the digits dialed by the single line telephone on a trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are received, the system sends all the digits to the trunk. If the time space between digits is longer than the time in Item 4, the system considers all digits received. Type 1: The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediately. If the single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause, this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting. When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1. In addition, set Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must be set for Wireless – DECT users to be able to break dial tone on an analog trunk that is used for paging. 2 - 212 Default Related Program 0 = Hookflash (Hooking) 1 = Hookflash + Service Code 654 0 11-12-47 0 = Do Not Ignore (No) 1 = Ignore (Yes) 0 15-03-01 0 = Receive all dialed data, before sending (All) 1 = Direct through out (Direct) 0 20-03-04 Input Data Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 04 Item Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS Default Related Program 0~64800 seconds 3 20-03-03 Input Data When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the system waits this time before outdialing the first digit. When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1. In addition, set Program 20-03-03 to 1. 05 SLT Operation Mode 0 = Normal Mode 1 = Extended Mode 1 2 = Extended Mode 2 0 06 Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT) 0~64800 seconds 5 20-13-38 0~64800 seconds 0 20-03-03 20-03-04 Define the headset ringing start time. After this time expires from the time when a single line telephone is off-hook, the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode. 07 Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time (Forced Dial) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 213 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for Virtual Extensions. There are 256 available virtual extension ports. Input Data Item No. 03 Item CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval Input Data Default 0~64800 seconds 10 0 = Normal 1 = Enhanced Option 1 CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring the extension after this time. 04 Virtual Extension Key Seize Mode Change the BLF status of a SIE key. When set to Enhanced, the BLF does not show as being busy when the station is on a trunk call. When set to Normal, the BLF shows as being busy when on a trunk call. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 214 Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (CAR/Secondary Incoming Extensions/Virtual Extensions) Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No. Day/Night Mode Class of Service for Extensions 01 1~8 1~15 Default Extension number 101 as Class 15. All other extension numbers are set as Class 1. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 215 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 01 Item Manual Night Service Enabled Turn off or on an extension for manual Night Service Switching. 02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turn off or on an extension to change the Music on Hold tone. 03 Time Setting Turn off or on an extension to set the Time via Service Code 728. 04 Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turn off or on an extension to store System or Group Speed Dialing numbers. 05 Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes. 2 - 216 06 --- Not Used --- 07 --- Not Used --- 08 --- Not Used --- 09 --- Not Used --- Input Data Related Program COS 1~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 11-10-01 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 11-10-02 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 11-10-03 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 11-10-04 0 0 11-10-06 11-10-07 11-10-08 0 = Off 1 = On Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 10 Item Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance Level) Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to program the Appearance function keys using Service Code 752. 11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only) 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect. 12 Trunk Port Disable 0 = Off 1 = On 13 VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation) 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages. 14 VRS General Message Play Turn an extension off or on to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to the General Message. 15 VRS General Message Record/Delete Turn off or on an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or erase the General Message. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Related Program COS 1~14 COS 15 1 1 11-11-38 20-13-18 0 1 11-10-26 0 1 11-10-27 0 1 11-10-19 0 1 11-10-21 0 1 11-10-22 18 SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 11-10-23 19 SMDR Printout Department Group (STG) Data 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 11-10-24 20 SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 11-10-25 21 Register and delete DECTPP 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 22 --- Not Used --- 23 CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback Number Programming 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 Enable/Disable an extension ability to receive CO Message Waiting Indication. 24 Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse Enable/Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel Private Call Refuse. SV8100 Programming Manual 11-10-32 2 - 217 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 25 Item Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse Enable/Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse. Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On Related Program COS 1~14 COS 15 0 0 11-10-33 11-10-34 26 Dial-In Mode Switch 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 11-10-35 27 Do-Not-Call Administrator 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 25-01-07 15-07-89 20-01-19 28 --- Not Used --- 30 Date Setting 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 11-10-41 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 218 Class of Service Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 01 Item Intercom Calls Turn off or on Intercom calling for the extension. 02 Trunk Outgoing Calls Turn off or on outgoing trunk calling for the extension. 03 System Speed Dialing Turn off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers. 04 Group Speed Dialing Turn off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers. 05 Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial) Turn off or on an extension ability to use Dial Number Preview. 06 Toll Restriction Override Turn off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service Code 663). 07 Repeat Redial Turn off or on an extension ability to use Repeat Redial. SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 Related Program 11-11-36 21-01-07 21-07 2 - 219 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 08 Item Toll Restriction Dial Block Turn off or on an extension ability to use Dial Block. 09 Hotline/Extension Ringdown Turn off or on Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS. 10 Signal/Voice Call Turn off or on an extension allowing it to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls. 11 Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On Related Program (Internal Call) 12 Department Group Step Calling Turn off or on an extension ability to use Department Group Step Calling. 13 ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators are allowed. 0 = Off 1 = On 14 Call Address Information 0 = Off 1 = On 15 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on the system ability to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits. 16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension ability to display the name and number of the extension that dialed 911. 17 ARS Override of Trunk Access Map Turn off or on an extension user ability to override the trunk access map programming for outgoing calls. 19 Hotline for SPK Set the ability of an extension to have Hotline activated or deactivated when going off hook via the speaker key. 2 - 220 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 10-03-05 15-01-04 14-01-20 14-01-21 20-08-09 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 20 Item Hot Key Pad Set The ability of an extension user to make a call by dialing the number without first going off hook. 21 Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing SPK Key Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to automatically access Trunk Route when going off hook via the speaker key. 22 Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension Turn off or on an extension user ability to make Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension. 0 = Off 1 = On COS 01-14 COS 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 Related Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 221 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. Item 01 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M Override Turn off or on the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller. 02 Caller ID Display Sub Address Identification Define whether or not an extension displays the Caller Sub-Address. 04 Notification for Incoming Call List Existence Determine whether or not an extension display shows Check List when an incoming call is missed by a user. 2 - 222 COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 0 Related Program 0 = Off 1 = On With this option set to 1, the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through. If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered, the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting. Turn off or on the Caller ID display at an extension. 03 Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On 15-02-08 20-09-02 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 05 Item Signal/Voice Call Turn off or on an extension user ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls. Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On 06 Incoming Time Display 0 = Off 1 = On 07 Call Queuing 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy. 08 Calling Party Information Turn off or on an extension ability to display calling party information on CCIS calls. 0 = Off 1 = On Related Program COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 0 0 1 1 20-13-06 1 1 50-02-05 11-11-15, 11-11-16 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 223 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 01 Input Data Item Group Call Pickup (Within Group) Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls (Service Code 756). 02 Group Call Pickup (Another Group) Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service Code 769). 03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group (Service Code 768). 04 Telephone Call Pickup Turn off or on an extension ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup Group (Service Code #). 05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Turn off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group (Service Code 756). 06 Meet-Me Conference and Paging Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Meet-Me Conference and Paging. 07 Automatic Off-Hook Answer Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Universal Auto Answer (no service code required). 2 - 224 COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 08 Item Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer Turn off or on an extension ability to answer an incoming call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE)/Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset. 09 Call Pickup Callback Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls. 10 Answer Preset Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 1 1 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 225 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 01 Item Input Data Call Forward All Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate Call Forwarding All. 02 Call Forward When Busy Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward when Busy. 03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward when Unanswered. 04 Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) Turn off or on an extension user ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing. 05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me. 06 Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer) Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Unscreened Transfer. 07 Transfer Without Holding Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Transfer Without Holding. 2 - 226 COS 01~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 08 Item Transfer Information Display Turn off or on an extension ability for incoming Transfer preanswer display. 09 Group Hold Initiate Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Group Hold. 10 Group Hold Answer Turn off or on an extension user ability to pick up a call on Group Hold. 11 Automatic On-Hook Transfer Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer. 12 Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call Forwarding) Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 Turn off or on an extension user ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone. 13 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback Turn off or on an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator. 14 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not possible. 15 VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting) Turn off or on an extension user ability to record, listen to, or erase the Personal Greeting Message. 16 Call Redirect Turn off or on a multiline terminal user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. 17 Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each Telephone Group Transfer) 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to set Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group. 18 No Recall No Recall set to 1 does not stop transferred calls from recalling from a virtual extension. 19 Hold/Extended Park Determine if an extension Class of Service should allow either a normal or extended Park. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 227 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 20 Item Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On No Callback Turn off or on an extension ability to receive callbacks. 21 22 23 0 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On Restricted Unsupervised Conference 0 = Off Allow/Deny an extension user ability to initiate an unsupervised conference. 1 = On 0 0 CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Trunk Park Hold Mode Transfer Park Call Turn off or on an extension user ability to transfer a parked call. 27 0 Allow/Deny an extension user ability to set up a tandem/conference call automatically when they hang up. Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by an extension. 25 COS 15 Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Turn 0ff or on an extension user ability to set or cancel call forwarding for a virtual extension. 24 COS 01~14 Call Park Automatically Search 0 = Non Exclusive Hold (Off) 1 = Exclusive Hold (On) 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 228 Class of Service Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service class. Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 02 Item Advice of Charge ISDN-AOC 03 Cost Display (TTU) Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 229 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Level: IN Description Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. 01 Item Long Conversation Alarm Turn off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation (not for single line telephones). 02 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls. 03 Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls. 04 Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call) Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override. 05 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling Turn off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook signals. 06 Automatic Off-Hook Signaling (Automatic Override) Allow a busy extension ability to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off-hook signals. 07 Message Waiting Turn off or on an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting. 2 - 230 Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 Related Programming Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. 08 Item Conference Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a conference or Meet-Me Conference. 09 Privacy Release Turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference. 10 Barge-In Monitor Enable the extension Barge-In Mode to be Speech or Monitor. 11 Room Monitor, Initiating Extension Turn off or on an extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions. 12 Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by other extensions. 13 Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension. 14 Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension) Turn off or on an extension user ability to call a Department Group Pilot. 15 Barge-In, Initiate Turn off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on other's calls. 16 Barge-In, Receive Turn off or on an extension user ability to have other extensions barge-in on calls. 17 Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone) Turn off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when another extension barges into their conversation. If off, there is no alert tone or display indication. 18 Programmable Function Key Programming (General Level) Turn off or on an extension user ability to program General function keys using Service Code 751 (by default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code 752.) SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Speech 1 = Monitor 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Related Programming 20-13-45 0 = Off 1 = On 2 - 231 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 19 Item Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging) Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Selectable Display Messaging. 20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert (Restricted Operation Transfer) Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Deny 1 = Allow 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Turn off or on operator alert when an extension user improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction. 21 Extension Name Turn off or on an extension user ability to program its name. 22 Busy Status Display (Called Party Status) Turn off or on the ability to display the detailed state of the called party. 23 Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND). 24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key Turn off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be enabled if this option is used. 25 --- Not Used --- 26 Group Listen Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Group Listen. 27 Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set to 0 for this option to work. 28 Allow Class of Service to be Changed Turn off or on the ability of an extension Class of Service to be changed via Service Code 677. 29 Paging Display Turn off or on an extension user ability to display paging information. 30 Background Music Allow/Deny an extension user to turn Background Music on and off. 2 - 232 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Related Programming 20-13-06 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No. Item Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 0 0 31 Connected Line Identification (COLP) 0 = Off 1 = On 32 Deny Multiple Barge-Ins 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 Allow/Deny an extension user from having multiple users Barge into their conversation. 33 ACD Supervisor’s Position Enhancement This option must be set to 1 for the operator to use service codes in Program 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13. 34 Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling Turn off or on an extension user ability to block off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker. 35 Block Camp On Turn off or on an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to Camp On. 36 Call Duration Timer Display Turn off or on an extension display of the Call Duration Time. The system waits until the interdigit time (Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer. 37 --- Not Used --- 38 Headset Ringing for SLT Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the Headset ringing. 39 ACD Queue Status Display Turn off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an extension Class of Service. Any extension which has this option enabled also receives the queue alarm. 40 Do Not Disturb Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel Do Not Disturb. 41 Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an extension on a DSS console. 42 Extension Data Swap Enabling Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Extension Data Swap. 43 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Related Programming 11-13-10 11-13-11 11-13-12 11-13-13 11-11-08 15-07-03 11-15-12 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 233 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 44 Item Live Monitor Enabling Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live Monitor. 45 MIC Key Mode while Call Monitoring Set per class of service, when in Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored parties receive the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled. 47 Station Number Display Determine if a station Number is displayed (1) or not displayed (0) in the LCD when the phone is idle. 48 Station Name Display Determine if a station Name is displayed (1) or not displayed (0) in the LCD when the phone is idle. 49 BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone. 50 AIC Agent display which call is from Determine if the station logged in via AIC code shows which queue the call is coming from. 51 Number and Name Appear in the Directory Determine if an extension name and number are listed (1) or unlisted (0) in the directory. 52 VoIP All DSP Busy Display Set whether “All DSP Busy” alarm displays on LCD when the caller makes an IP call and there is no VoIP DSP resource. Input Data COS 01~14 COS 15 1 1 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 1 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Enable (Off) 1 = Disable (On) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Related Programming 20-13-10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 234 Class of Service Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M Level: IN Description Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined. Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this program. Input Data Class of Service Number Item No. 01 01~15 Item First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Dialed) For tie lines, enable/disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA. 02 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS). 03 Trunk Group Access Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 704). 04 Outgoing System Speed Dial Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the System Speed Dialing. 05 Operator Calling Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator. 06 Internal Paging Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging. SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Default COS 1~15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 2 - 235 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 07 Input Data Item External Paging Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging. 08 Direct Trunk Access Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9). 09 Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> Enable/Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 3). This option is not available to DISA callers. 10 Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA Enable/Disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05). 11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Barge-In. 12 Retrieve Park Hold Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to retrieve a Park Hold call. Default COS 1~15 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 236 Class of Service Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Tie Lines Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type. Input Data Item No. SV8100 Programming Manual Incoming Signal Type Ringing Cycle Default 01 Normal Incoming Call on Trunk 2 02 PBX, CES Incoming Call 8 03 Incoming Internal Call 12 04 DID/DISA/VRS 8 05 DID/DDI 8 06 Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line 07 Door Box Ringing for SLT 8 08 Virtual Extension Ring 8 09 Callback 11 10 Alarm for SLT 5 11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 6 1~13 12 2 - 237 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-7 Ringing Cycles Number Ringing Cycle 1 On 2 On:2.0 / Off:4.0 3 On:1.0 / Off:2.0 4 On:0.5 / Off:0.5 5 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 6 On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5 7 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25 8 On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0 9 On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0 10 On:1.0 / Off:4.0 11 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25 12 On:1.0 / Off:3.0 13 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 238 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages Level: SA Description Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 24 characters. Use the following chart when programming messages. Use this keypad digit . . . 1 When you want to. . . Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } 2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % Enter characters: + , - . / # & : ’ ; ( < Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü = > ? B E S ¢ £ # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time. HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 239 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, not all the same characters are available. Input Data Selectable Display Message Number 01~20 Item No. Input Data 01 24 characters Default Number 2 - 240 Message 1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:## 2 MEETING ROOM – ######## 3 COME BACK ##:## 4 PLEASE CALL ########### 5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:## 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:## 7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/## 8 BUSINESS TRIP ########## 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/## 11 MESSAGE 11 12 MESSAGE 12 13 MESSAGE 13 14 MESSAGE 14 15 MESSAGE 15 16 MESSAGE 16 17 MESSAGE 17 18 MESSAGE 18 19 MESSAGE 19 20 MESSAGE 20 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces. Feature Cross Reference Selectable Display Messages SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 241 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-17 : Operator Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0 or 9 (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program. If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option. Input Data Operator Number Item No. 01 Item Operator’s Extension Number Define the extension numbers to be used by operators. 1~8 Input Data Up to eight digits Default 101 Related Program 11-01 20-01-01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 242 Intercom Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-18 : Service Tone Timers Level: IN Description Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description After getting Intercom dial tone, a telephone user has this time to dial the first digit of the Intercom call. 01 Extension Dial Tone Time 0~64800 seconds 30 02 Busy Tone Timer 0~64800 seconds 15 03 Congestion Tone 0~64800 seconds 10 A Busy Tone when system resources run short. (such as DTMF receiver resources). 04 Call Waiting Tone Timer 0~64800 seconds 10 Sets the time between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the time between Off-Hook Signaling alerts. 05 Multiline Confirmation Tone 0~64800 seconds 10 06 Interval of Call Waiting Tone 3~64800 seconds 10 07 Intrusion Tone Repeat Time 0~64800 seconds 0 08 Conference Tone Interval 0~64800 seconds 0 09 Warning Beep Tone Signaling Interval 0~64800 seconds 60 SV8100 Programming Manual Related Program After a call is interrupted (such as Barge-In, Voice Mail Conversation Recording, or Voice Over), the system repeats the Intrusion Tone after this time. Normally, you should enter 0 to disable this time. 14-01-18 2 - 243 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 244 Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID Level: IN Description Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID feature. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Caller ID Displaying Format (if displaying digits are more than 12 digits) 02 --- Not Used --- 04 Wait Facility IE Timer Input Data Default 0 = First 10 digits (Upper) 1 = Last 10 digits (Lower) 0 0~64800 seconds 10 This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine the time the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco. 05 Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait) 0~64800 seconds 0 07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits 1 08 Area Code Up to six digits No setting 09 Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk Up to 12 characters No setting When set, sends the Calling Party Name to the network. Conditions Edit Caller ID works when Program 20-19-07 and Program 20-19-08 are set. Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk works when Program 14-01-24 and Program 15-01-01 are set. Feature Cross Reference Caller ID SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 245 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data Level: IN Description Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE 02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA 03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 246 Caller ID Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation Level: IN Description Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the Long Conversation feature. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Long Conversation Alarm 1 Default Related Program 0~64800 (sec) 170 14-01-15 0~64800 (sec) 180 14-01-15 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14 Input Data The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this time. 02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 After the initial long toll call warning tone, additional warning tones sound after this time. 03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call This determines the time the system waits before disconnecting an incoming call. 04 Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call This determines the time the system waits before disconnecting an outgoing call. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Long Conversation Cutoff SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 247 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service Level: IN Description Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service to define the time the system waits before determining the Wireless – DECT phone is out of range. For incoming calls, the time begins when the call is received. If the time defined here expires before the Wireless – DECT phone starts to ring, the system determines the phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services (indicates out-of range, transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension). Input Data Item No. Item 05 --- Not Used --- 06 Out of Area Talkie Number Input Data 0~100 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 248 Wireless – DECT Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-23 : System Options for CTI Level: IN Description Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Delayed ring timer for CTI 0~64800 (sec) 30 02 ALERT replay time (CTI) 0~64800 (sec) 8 03 Trunk Virtual Bridge – TSP Driver 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 0~64800 (sec) 30 Enable/Disable the system to send trunk or virtual extension information to the TSP driver. 04 The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line Telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 249 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-25 : ISDN Options Level: IN Description Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs Up 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 1 02 Progress Indicate Information Element Detect 0 = Service Off 1= Service On 1 03 Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing 0 = 3.1KHz Audio 1 = Speech 0 04 Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone) 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 0 Input Data With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message, the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network. 05 T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect Message 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 1 06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 1 07 Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Message Received 0 = Local Busy Tone Off 1 = Busy Tone from NT (network side) 0 08 Use of Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC) 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 This Program must be set to 0 for International Dialing when using Calling Number Presentation (CPN) from station. 2 - 250 Default 09 High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 10 S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 11 Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/ Time Information Element Received 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 12 Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send) 0 = Normal – No Message (Off) 1 = Normal – No Message (On) 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives Alerting Message. 13 Local Busy Tone (Release) Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE message from Network. 14 No Response Release Send Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer expires. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 251 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO Level: IN Description Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each extension service class. Input Data Service Class Item No. 01 1~15 Item Value % Input Data 100~500 Default 100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 252 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation Level: IN Description Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk Conversation. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Conversation Continue Code Input the code that can be dialed to continue the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard. 02 Conversation Disconnect Code Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard. 03 Conversation Continue Time Input the time the conversation extends when the Conversation Continue Code is dialed. Input Data Default Related Programming 0~9, #, (Set for one digit only) No Setting 14-01-25 20-28-03 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 0~9, #, (Set for one digit only) No Setting 14-01-25 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 0~64800 seconds 0 14-01-25 20-28-01 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 253 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number Up to eight digits Input Data 0~15 0 = Not assigned Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 254 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number 001~200 Input Data 0~15, #, 0 = Not assigned Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 255 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of service basis. Input Data Timer Class Number Item No. 01 Item Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time 0~15 Default Related Programming 0~64800 seconds 15 seconds 20-01-08 0~64800 seconds 64800 seconds 20-01-09 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 20-04-03 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 21-01-02 0~64800 seconds 5 seconds 21-01-03 0~64800 seconds 5 seconds 21-01-09 Input Data Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this time 02 Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this time. 03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the extension after this time. 04 Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D Timer) When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit in this time. 05 Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer) The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after time expires). 06 Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start) A Ringdown extension automatically calls the programmed destination after this time. 2 - 256 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 07 Issue 4.0 Item Ring No Answer Alarm Time Default Related Programming 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 22-01-03 0~64800 seconds 0 seconds 22-01-04 0~64800 seconds 20 seconds 22-01-06 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-01 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-02 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-03 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-04 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-06 Input Data If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long. 08 DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08). 09 DID Ring-No-Answer Time In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this time sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group. 10 Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold) A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. This time works with the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24-01-02 ). 11 Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive Hold) A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01 and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and 24-01-07 continues until a user answers the call. 12 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. 13 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System Hold. 14 Park Hold Time – Normal A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 257 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item 15 Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward No Answer) Default Related Programming 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 24-02-03 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-02-04 0~64800 seconds 0 seconds 25-07-02 Input Data If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets the time a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox. 16 Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls after this time to the extension that initially transferred it. 17 VRS/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or IRG or VM) A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04). 18 Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 25-07-03 19 Long Conversation Warning Tone Time (Trunk to Trunk) 0~64800 seconds 3600 seconds 25-07-07 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 25-07-08 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-09 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-10 0~64800 seconds 1200 seconds 31-01-02 Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can last before the Long Conversation tone is heard. 20 Long Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to Trunk) This determines the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. 21 DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. 22 DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. 23 Page Announcement Duration This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. (Affects External Paging only) 2 - 258 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20-29-01 or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used. All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 259 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Up to eight digits Item Extension’s Operator Setting Input Data 0~15 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 260 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item Trunk’s Operator Setting Allow the user to select Operator Group per trunk. 001~200 Input Data 0~15 (0 = Not assigned) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 261 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator group. Input Data Operator Group 1~15 Operator Number 1~8 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Operator Extension Group Setup Input Data Up to eight digits Default None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 262 Program 20 : System Option Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-38 : Operator Group Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone. Input Data Operator Group Item No. 01 1~15 Item Operator Access Mode Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried first (1). Input Data 0 = Step 1 = Circular Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 263 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 264 Program 20 : System Option Setup Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls Level: IN Description Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Call Service. Program Input Data Item No. 01 Item Seizure Trunk Line Mode Select the trunk based off the Trunk Route Priority (0) or based off the trunk that has not been used in the longest time (1). 02 Intercom Interdigit Time Related Program Input Data Default 0 = Priority Route 1 = Circular Route 0 0~64800 (sec) 10 0~64800 (sec) 5 14-02-08 0~64800 (sec) 5 14-02-05 14-05 14-06 21 When placing Intercom calls, an extension user must dial each digit in this time. 03 Trunk Interdigit Time (External) The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after time expires). 04 Dial Tone Detection Time If dial tone detection is enabled, the system waits this time for the Telco to return dial tone. When the time expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this time (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 265 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 05 Item Disconnect Time when Dial Tone not Detected Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 3 Related Program If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system skips over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls. 06 Dial Pause at First Digit 0~64800 (sec) 1 07 Toll Restriction Override Time 0~64800 (sec) 10 After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction from the extension for this time. 08 Preset Dial Display Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 10 09 Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline Start) 0~64800 (sec) 5 0~24 0 0~60 0 20-08-06 21-07 20-08-09 21-11 A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time. 10 Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path If this option is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911(USA only). Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path, preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at its default setting of 0 to prevent any problems with dialing 911 (USA only). 11 2 - 266 Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction Path Control Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 12 Item Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk Access If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 911 (USA only) without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an extension user must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before dialing 911 (USA only). 13 Alarm Ring Timer (E911) Set the duration of the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm does not ring. 14 Forced Account Code Inter-digit Timer Input Data Default Related Program 0 = Trunk Access Code Required 1 = Trunk Access Code Not Required 1 0, 1~64800 (sec) (0 = Off) 0 0~64800 (sec) 3 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 15-01-05 21-01-16 21-01-17 0~64800 (sec) 20 15-01-05 21-01-16 21-01-17 Digits 0~9 4 15-01-05 21-01-15 21-01-16 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 11-12-56 20-08-16 The system waits this time for a user to enter a Forced Account code. 15 Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line (Toll Restriction) Enable/Disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature. 16 Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver. 17 Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits to be dialed before the call should be disconnected. 18 Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk Access Enable/Disable the ability to continue to dial codes or extensions after receiving Trunk Busy. This must be set to 1 for the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work. 19 SV8100 Programming Manual --- Not Used --- 2 - 267 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 268 Central Office Calls, Placing Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No. Day/Night Mode Route Table Number 01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No Setting) Default 1 Related Program 14-06 14-01-07 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 269 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Day/Night Mode Route Table Number 01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No setting) Default 1 Related Program 14-06 14-07-01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 270 Trunk Group Routing Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06. A telephone and a trunk have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Day/Night Mode 1~9 9 = (Power Failure Mode) Maximum eight digits Restriction Class Default 1~15 2 Related Program 14-01-08 21-05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 271 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class Level: IN Description Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1~15). Input Data Toll Restriction Class Number Item No. 01 02 Item International Call Restriction Table International Call Permit Code Table Input Data 1~15 Description 0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes) 1, 6~15 = 0 Assign/Unassign the International Call Restrict Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International Call Restrict Table data in Program 21-06-01. 21-06-01 0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes) 1, 3~15 = 0 Assign/Unassign the International Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International Call Permit Table data in Program 21-06-02. 21-06-02 Select the table (defined in 21-06-03) to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls. 21-06-03 Choose whether the table set up by 21-06-04 is referred to or not. 21-06-04 Choose whether the table set up by 21-06-05 is referred to or not. 21-06-05 Set the tables 1~4 when referring to the table set up by 21-06-06. 21-06-06 2~5 = 1 2=1 03 --- Not Used --- 04 Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment 1~4 = Table 0 = Disable (None) Common Permit Code Table 0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes) 1, 8~15 = 0 0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes) 1, 6~15 = 0 05 06 07 2 - 272 Common Restriction Table Permit Code Table Related Program Default 1~4 = Table 0 = Disable (None) 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 3=1 4=2 5=3 2~7 = 1 2~5 = 1 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 3=1 4=2 5=3 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 08 Item Restriction Table Issue 4.0 Input Data 1~4 = Table 0 = Disable (None) Default Description 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Set the tables 1~4 when referring to the table set up by 21-06-07. 3=1 4=2 5=3 09 Restriction for Common Speed Dials 0 = Does Not Restrict 1 = Following Restriction Check 0 Enable/Disable Toll Restriction for Common Speed Dialing numbers. If enabled, System Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. 10 Restriction for Group Speed Dials 0 = Does Not Restrict 1 = Following Restriction Check 0 Enable/Disable Toll Restriction for Group Speed Dialing numbers. If enabled, Group Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. 11 Intercom Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 Determine if incoming and outgoing intercom calls are allowed. 12 PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1~6, 8~15 = 0 0 Enable/Disable the toll restriction of the dial set up by 34-08. 7=1 21-06-07 Set how the system Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction, the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code. The user cannot dial a PBX extension. If you disable PBX Toll Restriction, the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code. The system does not restrict calls to PBX extensions. Refer to the PBX compatibility feature. Make sure Program 21-05-04 (Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment) allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing (normally 12 digits). 13 Restriction of Tie Line Calls 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 14 Trunk Transfer Restriction on Incomplete Dial 0 = Not allow 1 = Allow 0 (Not allow) If this program is set to 1, you can transfer the outgoing trunk which you dialed incompletely. 15 Common Hold Restriction on Incomplete Dial 0 = Not allow 1 =Allow 0 (Not allow) If this program is set to 1, you can hold the outgoing trunk which you dialed in restriction check. SV8100 Programming Manual Related Program 34-08 2 - 273 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Toll Restriction Class Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 01: International Call Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02: International Call Permit Table 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03: --- Not Used --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04: Max. No. Digits Table Assign. 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05: Common Permit Table 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06: Common Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07: Permit Code Table 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08: Restrict Code Table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09: Restriction for Common Abbr. Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10: Restriction for Group Abbr. Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11: Intercom Call Restriction 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12: Restriction of PBX Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13: Restriction of Tie Line Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14: Restriction for Incomplete Dialed Trunk Transfer 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15: Allow the Outgoing Trunk to Common Hold 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 274 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial 1-9, 0, , # can be entered in each table. Input Data Item No. Item Table 01 International Call Restriction Table 1~10 Dial (Up to four digits) Tables 1~10 = No Setting Program the Restrict Table for international calls. The system has 10 International Call Restrict Tables. Each entry can have up to four digits. 02 International Call Permit Code Table 1~20 Dial (Up to six digits) Tables 1~20 = No Setting Program the Permit Table for international calls. The system has 20 International Call Permit Tables. Each entry can have up to six digits. 03 Maximum Number Digits Table Assignment 1~4 4~30 Tables 1~ 4 = 30 Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table. 04 Common Permit Code Table 1~10 Dial (Up to four digits) Table 1 = 911 Table 2 = 1800 Table 3 = 1888 Table 4 = 1822 Table 5 = 1833 Table 6 = 1844 Table 7 = 1855 Table 8 = 1866 Table 9 = 1877 Table 10 = No Setting Program the Common Permit Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly allow users to dial. 05 Common Restriction Table 1~10 Dial (Up to 12 digits) Table 1 = 900 Program the Common Restrict Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly prevent users from dialing. SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Default Table 2 = 1900 Table 3 = 976 Tables 4 ~ 10 = No Setting Description 2 - 275 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 06 Item Permit Code Table Table 1~4 (table) 001~200 Input Data Default Description Dial (Up to 12 digits) Table 1~4 = No Setting Program the Permit Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table (21-06-04). There are four Permit Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table. The system permits calls exactly as you enter the code. Dial (Up to 12 digits) Table 1~4 = No Setting Program the Restrict Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users cannot dial numbers listed in these tables. There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table. The system restricts calls exactly as you enter the code. Enter the PBX Access Code. When the system is behind a PBX, this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk. Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code. For PBX trunks (Program 14-04) the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code. Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX, even if you don’t want to use Toll Restriction. PBX Access Codes can have up to two digits, using 0-9, #, and LINE KEY 1 (don’t care). When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office. Entries 1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access Codes. Each code can have up to two digits. (Entry) 07 Deny Restriction Table 1~4 (table) 1~60 (Entry) 08 PBX Access Code 1~4 Dial (Up to two digits) Table 1~4 = No Setting 09 Specific Dial Outgoing Code 1~20 Dial (Up to eight digits) No Setting 10 Outgoing Call Code Setup 1~20 Dial (Up to four digits) No Setting 2 - 276 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 277 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0~9, # and . Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Maximum eight digits Related Program Password Default Four Digits (Fixed) No Setting 21-01-07 20-08-06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 278 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Repeat Redial Count Input Data Default 0~255 3 0~64800 (sec) 60 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 0 Set how many times a Repeat Redial automatically repeats if the call does not go through. 02 Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts. 03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial maintains the call after this time. After this time, the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again. 04 Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk Set the time to send out Busy Tone with an ISDN line, when called party is busy. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 279 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-09 : Dial Block Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data 1~15 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block Default 15 Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used. 02 Supervisor Password Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions. 0~9, , # (4-digit fixed) No Setting Conditions This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 280 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Maximum eight digit Toll Restriction Class Default 0, 1~15 (0 = No Setting) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 281 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination number for each extension number. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Maximum eight digits Hotline Destination Number Default 0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ (Code to wait for answer supervision) (maximum 24 digits) No Setting Related Program 20-08-09 21-01-09 Conditions Use the @ code to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto Attendant. This code can be used only on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 282 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Level: IN Description Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12. If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in Program 21-13. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Calling Party Number Data Default 01 1~0, , # (maximum 16 digits) No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 283 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21-12. If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in Program 21-13. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No. Calling Party Number Data Default 01 0~9, , # (Max. 16 digits) No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 284 ISDN Compatibility Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0~9, # and . Input Data ID Table Number Item No. 1~500 Item Input Data 01 User ID Dial (Six digits) 02 Walking Toll Restriction Class Number 1~15 Default No Setting 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 285 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No. Day/Night Mode Route Table Number 01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No Setting) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 286 Central Office Calls, Placing Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Level: IN Description Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party number for individual trunks. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Description IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 001~200 Input Data Up to 16 digits (1~0, , #) Default None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 287 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to assign the Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent to the exchange when the caller places an outgoing call. When the Calling Party Number is assigned by PRG 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the system uses the data in PRG 21-18 and PRG 21-19. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Description 01 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Up to eight digits Input Data Up to 16 digits (1~0, , #) Default None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 288 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level: IN Description Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Description IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Maximum eight digits Input Data Up to 16 Digits (1~0, , #) Default None Related Program 15-01-04 20-08-13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 289 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) Level: IN Description Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by PRG 21-05 and 21-06. This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Description Restriction Class Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected trunk. 001~200 Input Data 1~15 Default 1 Related Program 14-01-08 21-05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 290 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings to define the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication. Input Data Trunk Item No. 01 02 Description 001~200 Input Data Default 0 = No VMWI Service 1 = Enable VMWI Service 0 Enable/Disable CO MWI Call Back. CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting 0000~1999 CO MWI Call Back Enabling 1999 Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call Back. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 291 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 292 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls Level: IN Description Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming calls. Program Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 Incoming Call Priority 0 = Intercom Call Priority 1 = Trunk Call Priority 1 Determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously. 15-02-22 02 Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 If enabled, an incoming call that rings longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm (22-01-03), changes to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long. If disabled, this does not occur. 22-01-03 22-01-04 03 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0~64800 (sec) 60 If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long. 22-01-02 04 DIL No Answer Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 0 A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08). 05 --- Not Used --- 06 DID RingNo-Answer Time 0~64800 (sec) 20 In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This is the time a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group. 07 DID Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 0~64800 (sec) 20 SV8100 Programming Manual 22 22-12 2 - 293 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item 08 DID Pilot Call No Answer Time 0~64800 (sec) 60 09 DID to Trunk to Trunk no answer timer 0~64800 (sec) 20 10 VRS Waiting Message Operation 0 = Enable Always 1 = Change by Manual Operation 0 11 VRS Waiting Message Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 20 Input Data Default Description Related Program Set up the operation mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing Message. 22-14 22-15 22-08 22-04 22-01-04 20-15-11 15-07 Set up the sending duration time of the Auto – Attendant & Queuing. 22-14-06 22-15-06 41-11-06 The message is repeatedly sent out during the specified time. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 294 Central Office Calls, Answering Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Incoming Type 0 = Normal 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no VRS installed) 2 = DISA 3 = DID 4 = DIL 5 = E&M Tie line 6 = Delayed VRS 7 = ANI/DNIS 8 = DID(DDI) Mode Switching 001~200 Default Description 0 Set the feature type for the trunk you are programming. Related Program 14-04 Conditions When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 blade must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 blade to sync. When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS. When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 295 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Cross Reference 2 - 296 Central Office Calls, Answering Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range Level: IN Description Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Ring Tone Pattern 0~8 (Ring Tone Pattern 1~4) (Melody 1~ Melody 5) 001~200 Related Program Default Description 0 Select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available. 15-02 Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 2 High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Pattern 3 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 4 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 297 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 298 Selectable Ring Tones Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Level: SA Description Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group (IRG) can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned. There are 100 available Ring Groups. Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number Item No. Extension Number 01 Maximum 8 Digits 1~100 Description Assign extensions (up to 32) to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Related Program 22-02 22-05 22-06 Default Extensions 101~108 (first eight ports) ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Ring Groups SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 299 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups. There are 100 available Ring Groups. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number 01 1~8 0 = No Setting 001~100 (Incoming Group) 102 (In-Skin/ External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail) 001~200 Default 1 Description Assign Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups (22-04). Related Program 22-04 22-06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 300 Ring Groups Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode Level: IN Description Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Maximum eight digits Incoming Group Number 0 = No Ring 1 = Ring Default 1 Related Program 22-04 22-05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls, Answering SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 301 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-07 : DIL Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not have a line key, the DIL rings CAP keys. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 001~200 Number of Transferring Destination Extension Number (maximum eight digits) Pilot Number Default No Setting Conditions Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 302 Direct Inward Line (DIL) Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination Level: IN Description For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 001~200 Incoming Group Number Default 0 = No Setting 001~100 (Incoming Ring Group) 102 (In-Skin/ External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail) 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Line (DIL) Ring Group SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 303 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for each trunk group. Input Data Trunk Group Number Item No. 01 001~100 Item Expected Number of Digits Input Data Default 1~8 4 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group on page 2-312.) 0 Enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the telco. Use this program to make the system compatible with 3- and 4-digit DID service. If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID, it analyzes the first digits that are assigned here. 02 Received Vacant Number Operation Enable/Disable Vacant Number Intercept. 03 Sub-Addressing Mode 0 = Extension # Specify (Intercom) 1 = DID Conversion Table 0 04 DID Receiving Mode for ISDN 0 = Enbloc Receiving 1 = Overlap Receiving 0 05 Local Code Digits 0~15 (0 = No Local Code) 0 Dial (maximum 16 digits) No Setting Dial (1 digit: 0~9) No Setting (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 06 Local Code (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 07 Pilot Code (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 2 - 304 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 08 Item T302 Time-out Operation (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) Input Data Default 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group on page 2-312.) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing (DID) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 305 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables. Input Data Conversion Table Area Number 01~20 Item No. Item 01 1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0~2000 0 = No Setting 1st Area Setup (End Address) Default Table 2nd Area Setup (Start Address) Default Table 2nd Area Setup (End Address) Default Table Input Data Default Table 1st Conversion Table Area 2 - 306 2nd Start Table End Table Start Table End Table 1 1 100 0 0 2 101 200 0 0 3 201 300 0 0 4 301 400 0 0 : : : : : 20 0 0 0 0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing (DID) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 307 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion Level: SA Description Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (2000). The digits received by the system (eight maximum) The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum) The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters maximum) The Transfer Target – 1 and 2 If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (Program 22-10). Operation Mode Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . 1 2 - 308 When you want to. . . Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } 2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . . 0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ Enter characters: + , - . / # % : & ; ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü < = > ? B E S ¢ £ # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time. HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right. Input Data Conversion Table Number Item No. 01 Item Received Number 1~2000 Input Data Default Maximum eight digits No Setting Maximum 24 digits No Setting Maximum 12 characters No Setting This is the received DID digits. 02 Target Number Enter the destination number to which the DID number is sent. 03 DID Name Enter the name that is assigned to the DID digits when it rings the extension. 04 Transfer Operation Mode SV8100 Programming Manual 0 = No Transfer 1 = Busy 2 = No Answer 3 = Busy/No Answer 0 2 - 309 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = No Setting 1~100 = Incoming Group 102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail or InMail 201~264 = Extension Group 400 = Valid Extension Number 401 = DISA 501~599 = DISA/VRS Message 1000~1999 = Speed Dial Number (000~999) 0 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 PRG 20-09-07 overrides this setting. 08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0~200 (0 = No Limit) 0 09 Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port 1 = BGM Port 2 = ACI Port 0 10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 in above : (0~96) 0 11 Ring Group Transfer 0 = Disable (Caller hears Ringback) 1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring) 1 05 Transfer Destination Number 1 06 Transfer Destination Number 2 400 – Allow the outside party to dial a different extension number in the translation table (for example, ring no answer to a dialed number, the caller then hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter another Valid Extension Number). 401– Provide the caller with DISA dialing options (requires using the DISA password). 07 0 This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06. Call Waiting Enable/Disable each conversation table ability to follow the Ring Group programming defined in Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group. If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 2 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program 22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program 22-12-01. 2 - 310 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS. Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing (DID) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 311 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group Level: IN Description For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first destination group for DID calls. Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first destination group by the following: Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station blade is installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02) Busy intercept Ring-no-answer intercept If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk. If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12. For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination. Input Data Conversion Table Area Number 2 - 312 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 01~20 Incoming Group Number 0 = No Setting 1~100 (Incoming Ring Group) 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or InMail) Default 1 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing (DID) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 313 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Group Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 1~100 Conversion Table Area Number 0~20 0 = No Setting Default 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 314 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG Level: IN Description Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message. Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number Item No. 01 Item 1st Delayed Message Start Time 1~100 Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message. 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0 0 VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message. 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0 0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 0 = No Disconnect 1~64800 Seconds 60 Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for IRG. 02 03 1st Delayed Message Number This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played. 04 05 2nd Delayed Message Number This is the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played. 06 Tone Kind at Message Interval What is heard between the Delay Messages. 07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed Message Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 315 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 316 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group Level: IN Description Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There are 64 available Department Groups. Input Data Extension Group Number Item No. 01 Item 1st Delayed Message Start Time 01~64 Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message. 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0 0 VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message. 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0 0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 0 = No Disconnect 1~64800 (sec) 60 Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for Department Group. 02 03 1st Delayed Message Number This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played. 04 05 2nd Delayed Message Number This is the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played. 06 Tone Kind at Message Interval What is heard between the Delay Messages. 07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed Message Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 317 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 318 Department Group Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-16: Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for Private Call Refuse. Item No. 01 Item Speed Dial Group Number Input Data 0~64 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Group SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 319 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Level: IN Description Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern. Input Data Conversion Table Number Item No. 01~100 Item Input Data Default No Setting 01 Received Dial Up to 8 digits 02 Start of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000 03 End of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000 04 Dial-In Conversion Table Number 0~2000 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 320 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern for Private Calls. Item No. Item Input Data 01 Transfer Mode 0 = Not defined 1 = Internal dial 2 = Incoming Ring Group 02 Destination Number 1 = Internal Dial (up to 24 digits) 0~9, , #, P, R, @ 2 = Incoming Ring Group (0~100) 03 Incoming Ring Pattern 0~9 0 = Normal pattern 1~4 = Tone pattern 5~9 = Scale pattern Default 0 No Setting 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 321 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer pattern mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 01~200 Day/Night Mode 01~08 Item No. 01 Item Flexible Ringing Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Default 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 322 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups Level: IN Description Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first. 23 There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups. Input Data Extension Number Program Maximum 8 digits Item No. Group Number Priority Default Description 01 1~64 1~999 1 – xxx Assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups other than the extension group set up by a Program 16-02. Related Program 11-12-26 11-12-27 11-12-28 15-07-24 15-07-25 15-07-26 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Group Call Pickup SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 323 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer Level: IN Description Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call. You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line Preference feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information. Make one entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Extension Number 2 - 324 Maximum eight digits Item No. Day/Night Mode Route Table Number Default Description 01 1~8 0~100 0 Let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). Related Program 14-06 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Line Preference Night Service SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 325 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Level: IN Description Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone. There are 256 available Virtual Extension Ports. Input Data Extension Number Maximum eight digits Item No. Order Extension Group Number Default 01 1~4 00~64 00 (0 or 00=Don’t Care) Description When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key, this program determines the priority for automatically answering the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, the user can lift the handset to answer a ringing call from any group. Related Program 16-02 20-10-08 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 326 Call Arrival Keys (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIE)/ Virtual Extensions (VE) Program 23 : Answer Features Setup Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold Level: IN Description Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature. Program Input Data Item No. 01 Item Hold Recall Time Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 90 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 90 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 1800 Related Program 24 A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. This time works with the Hold Recall Callback Time (Item 2). 02 Hold Recall Callback Time A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold recall time again. Cycling between time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call. 03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. 04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System Hold. 05 Forced Release of Held Call 14-01-16 Depending on the setting of Program 14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on Hold longer than this time. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 327 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 06 Item Park Hold Time – Normal Input Data Default Related Program 0~64800 (sec) 90 20-11-19 0~64800 (sec) 300 20-11-19 A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it. 07 Park Hold Time – Extended (Recall) A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 328 Hold Park Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-02 : System Options for Transfer Level: IN Description Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer feature. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Busy Transfer Enable/Disable extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately. 02 MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls Enable/Disable MOH on Transfer. If set to 0, a transferred caller hears MOH while their call rings the destination extension. If set to 1, a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. 03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time Input Data Default 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1 0 = Hold Tone 1 = Ring Back Tone 0 0~64800 (sec) 10 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 30 Related Program 20-03-02 If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets the time a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox. 04 Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this time. 05 Message Wait Ring Interval Time For single line telephones (SLTs) without message waiting lamps, this is the time between intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the system rings once. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 329 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 07 Item Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone Input Data Default Related Program 0~64800 (sec) 1800 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-10 Time starts when a trunk begins talking with another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking). When this time expires, a warning tone is heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation disconnects after time expires. This time is set again when the external digit timer expires. One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or leased line). 08 Delayed Transfer Time for all Department Groups 0~64800 (sec) 10 11-11-28 11-11-29 15-07-59 09 Two B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer 0~64800 (sec) 10 10-03-16 (PRI) 10 Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-07 11 No Answer Step Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 10 14-01-26 12 No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-26 13 Hook Flash Sending Timer When the System Answers Automatically 0~64800 (sec) 2 Time before sending the hook flash for Call Forward Centrex. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 330 Transfer Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-03 : Park Group Level: IN Description Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in their own group. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Park Group Number Default 01 1~64 1 Maximum eight digits Description Assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. Related Program 15-07-01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Park SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 331 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Day/ Night Mode Speed Dial Area Number Default Description 01 1~8 0~1999 1999 The destination telephone number of the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number registered into the Speed Dial. Use this program to setup the Speed Dial Bin Number. Related Program 11-10-08 13-04 24-05 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 332 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group. There are 64 available Department Groups. Input Data Extension Group Number 01~64 Item No. Day/Night Mode Speed Dial Area Number Default Description 01 1~8 0~1999 1999 Use the Speed Dialing area to program the destination number of the transferred telephone number when a Department Group call is transferred using the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding feature. Related Program 11-11-27 13-04 24-04 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Transfer SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 333 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding Level: IN Description For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0~4) and the destination extension/virtual extension. For extension ports, the Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or a Voice Mail extension. For virtual extensions, the Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on-premise extension or Voice Mail extension. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Fixed Call Forwarding Type Default Description 0 = Fixed Call Forwarding disabled 1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with both extensions ringing 2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when unanswered 3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate 4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or unanswered 0 Set the type of substitute call receipt and specify the extension number transferred on originated telephone. Conditions Do not use Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 (Both Ringing) with Voice Mail ports. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 334 Call Forwarding Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise Level: IN Description Use Program 24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number for each extension/virtual extension. The Off-Premise destination can have up to 24-digits. A trunk access code (e.g., 9) must be included in the number. Fixed Call Forwarding Types: Input Data Extension Number Off-Premise Destination Number 1~9, 0, #, , P, R, @ (up to 24 digits) Up to eight digits Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 335 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex Level: IN Description Use Program 24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex to assign the Call Forwarding type and Call Forwarding for Centrex telephone number for each extension/virtual extension. The Off-Premise destination can have up to 24-digits. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Call Forwarding Type Up to eight digits Input Data Default 0~4 0 1~9, 0, #, , P, R, @ (up to 24 digits) No Setting 1~9, 0, #, , P, R, @ (up to 24 digits) No Setting Set the Call Forwarding type: 0 = Call Forwarding disabled 1 = Call Forwarding No Answer 2 = Call Forwarding Immediate Call 3 = Call Forwarding Busy or No Answer 4 = Call Forwarding when Busy 02 Call Forwarding Destination for Immediate and No Answer Call Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for Immediate and No Answer Calls. 03 Call Forwarding Busy Destination Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for Busy Call. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 336 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0~9, , #, and @. Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise. Only ISDN uses the @ symbol. Pause can be set by LK 1. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Maximum eight digits Input Data 01 Call Forwarding Type: 0 = Call Forwarding Off 1 = Call Forwarding with both ring 2 = Call Forwarding when no answer 3 = Call Forwarding all calls 4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 = Call Forwarding when busy 02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Call, No Answer: 1~9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) Default 0 No Setting Only ISDN uses the @ symbol. 03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No Answer: 1~9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) No Setting 04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination: 1~9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) No Setting 05 Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination: 1~9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) No Setting SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 337 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Input Data Default 06 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer: 0~9, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) None 07 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Busy: 0~9, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 338 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/DISA line. Program Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 001~200 Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode 0 = Extension Number Service Code Specify (Intercom) 1 = Use Dial Conversion Table 0 22-11 02 DISA User ID 0 = Off 1 = On 1 25-08 03 VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm 0 = Normal (Off) 1 = Alarm (On) 0 25 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 339 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message Level: IN Description Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Message (Talkie) Source 0 = No Message 1 = VRS 2 = ACI 3 = Department Group 001~200 Additional Data Default 1 = 01~100 (VRS Message Number) 2 = 01~04 (ACI Group Number) 3 = 01~64 (Extension Group Number) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 340 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Level: IN Description Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Incoming Group Number 0 = Disconnect 1~100 (Incoming Ring Group) 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail) 104 (Speed Dial Bin) 001~200 Default Related Program 0 22-04 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 341 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy Level: IN Description Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Day/Night Mode Default Related Program 01 1~8 0 22-04 Incoming Group Number 0 = Disconnect 1~100 (Incoming Ring Group) 102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail) 104 (Speed Dial Bin) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 342 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers, enter the VRS message (1~100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04. For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 001~200 VRS Message Number 0~100 0 = No Setting Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 343 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer to Program 25-04 and 25-05), you specify: The digit the VRS caller dials (0~9, , #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits, outside callers cannot dial system extensions. The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit. The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message. Example: Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399 In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01. Input Data Item No. 2 - 344 Attendant Message Number 01~100 Received Dial 1~9, 0, , # Item Input Data Default 0 01 Next Attendant Message Number 0~100 0 = No Setting 101 = Voice Mail answers 104 = Refer to 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy 105 = Dial the other extension 02 Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here. Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 345 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA Level: IN Description Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Item No. 01 Item VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops the call. 02 VRS/DISA No Answer Time A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04). 03 Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring Group of PRG25-03/25-04. This setting determines the time the call is ringing in the IRG. 04 Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the answering waiting time of the automatic answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is received. 05 Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Telephone Set Input Data Default Related Program 0~64800 (sec) 10 25-04 0~64800 (sec) 0 25-04 0~64800 (sec) 60 0~64800 (sec) 10 0~64800 (sec) 10 0~64800 (sec) 10 Set the announcement time of the automatic answering extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected. 06 Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI Set the announcement time by the ACI after which an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected. 2 - 346 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 07 Item Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard. 08 Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. 09 DISA Internal Paging Time Enter the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. 10 DISA External Paging Time Enter the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. 11 VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time Set up the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS/DISA call before the system automatically answers the call. 13 VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this time before disconnecting. 14 Delayed VRS Answer Time Assign the delay time from switching from a normal incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the call switches to DID mode immediately. Input Data Default Related Program 0~64800 (sec) 3600 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 0~64800 (sec) 10 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~64800 (sec) 5 0~64800 (sec) 10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 347 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password. Input Data DISA User Number Item No. 01 1~15 Password Default Related PRG Dial (Fixed – six digits) 0~9, , # No Setting 49-10-11 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 348 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users Level: IN Description Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data DISA User Number 1~15 Item No. Day/Night Mode Function Class Default 01 1~8 1~15 1 Conditions DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks. Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 349 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level: IN Description Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1~15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode. Input Data DISA User Number 1~15 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Route Table Number 0~100 0 = No Setting Default 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 350 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class Level: IN Description For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data DISA User Number 1~15 Item No. Day/Night Mode Toll Restriction Class Default 01 1~8 1~15 2 Conditions Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks. Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 351 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level: IN Description Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode. Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes. Input Data DISA User Number 1~15 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Route Table Number 0~100 0 = No Setting Default 1 Conditions You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 352 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Trunk Group Routing Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-13 : System Option for DISA Level: IN Description Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options. Input Data Item No. 01 Item VRS Message Access Password Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the VRS messages. Input Data 1~ 9, 0, , # (Fixed six digits) Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 353 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 DISA Transfer Target Area At Wrong Dial Speed Dial bin number 0~1999 1999 02 DISA Transfer Target Area At No Answer or Busy Speed Dial bin number 0~1999 1999 Conditions Related to Program 25-03-01 and Program 25-04-01. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 354 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS) Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 355 Issue 4.0 2 - 356 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup Program 26 : ARS Service 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service Level: IN Description Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS). Program Input Data Item No. 01 Item ARS Service Enable/Disable ARS. 02 Network Outgoing InterDigit ARS Time With Networking, this time replaces 20-03-04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site B, this time can be programmed for 5 (500ms) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site A. 03 ARS Misdialed Number Handling If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error tone. Input Data Default Related Programming 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 26-02 26-03 26-04 0~64800 (sec) (in 0.1 second increments) 30 20-03-04 0 = Route to Trunk Group 1 1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer 0 21-02 06 Class of Service Match Access 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 26-02 07 F-Route Access COS Reference 0 = F-Route 1 = ARS 0 26-02 44-05 SV8100 Programming Manual 26 2 - 357 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 358 Automatic Route Selection Program 26 : ARS Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Level: IN Description Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS). Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) – The number routes to a trunk group. Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) – The number is controlled by the F-Route table. Input Data Dial Analysis Table Number Item No. Item Input Data 1~400 Default 01 Dial Dial Digits (16 digits maximum) 1~9, 0, , #, or for wild character (Press line key 1) 02 ARS Service Type 0 = No Service (None) 1 = Route to Trunk Group 2 = Select F-Route Access 0 03 Additional Data / Service Number If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): Select Trunk Group Number (0~100, 0= No Route) 0 Related Programming No Setting 44-04 44-05 If Service Type 2 (in 26-02): F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0~500 (F-Route Table Number). Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-481. F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0~500 (F-Route Selection Number). Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule on page 2-480. 04 ARS Class of Service 0~16 0 05 Dial Treatment for ARS 0~15 0 06 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 359 Issue 4.0 Item No. 07 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item Input Data Network Specified Parameter Table 0~16 Default Related Programming 0 26-12 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 360 Automatic Route Selection Program 26 : ARS Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments Level: IN Description Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are: 3 – Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call. 2 – Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call. Requires at least 11 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01). Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01). 1 – Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call. Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01). INPA – Insert the NPA specified by NPA. An – For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1~4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks. DNN – Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234. Wnn – Wait nn seconds. P – Pause in analog trunk. R – Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications. E – End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code. X – When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 361 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Dial Treatment Table Number 1~15 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Treatment Code 24 characters maximum No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 362 Automatic Route Selection Program 26 : ARS Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-04 : ARS Class of Service Level: IN Description Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No. Day/Night Mode Class Default 01 1~8 0~16 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 363 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table Level: IN Description Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier access, which is referred from Program 26-03. Input Data Transit Network ID Table Item No. 01 Item Transit Network ID (Carrier ID) 1~4 Input Data Default 0000~9999 (Fixed four digits) No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 364 Program 26 : ARS Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 26 : ARS Service 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS Level: IN Description Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific Parameter Table. Input Data Network Specific Parameter Table Item No. 01 Item Type of Number Selection This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 02 Numbering Plan Identification Selection This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 1~16 Input Data Default 0 = System Default 1 = Unknown 2 = International No. 3 = National No. 4 = Network Specific No. 5 = Subscriber No. 6 = Abbreviated No. 0 0 = System Default 1 = Unknown 2 = ISDN Plan 3 = Data Plan 4 = Telex Plan 5 = National Standard Plan 6 = Private Plan 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 365 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 366 Program 26 : ARS Service Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode Level: IN Description Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles. The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are: Regular (Business) Mode (0) Hotel Mode (1) ACD Monitor Mode (2) Business/ACD Mode (3) Program 30 Input Data DSS Console Number Item No. 01 01~32 DSS Operation Mode Default 0 = Business Mode 1 = Hotel Mode 2 = ACD Monitor Mode 3 = Business/ACD Mode 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Hotel/Motel SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 367 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Consoles connected. Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per system). When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There are 32 Console Numbers (1~32). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first. Input Data 60-button DSS Console Number Item No. 01 01~32 Item Default No Setting Extension Number Enter the extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS console (up to eight digits). Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 368 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Level: SA Description Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60-button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to four digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code). To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or 00 (If using WebPro or PC Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display, although the DSS function works correctly. If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping. Input Data Index 1 DSS Console Number 01~32 Index 2 Item No. Key Number Function Number 01 001~114 0~99 (General Functional Level) 97 = Door Box Access key (additional data: 1~8 Door Box No.) 00 ~ 99 (Appearance Functional Level) SV8100 Programming Manual Additional Data Refer to Function Number List on the following pages. 2 - 369 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List [1] General functional level (00~99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 --- Not Used --- 01 DSS/One-Touch 02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic On Off: Mic Off 03 DND Key Red On: DND 04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On Off: BGM Off 05 Headset Red On: Under Headset Operation 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key Red On: Under Conference Operation 08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New Call Log Red On: Call Log Off: No Call Log 09 Day/Night Mode Switch 10 Call Forward – Immediate Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 11 Call Forward – Busy Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 12 Call Forward – No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 13 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 14 Call Forward – Both Ring Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 15 Follow Me Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State 18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature active by Function Key 19 External Group Paging External Paging Number (1~8) Red On: Active 2 - 370 Extension Number or any Numbers (up to 24 digits) Mode Number (1~8) Red On: Extension Busy Off: Extension Idle Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call Forward Red On: On mode Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [1] General functional level (00~99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication Red On: Active 20 External All Call Paging 21 Internal Group Paging 22 Internal All Call Paging None 23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal Paging None 24 Call Pickup None 25 Call Pickup for Another Group None 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group Call Pickup Group Number None 27 Speed Dial – System/ Private Speed Dial Number (Speed/Private) None 28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None 29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink (Red): Under a Repeat Dial 30 Saved Number Redial None 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet – Me Conference None 33 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) None 34 Barge-In None 35 Camp On Red On: Under Camp-On or Reservation 36 Department Step Call None 37 DND/FWD Override Call None 38 Message Waiting None SV8100 Programming Manual Internal Paging Number (01~64) Red On: Active 2 - 371 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List (Continued) [1] General functional level (00~99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): Under Monitored Slow Blink (Red): Under Monitoring With Room Monitor there are two parties in the monitor, one being monitored and one who is monitoring. The same key is used on both phones, but the COS says if the key is set to be either a monitored or monitoring party. 40 Handset Transmission Cutoff Red On: Transmission cut-off 41 Secretary Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side 42 Boss – Secretary Call Pickup Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary Mode 43 Series Call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive Hold None 46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out 47 --- Not Used --- 48 --- Not Used --- 49 Call Redirect 50 Account Code 51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~8) Red On: Relay On 52 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup Incoming Group Number Red On: Under Setting 53 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Starting Red On: Active 54 External Call Forward by Door Box Red On: Active 55 Extension Name Edit None 56 General Purpose LED Operation 2 - 372 Extension Number or Voice Mail Number None None 001~100: (Red) 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red) 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green) 201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [1] General functional level (00~99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red) 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green) 201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink 57 General Purpose LED Indication 58 Department Incoming Call – Immediate Extension Group Number (01~64) 59 Department Incoming Call – Delay Extension Group Number ( 01~64) 60 Department Incoming Call – DND Extension Group Number ( 01~64) 61 --- Not Used --- 63 Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) 64 --- Not Used --- 65 --- Not Used --- 66 CTI 67 --- Not Used --- 68 --- Not Used --- 69 --- Not Used --- 70 --- Not Used --- 71 --- Not Used --- 72 Keypad Facility Key 73 Keypad Hold Key 74 Keypad Retrieve Key 75 Keypad Conference Key 76 --- Not Used --- 77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On: Access to Voice Mail Rapid Blink (Green): New Message 78 Conversation Recording 0 = Conversation recording 1 = Delete, Re-recording 2 = Delete Rapid Blink (Red): Recording 79 Automated Attendant (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On: Set Up for All Calls Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No Answer Calls SV8100 Programming Manual Red On: Active Red On: CTI active 2 - 373 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Function Number List (Continued) [1] General functional level (00~99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication Red On: Active 80 Tandem Ringing 0 = Cancel 1 = Set Extension Number to Tandem Ring 81 Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key Trunk Line Number 001~200 82 Dterm IP Call Log 83 Conversation Recording Function 92 Wake Up Call Indication Green On: Wake Up Call Indication Mode On Off: Wake Up Call Indication Mode Off 93 Room Status Indication Green On: Active Room Status Off: Room Status Indication Mode Off 94 Call Attendant 95 Page Switching 97 Door Box Access Key 99 Alternate Answer Key 0 = Pause 1 = Re-record 2 = Address 3 = Erase 4 = Urgent Page Red On: DSS Page 1 Green On: DSS Page 2 Door Box number (1~8) Function Number List [2] Appearance Function Level (00 - 99) (Service Code 752) Function Number Function 00 --- Not Used --- 01 Trunk Key 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- 2 - 374 Additional Data LED Indication Trunk Number (001~200) Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Function Number List (Continued) [2] Appearance Function Level (00 - 99) (Service Code 752) 04 Park Key Park Number (01~64) 05 --- Not Used --- 06 Trunk Access Via Networking 07 Station Park Hold None 08 --- Not Used --- 10 --- Not Used --- 11 --- Not Used --- 12 --- Not Used --- 13 --- Not Used --- 14 --- Not Used --- 15 --- Not Used --- 16 --- Not Used --- 17 --- Not Used --- 18 --- Not Used --- 19 --- Not Used --- Network System Number (01~50) Default The DSS keys 01~60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101~160. The DSS keys 61~114 of all DSS consoles = None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 375 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer Level: SA Description Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console). Index 1 DSS Console Number 01~32 Index 2 Item No. 01 Item Name DSS Console Alternate Answer Input Data Default Alternate DSS No. 01~32 0 = No Setting Conditions Related extension is assigned in PRG30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at PRG30-03. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 376 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table Level: IN Description Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS consoles. Input Data Item No. Item Lamp Pattern Data Default 02 Busy Extension 0~7 7 (On) 03 DND Extension 0~7 3 (RW) 04 ACD Agent Busy 0~7 7 (On) 05 Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) 0~7 0 (Off) 06 ACD Agent Log Out (ACD DSS) 0~7 5 (IL) 07 ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS) 0~7 4 (IR) 08 ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS) 0~7 6 (IW) 09 Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 7 (On) 10 Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 1 (FL) 11 Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 2 (WK) 12 Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW) 13 Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL) 14 Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW) 15 Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 6 (IW) 16 Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR) 17 Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW) 18 Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 0 (Off) 19 Hotel Status Code (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR) 20 Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL) 21 VM Message Indication 0~7 3 (RW) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 377 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-9 LED Patterns for DSS Console Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 378 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup to set the MAC address for a particular IP DSS Console. This must be done before the console can be associated to the attendant phone. The system supports up to 32 IP DSS Consoles. Index 1 DSS Console Number 01~32 Input Data Item No. 01 Function Name MAC Address Input Data 00-00-00-00-00-00~FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Default 00-00-00-00-00-00 Conditions This is a Read-Only command. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 379 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 380 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging Level: IN Description Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for Internal/External Paging. The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter. Program 31 Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . 1 When you want to. . . Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } 2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ SV8100 Programming Manual % & ’ ( Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 2 - 381 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Key for Entering Names (Continued) When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . . Enter characters: + , - . / £ # : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time. Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right. Input Data Item No. 01 Item All Call Paging Zone Name Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone. The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement. 02 Page Announcement Duration Set the maximum time for Page announcements. (Affects External Paging only) 04 Privacy Release Time Once the user initiates a Meet-Me Conference or Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for the Paged party to join the call. Default Related Program Up to 12 Characters Group All 11-12-19 31-02-02 0~64800 (sec) 1200 0~64800 (sec) 90 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 382 Paging, External Paging, Internal Program 31 : Paging Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group. 02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving Allow/Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extensions can make only (not receive) All Call Internal Paging announcements. If combined, Paging zones should be restricted as well, change the internal page zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0. Maximum eight digits Input Data 0~64 (0 = No Setting) 0 = Off 1 = On Default 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging, Internal SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 383 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging. The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter. Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . 1 When you want to. . . Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } 2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( Enter characters: + , - . / : ; < ¢ £ 2 - 384 Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü = > ? B E S Program 31 : Paging Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . . # When you want to. . . # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time. Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right. Input Data Internal Paging Group Number Item No. 01 Item Internal Paging Group Name Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. 01~64 Input Data Default Up to 12 Characters Refer to default table. Default Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name Extension Paging Group Name 01 Group 1 02 Group 2 : : 64 Group 64 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 385 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 386 Paging, Internal Program 31 : Paging Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group Level: IN Description Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. On the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, the CD-CP00-US zone is number 9. To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.). Input Data External Speaker Number Item No. Paging Group Number 01 0~8 (0 = No Setting) 1~9 Default Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 1 (Group 1) Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 2 (Group 2) Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 3 (Group 3) Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 4 (Group 4) Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 5 (Group 5) Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 6 (Group 6) Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 7 (Group 7) Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 8 (Group 8) Speaker 9 (CD-CP00-US) = 1 (Group 1) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging, External SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 387 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page Level: IN Description Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The CD-CP00-US zone is number 9. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1~200 External Speaker Number 1~9 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Input Data 0 = No Ringing (No) 1 = Ringing (Yes) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 388 Night Service Paging, External Program 31 : Paging Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-06 : External Speaker Control Level: IN Description Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an amplifier. Input Data External Speaker Number Item No. 01 Item Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging (Paging Start Tone) Enable/Disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement. 02 Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging (Paging End Time) Enable/Disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement. 03 Speech Path Determine if the external speaker is used for talkback (As this option is not available with the CD-CP00-US external page zone, speaker 9 should be left at 1). 1~9 Input Data Default 0 = No Tone (None) 1 = Splash Tone 2 = Chime Tone 2 0 = No Tone (None) 1 = Splash Tone 2 = Chime Tone 2 0 = Both Way (Duplex) 1 = One Way (PGD(2)-U10 ADP SPK) (Simplex) 1 04 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 05 CODEC Receive Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 389 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 390 Paging, External Program 31 : Paging Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments Level: IN Description Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0~8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0~64) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone. Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1~9) to an External Page Group (1~8). Input Data External Paging Group Number Item No. 01 0~8 (0 = All External Paging) Internal Paging Group Number 0~64 (0 = All Internal Paging) Default 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging, External Paging, Internal SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 391 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-08 : BGM on External Paging Level: IN Description Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle. When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The CD-CP00-US zone is number 9. Input Data External Speaker Number Item No. 01 Item BGM 1~9 Item Enable/Disable the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting Background Music when it is idle. Input Data Default 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 392 Background Music Paging, External Program 31 : Paging Setup Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. 32 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Door Box Answer Time A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes during this time. 02 Door Lock Cancel Time When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook flashes or a multiline terminal user presses the Recall key while talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this time. 03 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer Program Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 30 0~64800 (sec) 10 0~64800 (sec) 60 Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and the call is then disconnected. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 393 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment Level: SA Description Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. Input Data Door Box Number 1~8 Day/Night Mode 1~8 Item No. Door Box Ring Group Number 01 01~32 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 394 Door Box Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone Setup on page 2-591. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. Input Data Door Box Number Item No. 01 02 Item Chime Pattern CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~8 Input Data 0 = None 1 = Door Box Ring 2 = Door Box Ring 3 = Door Box Ring 4 = Door Box Ring 5 = Door Box Ring 6 = Door Box Ring Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 Door Box 1 = 1 Door Box 2 = 2 Door Box 3 = 3 Door Box 4 = 4 Door Box 5 = 5 Door Box 6 = 6 Door Box 7 = 1 Door Box 8 = 1 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32 (PGD(2)-U10 ADP to Door Box) 03 CODEC Receive Gain Setup (Door Box to PGD(2)-U10 ADP) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 395 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. Input Data Door Box Number 1~8 Item No. Item Input Data 01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Default Door Box Name 1 = DOOR- 1 Door Box Name 2 = DOOR- 2 Door Box Name 3 = DOOR- 3 Door Box Name 4 = DOOR- 4 Door Box Name 5 = DOOR- 5 Door Box Name 6 = DOOR- 6 Door Box Name 7 = DOOR- 7 Door Box Name 8 = DOOR- 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 396 Door Box Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port can have only one function (input, output or none). Input Data ACI Port Number Item No. 01 33 01~96 ACI Type 0 = None 1 = MOH/BGM (Input) 2 = External Audio Port (Input/Output) Program Default 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface (ACI) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 397 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group Level: IN Description Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to Department Groups. An ACI port can be in only one group. Also use this program to set the ACI port priority. When a call comes into the ACI Department Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of its priority. A higher priority port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6). There are 96 ACI ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available. Input Data ACI Port Number 01~96 Item No. Group Number Priority 01 01~16 1~96 Default ACI Port Group Priority 01 1 1 02 1 2 : : : 96 1 96 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 398 Analog Communications Interface (ACI) Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line. Program Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 02 Item Input Data 001~200 Default Description 1 Set the start signaling mode for DID and Tie trunks. DID and Tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling. DID/E&M Start Signaling 0 = 2nd Dial Tone Receive Dial Type 0 = DP 1 = DTMF 2 = MF 1 for E&M Tie Line 1 = Wink 2 = Immediate 3 = Delay 34 22-02 10-09 03 E&M Dial-In Mode 0 = Specify Extension Number (Intercom) 1 = Use Conversion Table (NTT) 0 Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should be directed as an intercom call or if it should follow the DID Translation Table in Program 22-11. 04 E&M Line Dial Tone 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 1 Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up. Enter 0 if the Tie Line should not send dial tone. 05 System Toll Restriction 0 = System 1 = Each extension 0 Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject to Toll Restriction. SV8100 Programming Manual Related Program 22-11 21-05 2 - 399 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 400 Tie Lines Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service Level: IN Description Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1~200 Item No. Day/Night Mode Class Default Related Program 01 1~8 1~15 1 20-14 Conditions Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines. Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 401 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines Level: IN Description Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 1~8 or 1~100) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line – for each Night Service Mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 Route Table Number 0~100 0 = No Setting Default 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 402 Tie Lines Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Level: IN Description Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001~200 Item No. Day/Night Mode Toll Restriction Class Default Related Program 01 1~8 1~15 2 21-05 14-01-08 Conditions Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines. Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 403 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Level: IN Description Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group. Input Data Incoming Trunk Group Number Outgoing Trunk Group Number 1~100 001~100 Input Data 0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 1 = Disable (N-Tandem) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 404 Tie Lines Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line Level: IN Description Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or delete for Tie Lines. Delete Digit Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call. If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits including the extension number. Add Digit If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the location can be added to the received digits. Input Data Incoming Trunk Group Number Item No. Item 001~100 Input Data 01 Delete Digit 0~255 (255 = delete all digits) 02 Additional Dial Digits Up to four digits (0~9, , #) Default 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 405 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer Level: IN Description Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate Start) 0~64800 3 02 First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start) 0~64800 0 03 First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) 0~64800 3 04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0~64800 0 05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M 0~64800 30 Conditions If PRG 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the transfer when not answered. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 406 Tie Lines Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines Level: IN Description Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13. Input Data Class of Service 01~15 Item No. Table No. Dial Data Default Related Program 01 01~20 Up to 10 Digits (0~9, , #) No Setting 21-05-13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 407 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options Level: IN Description Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI//DNIS service option setup for E&M Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Default Item No. 01 Name Input Data COS 2~15 Receive Format Specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. Make sure your entry is compatible with the service the telco provides. The character indicates a delimiter. If PRG34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), this PRG works only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*. 02 01~15 Delimiter Dial Code Related Program 0 = Address 1 = ANI 2 = DNIS 3 = ANIAddress 4 = ANIDNIS 5 = DNISANI ( = Delimiter Code) 0 34-01-02 34-09-02 1~9, 0, #, 34-09-01 0 = Fixed Route (Item 08) (No Routing) 1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data 2 = Routes on Received ANI Data 0 22-09-01 22-11-01 34-09-04 34-09-08 Define the character Telco uses as a delimiter (see entries 1~5 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0~9, #, and . 03 Route Setup of Receive Dial Specify the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is selected, refer to Program 34-0904. 2 - 408 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 04 Issue 4.0 Name Input Data COS 2~15 Route Table Setup of Target Dial Set how the system uses the route data (gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/ DNIS calls. Related Program 0 = SPD Table (Program 13-03) 1 = DID Table (Program 22-11) 0 13-04-01 13-04-03 22-09-01 22-11 34-09-05 34-09-06 0 = Display Off 1 = Display On 0 13-04 20-09-02 22-11-03 23-09-04 Start = 0 End = 0 13-04 0 25-03 If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be routed using the DID table (1), up to 8 digits can be matched. The number of expected digits set in Program 22-09-01 must match the ANI digits defined in Program 22-11-01. For example, if an ANI/DNIS number received was 20355512343001 and Program 22-09-01=4, the entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension. If the call is to be routed using the SPD table (0), up to 24 digits can be matched. Define the range of the SPD table to be used in Program 34-09-06. The data is compared to the entries in Program 13-04-01 and then routed according to Program 13-04-03. 05 ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name Set whether or not ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display. 06 Routing SPD Table Setup Define which part of the SPD Table set up in Program 13-04 the system uses for ANI/DNIS Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing. Start = 0, 100~1900 End = 0, 99~1999 This is required if Items 04 and 05 above are 1 (Caller ID on). When you specify a starting and end address, the system uses the part of the table for look-ups. When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the table, the system routes according to the associated Name data. That data can be an extension, Department Group pilot number, the voice mail master number or a trunk ring group. 07 Routing on ANI/DNIS Error Determine how the system handles an ANI/ DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string. SV8100 Programming Manual 0 = Play Busy Tone to Caller 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25-03 (Transfer) 2 - 409 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. 08 09 Name Input Data COS 2~15 Related Program 0 25-04 Determine how the system handles an ANI/ DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer. 0 = Play Busy or Ringback Tone to Caller (Busy/NoAns) 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25-04 (Transfer) Calling Number Address Length 1~8 digits 7 34-09-01 Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is the address). Specify the address length. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 410 T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) Tie Lines Program 34 : Tie Line Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment to delete the Information Digits received from the Network on Feature Group D Trunks. Input Data Incoming Trunk Group No. Item No. 01 Item 001~100 Input Data Default Description 2 Assign the number of information digits to delete from the element received from the Network. Delete Digits for T1 ANI Define the number of digits to delete from the information element received from Telco. 0~9 digits Conditions None Feature Cross Reference T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Ability) Example: Example of ANI information KP009727517645STKP7100ST. 00 Information digits 9727517645 ANI information 7100 DNIS Digits SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 411 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 412 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options Level: IN Description Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data SMDR Port Number Item No. 01 Item Output Port Type Specify the type of connection used for SMDR. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02 or 15-02-19. 02 Output Destination Number Header Language Specify the language in which the SMDR header should be printed. 04 Omit Digits Default 0 = None 3 = LAN 4 = CTA/CTU 0 Up to 8 digits No Setting 0 = English 1 = German 2 = French 3 = Italian 4 = Spanish 0 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 0 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 0 Specify the SMDR printer output extension (CTA/CTU extension number). 03 35 1~8 Input Data Program The number of digits entered in this option do not print on the SMDR report. For example, if the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR report. 05 Minimum Digits Outgoing calls must be at least this number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 413 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 06 Item Input Data Minimum Call Duration Default 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0 0 = NA Type (North America) 1 = G/J Type (Overseas/ Japan) 0 The duration of the call must be at least this time to be included on the SMDR report. 07 Minimum Ring Time (For Incoming Calls) A call must ring for at least this time to be included on the SMDR report. 08 Format Selection Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 414 Station Message Detail Recording Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-02 : SMDR Output Options Level: IN Description Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data SMDR Port Number Item No. 01 Item Toll Restricted Call SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by Toll Restriction. 02 PBX Calls When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can include all calls (1), or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code (0). 03 Trunk Number or Name Select whether the system should display the trunk number or the name on SMDR reports. 04 Summary (Daily) Summary (Weekly) Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at midnight). 06 Summary (Monthly) Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the last day of the month). 07 Toll Charge Cost Set to 1 to have the SMDR report include toll charges. SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Default 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Name 1 = Number 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 If this option is set to 1, Program 35-02-14 must be set to 0. Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary (at midnight every night). 05 1~8 2 - 415 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 08 Item Input Data Incoming Call Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report include incoming calls. If you disable this option (0), incoming calls do not print. 09 Extension Number or Name Set to 1 to have the SMDR report include extension numbers. Set to 0 to have the SMDR report include extension names. 10 All Lines Busy (ALB) Output Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication should be displayed. Default 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1 0 = Name 1 = Number 1 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0 = Not Output 1 = Output 1 12 DID Table Name Output 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 0 = CLI (CLIP) 1 = DID Calling Number 2 = CID Name 0 0 = Trunk Port Name 1 = Received Dialed Number 0 0 = ACC 1 = CNAME 0 0 = Normal 1 = Line Feed 0 Determine if the DID table name should be displayed. 13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk Determine if the CLI output should be displayed for DID. 14 Date Determine whether or not the date should be displayed on SMDR reports. 15 This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program 35-02-03. CLI/DID Number Switching Determine if the CLI or DID Number Switching should be displayed. 16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set to 1, ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If set to 0 trunk names are printed instead. 17 Print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine if SMDR should print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call. 18 Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine how SMDR should print Caller Name of Incoming Call. 21 2 - 416 --- Not Used --- Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 417 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Level: IN Description Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information should be sent. Input Data Trunk Group Number 1~100 Item No. SMDR Port No. Default 01 1~8 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 418 Station Message Detail Recording Trunk Group Routing Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups Level: IN Description Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port where the outgoing SMDR information should be sent. There are 64 available Department Groups. Input Data Department Group Number 01~64 Item No. SMDR Port No. Default 01 1~8 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 419 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-05 : Account Code Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06. Input Data Class of Service Number Item No. 01 Item Account Code Mode Select the Account Code Mode (0~3). 02 Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup Enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above). 03 Account Codes for Incoming Calls Allow users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any code entered dials out on the connected trunk. 04 Hiding Account Codes Hide or show the Account codes on a telephone display. 2 - 420 01~15 Input Data Default 0 = Account Codes Disabled (None) 1 = Account Codes optional 2 = Account Codes Required but not verified (No verify) 3 = Account Codes Required and Verified (Verify) 0 0 = Account Codes for toll and local calls All) 1 = Account Codes just for toll calls (STD) 0 0 = Account Codes for incoming calls disabled (No) 1 = Account Codes for incoming calls enabled (Yes) 0 0 = Account Codes displayed 1 = Account Codes not displayed 0 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Account Codes SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 421 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table Level: IN Description Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 2000 codes with 3~6 digits, using the characters 0~9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234. Input Data Verified Account Code Bin Number Item No. 01 1~2000 Verified Account Code 1~9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card) (Up to 16 digits) Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 422 Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to define the basic operation of Voice Mail. Program Input Data Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- 04 --- Not Used --- 05 --- Not Used --- 06 --- Not Used --- 07 --- Not Used --- 10 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default Description 40 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration (Analog) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 423 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-02 : Mailbox Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 40-02 : Mailbox Setup to define the mailbox of the Voice Mail. There are a maximum of 500 mailboxes. Use this program to set the box number and password linked to the extension number (or pilot number) for each mailbox. Input Data Message Box Number Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- Input Data 01~500 Default Description Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 424 Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-03 : Message Recording Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-03 : Message Recording Setup to define the auto-answering operation of the Voice Mail. Input Data Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration (Analog) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 425 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-04 : Live Recording Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-04 : Live Recording Setup to define the conversation recording operation of the Voice Mail. Input Data Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- 04 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default Description Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 426 Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-05 : Call Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-05 : Call Information Setup to define the incoming notice of the Voice Mail. Input Data Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- 04 --- Not Used --- 05 --- Not Used --- 06 --- Not Used --- 07 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration (Analog) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 427 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup to define the outside lines to use the Automated Attendant recording operation of the Voice Mail. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1~200 Day/Night Mode 1~8 Item No. Item 01 --- Not Used --- 02 --- Not Used --- 03 --- Not Used --- Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 428 Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Level: IN Description Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be used for the VRS prompts. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish Default 1 2 - 429 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 430 Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes Level: IN Description Use Program 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes to select the language to be used for the mailboxes. Input Data Mailbox Number Item No. 01 Item 001~500 Input Data Default --- Not Used --- Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration (Analog) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 431 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup to define the broadcast group of a Voice Mail mailbox. Input Data Multiple Address Group Number Item No. 01 Destination Box Number 1~10 Box Number Default --- Not Used --- Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 432 Voice Mail Integration (Analog) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option Level: IN Description In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice Announcement feature. Input Data Item No. 01 Item VRS Fixed Message Enable (1)/Disable (0) the system ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as You have a message). 02 General Message Number Assign the VRS message number to use for the General Message. 03 VRS No Answer Destination Assign the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting Message. 04 VRS No Answer Time Input Data Default 0 = Not Used 1 = Use 0 0~100 0 = No General Message Service 0 0~100 (Incoming Ring Group Number) 0 (No Setting) 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~101 0 = No message 101 = Fixed message 0 If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension waits this time for a VRS port to become free. 05 Park and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend) If a Park and Page is not picked up during this time, the Paging announcement repeats. 06 Set VRS Message for Private Call Refuse (VRS Msg Private Call) This item assigns the VRS Message number to be used as Private Call Refuse. When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance is: “Your call cannot go through.” SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 433 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 07 Item Input Data Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse (VRS Msg CID) Assign the VRS Message number to be used as Caller ID Refuse. Default 0~101( 0 = No message 101 = Fixed message 0 When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance is: “Your call cannot go through.” 08 Call Attendant Busy Message 0~100 0 = No message 0 09 Call Attendant No Answer Message 0~100 0 = No message 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 434 Voice Response System (VRS) Program 40 : Voice Recording System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment Level: IN Description In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Day/Night Mode 01 1~8 1~200 VRS Message Number 0~100 0 = No Service Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Response System (VRS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 435 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 436 Program 40 : Voice Recording System Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-01 : System Options for ACD Level: IN Description In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the system options for the ACD feature. Program Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default No Setting 01 System Supervisory Extension Up to eight digits (0~9, , #) 02 Login ID Code Digit 0~20 0 = No Login ID 0 03 ACD MIS Connection Ports 0 = None 3 = LAN (CD-CP00-US) 0 04 ACD-MIS Command Notification when a BT Message is returned 0 = Notifies 1 = No notification 0 41 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 437 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments Level: SA Description In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, for each ACD extension number, assign an ACD Group (1~64). An ACD Group number is assigned to each Work Period number (1~8). The assigned extension works as an ACD agent extension in the following cases: The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is logged in. An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number. An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot number. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No. ACD Work Period Mode Number 01 1~8 ACD Group No. 0~64 0 = No setting Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 438 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group Level: SA Description In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group, for each incoming trunk group set up in Program 22-05, designate which ACD Group (1~64) the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week. Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100 ACD Work Period Mode Number 1~8 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 ACD Group Number 0~64 0 = No setting 0 02 Night Announcement Service 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 03 Priority Data 0, 1~7 0 = No Priority 1 = Highest Priority 7 = Lowest Priority 0 Determine whether or not an incoming call to a trunk ring group should follow a priority assignment. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 439 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 440 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Ring Groups Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor Level: SA Description For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor to assign the group supervisor extension and operating mode. Operating modes are: 0 = Supervisor extension does not receive ACD Group calls. 1 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group overflow calls only. 2 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other agents. An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD Group. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. 01~64 Item Input Data 01 Group Supervisor Extension Extension Number (Up to eight digits) 02 Operation Type 0 = Do not receive ACD incoming calls (No) 1 = Receive ACD incoming calls for overflow (Busy) 2 = Receive ACD incoming calls all the time (Yes) Default No Setting 0 Conditions If you assign an extension as a ACD Group Supervisor in this program, you cannot program the same extension as a System Supervisor in Program 41-01-01. Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 441 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules Level: SA Description Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.) ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions receive the following calls when they are logged in. ACD Call on a Trunk When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Program 41-03 and 41-06). ACD Pilot Number Call Any time – if ACD extensions are available. Input Data ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern 1~4 Item No. Work Period Mode Number Start Time End Time Default 01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000 (End) 0000 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 442 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules Level: SA Description Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules.) Input Data ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1~4 Item No. Work Period Mode Number Start Time End Time Default 01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000 (End) 0000 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 443 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1~4) to days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06). Input Data Item No. 01 Day Number Time Pattern Default 1 = Sunday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 2 = Monday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 3 = Tuesday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 4 = Wednesday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 5 = Thursday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 6 = Friday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 7 = Saturday 0~4 0 = No ACD 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 444 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options Level: SA Description For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow mode (0~9), destination and announcement message types. Delay Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls. Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry options. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. Item 01~64 Input Data Default 01 Overflow Operation Mode 0 = No Overflow (None) 1 = Overflow with No Announcement 2 = No Overflow with First Announcement Only 3 = No Overflow with First & Second Announcements 4 = Overflow with First Announcement Only 5 = Overflow with First & Second Announcement 6 = --- Not Used --7 = --- Not Used --8 = No Overflow with Second Announcement Only 9 = Overflow with Second Announcement Only 0 02 ACD Overflow Destination 0 = No Setting 1~64 = ACD Group 65 = Overflow Table (Program 41-09) 66 = Voice Mail Integration 67 = System Speed (Program 41-08-05) 68 = Incoming Ring Group (Program 41-08-06) 0 03 Delay Announcement Source Type 0 = ACI 1 = VRS 2 = VM8000 InMail 0 04 ACD Overflow Transfer Time 0~64800 (sec) 30 05 System Speed Dial Bin 0~1999 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 67) 1999 06 Incoming Ring Group when Overflow 1~100 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 68) 1 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 445 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 446 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting Level: SA Description Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call is transferred when overflow occurs. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. Priority Order Number 01 1~7 01~64 Transfer ACD Group Number With Overflow 0~65 0 = No Setting 65 = In-Skin Voice Mail Integration Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 447 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement Level: SA Description Use Program 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement to define the ACI port number to be used for the delay announcement. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as ACI in Program 41-08-03. Input Data ACD Group No Item No. 01~64 Item Input Data Default 01 1st Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0 = No Setting 0 02 2nd Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0 = No Setting 0 03 1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 4 0~64800 (sec) 60 0~64800 (sec) 0 Set the time before the 1st Delay Announcement is played. 04 2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer Set the time the 1st Delay Announcement plays before the 2nd Delay Announcement starts to play. 05 2nd Delay Announcement Sending Duration Set the time the 2nd Delay Announcement plays. After this time expires, the call disconnects. To keep the call in queue, set this time to 0. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 448 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement Level: SA Description Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to use as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages. Refer to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41-08-03. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. 01 01~64 Item Input Data Default 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay Message. 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0~255 0 0~101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay Message. 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count 0~255 0 0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 Input what is heard between the Delay messages. ACD Forced Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay Message 0~64800 (sec) (0 = No Disconnect) 60 Delay Message Start Timer Input the time before the 1st Delay Message Starts. 02 03 1st Delay Message Number Input the number of times the 1st Delay Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not played. 04 05 2nd Delay Message Number Input the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not played. 06 07 Tone Kind at Message Interval Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message is played, before the call is disconnected. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 449 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 08 Item Queue Depth Announcement Input when the Queue Depth Announcement is played. Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = After 1st (1st) 2 = After 2nd (2nd) 3 = After 1st and 2nd (1st and 2nd) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 450 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce voice resource and sending time for each ACD group. Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number calls. Input Data ACD Group Number Item No. Item 01~64 Input Data Default 01 Night Announcement Source Type 0 = ACI 1 = VRS 0 02 Night Announcement ACI Port Number 0 Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0. 0~96 0 = No Setting ACD Night Announce Sending Time 0~64800 (sec) 30 03 Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0. Conditions The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call. Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 451 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement Level: SA Description Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS message number to use as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12-01. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. 01 Item VRS Message Number Input the VRS Message to use for the Night Announcement. 02 Tone Kind at Message Interval Input what is heard between the Night Announcements. 01~64 Input Data Default 0~100 0 = No Message 0 0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 452 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-14 : ACD Options Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups. When you set an option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents in the group. The chart below shows each of the ACD options, the entries available, and the default entry. Input Data ACD Group No Item No. 01 Item Emergency Call Operation Mode The supervisor must be logged in and have an Emergency Key programmed for this feature. By pressing the key once, the supervisor monitors the call – pressing twice barges in on the call. 02 Automatic Wrap Up Mode Enable/Disable Automatic Wrap Up mode. 03 ACD Priority for Overflow Calls Determine whether the ACD group should use its own priority assignment or follow the priority assigned in Program 41-03-03. 04 Automatic Answer at Headset Enable/Disable Automatic Answer for agents using headsets. 06 01~64 Call Queuing after 2nd Announcement Input Data Default 0 = Call to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy. 1 = No calls to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy. 0 0 = After wrap up the mode key is pressed. (Manual) 1 = After call is finished automatically. (Auto) 0 0 = Own group priority 1 = Priority order by Program 41-03-03 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Enable (Yes) 1 = Disable (No) 0 Determine whether the caller should hear the 2nd Delay Announcement and then be taken out of queue (1), or placed back into queue (0). SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 453 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 07 Item Automatic Off Duty for SLT Enable/Disable Automatic Off Duty (rest) mode for agents with SLT. 08 ACD Off Duty Mode Enable/Disable the ability to receive internal calls when in Off Duty Mode. 09 Automatic Wrap Up End Time Input Data Default 0 = No change to Off Duty mode 1 = Change to Off Duty mode automatically (Skip) 0 0 = Cannot receive internal call 1 = Can receive internal call 0 0~64800 (sec) 0 0~64800 (sec) 10 0 Input the time the agent is in Wrap mode when Wrap key is pressed, or automatically put into Wrap mode. 10 ACD No Answer Skip Time Set the time a call to the ACD Group rings an idle extension before routing to the next agent. 12 Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for SLT) 0~64800 (sec) 13 1st Data – ACD Queue 1-Digit Assignment 1st Data – Up to one Digit (0, 1~9, #, ) 2nd Data – Destination Number Type 2nd Data – 0 = None 1 = Extension or Voice Mail 2 = Incoming Ring Group 3 = Speed Dial Areas 4 = ACD Group 3rd Data – Destination Number 3rd Data – Up to eight digits (0, 1~9, #, ) DTMF Detection Assignment during Delay Announcement 0 = Does not detect during message 1 = Detect during message 1 0~64800 (sec) 0 14 Blank 0 Blank Set whether the DTMF Detection for Dial Out occurs during or after the message is played. 15 DTMF Detect Time after Delay Announcement Message Set the time for DTMF Detection after the Delay Announcement Message. 2 - 454 Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 455 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information Level: SA Description Use Program 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for Audible Indication for Log Out/Off Duty mode for each ACD group. These program settings provide an alarm to the agents, but no Queue Status Display is indicated. Do not use these programs if the alarm options are defined in Program 41-20-01 through 41-20-05. Feature Available in Program 41-15 Available in Program 41-20 Queue Status Display --- Yes Queue Status Display Time --- Yes Yes Yes Alarm Alarm Send Time Interval Time of Queue Status Display Class of Service Timing of Alarm and Display Queue Status Yes Program 41-15-02 determines the length/interval of the alarm. Yes --- Yes Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41-15-01 is exceeded. Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41-20-01 is exceeded. Then follows Program 41-20-03 time for displaying status. Input Data ACD Group No. 01~64 Item No. Item 01 Number of Calls in ACD Queue to Activate Alarm Information 0~200 0 = No Alarm 0 02 Interval Time of Alarm Information 0~64800 (sec) 0 Input Data Default Input the alarm sound time. 2 - 456 Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 457 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow Level: SA Description Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call overflow and the mode for each ACD group. Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. 01 Item Number of Calls in Queue Define the maximum number of calls allowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs. 02 Operation Mode for ACD Queue Define how the system should handle calls when the number of calls in queue exceeds the threshold. 01~64 Input Data Default 0~200 0 = No Limitation 0 0 = The last waiting call is transferred 1 = The longest waiting call is transferred 2 = Send Busy Tone 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 458 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup to define the ACD login mode for each extension. If the AIC Login Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC Logout service codes for the AIC members in Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09. Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No. 01 Login Mode 0 = Normal Login Mode 1 = AIC Login Mode Default 0 Conditions If set to 1, note that a supervisor cannot log in/out an AIC member as they are not normal ACD agents. Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 459 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup Level: SA Description Use Program 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup to define the ACD Agent Identity Code Table. Input Data AIC Table No. Item No. 2 - 460 001~512 Item Input Data Default No Setting 01 ACD Agent Identity Code Up to four digits 02 Default ACD Group Number 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 03 ACD Group Number in Mode 1 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 04 ACD Group Number in Mode 2 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 05 ACD Group Number in Mode 3 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 06 ACD Group Number in Mode 4 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 07 ACD Group Number in Mode 5 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 08 ACD Group Number in Mode 6 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 09 ACD Group Number in Mode 7 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 10 ACD Group Number in Mode 8 0~64 0 = No Setting 0 Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 461 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Level: SA Description Use Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign VM8000 InMail Master Mailboxes (PRG 47-03) as ACD Delay Announcement Mailboxes. Input Data ACD Group Number Item No. 01 Item Delay Message Start Timer 1 ~ 64 Input Data 0 ~ 64800 (sec) Default 0 Determine the time the system waits before playing the Delay Message. 02 Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailbox as the message source for the 1st Announcement Message. 03 1st Delay Message Sending Count Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play. 04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the 2nd Announcement Message. 05 2nd Delay Message Sending Count Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play. Dial (up to eight digits) No Setting 0 = No message is played. 1 ~ 255 0 Dial (up to eight digits) No Setting 0 = No message is played. 0 1 ~ 255 06 Wait Tone Type at Message Interval Determine what the caller hears between the messages. 07 ACD Forced Disconnect Time after 2nd Announcement 0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = Music On Hold Tone 2 = Background Music Source 0 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 0 Assign the time the system should wait after the end of the ACD Delay Message before disconnecting. 2 - 462 Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 08 Item Delay Message Interval Time Input Data 0 ~ 64800 (sec) Default 20 Set the time for the interval between the Delay Messages. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 463 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings Level: SA Description Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD Queue Status Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, and causes an alarm to sound, when the parameters in this program are met. Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents. The options in Program 41-20 should not be used if 41-15 is set. Available in Program 41-15 Available in Program 41-20 Queue Status Display --- Yes Queue Status Display Time --- Yes Yes Yes Feature Alarm Alarm Send Time Interval Time of Queue Status Display Class of Service Timing of Alarm and Display Queue Status 2 - 464 Program 41-15-02 determines the length/interval of the alarm. Yes Yes --- Yes Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41-15-01 is exceeded. Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41-20-01 is exceeded. Then follows Program 41-20-03 time for displaying status. Program 41 : ACD Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data ACD Group No. Item No. 01 01~64 Item Number of Calls in Queue Set the number of calls that can accumulate in the ACD queue before the Queue Status Display (and optional queue alarm) occurs. 02 Queue Status Display Time Input Data Default 0 = No Display, 1~200 0 0~64800 (sec) 5 (sec) 0~64800 (sec) 60 (sec) Set the time the Queue Status display remains on the telephone display. 03 Queue Status Display Interval Set the time that refreshes the Queue Status Alarm time in queue display and causes the optional queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call, logged out, or in wrap-up. 04 05 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 Enable/Disable the queue alarm. ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 0 ACD Call Waiting Alarm Set the time the Call Waiting Alarm should sound. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 465 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 466 Program 41 : ACD Setup Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel Level: IN Description Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel Service. Program Input Data Item No. Item 01 Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) 0 = MOH (Hold Time) 1 = VRS Message 2 = VRS Message + Time 0 02 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0 = No Setting 0 VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above. Input Data Default 03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 = No Transfer 1 = Transfer to the Operator 0 04 Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) 0 = Confirmation Tone 1 = VRS Message 2 = VRS Message + Time 0 05 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0 = No Setting 0 42 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel/Motel SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 467 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel extensions. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Up to eight digits Item Hotel Mode If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/ Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone to operate in the business mode, enter 0. 02 Toll Restriction Class When Check In Input Data Default 0 = Normal 1 = Hotel 0 1~15 1 Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes (1~15). The entry you make in this option affects the telephone in all Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05 and 21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing options.) When the extension is checked out, it uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program 21-04. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 468 Hotel/Motel Program 42 : Hotel Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) Level: IN Description Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06 ~ 20-14. Input Data Class of Service Number 01~15 Default Item No. Item Input Data Class 01 Class 02~15 01 Check-In Operation 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 02 Check-Out Operation 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 03 Room Status Output 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 06 Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 07 Restriction Class Changing for Other Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 08 Room to Room Call Restriction 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 09 DND Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 469 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Default Item No. Item Input Data Class 01 Class 02~15 10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 11 Change Room Status for Own Extension 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 12 SLT Room Monitor 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 Enable (1)/Disable (0) a single line telephone ability to use Room Monitor. 13 PMS Restriction Level Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 470 Class of Service Hotel/Motel Program 42 : Hotel Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes Level: IN Description Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (1~64), you enter the destination for each single digit code (1~9, 0, , #). The destination can be any code with up to four digits, such as an extension number or access code. Input Data Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64 Item No. Received Dial Destination Number Default 01 1~9,0,,# Up to eight digits No Setting Conditions The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing. Feature Cross Reference Hotel/Motel SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 471 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer Level: IN Description Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the CTA port to output the Hotel Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/ Motel feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 1 = CTA 3 = LAN 02 Output Destination Number Up to eight digits (Extension number which CTA/CTU is equipped) 03 Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0 = Not Output 1 = Output 0 04 Check-Out Sheet 0 = Not Output 1 = Output 0 0 No Setting Conditions Room Status Reports output via a CTA or CTU adapter require a DTH terminal and a compatible external device. Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port , or when using DTH terminals, a CTA or CTU adapter and a compatible external device. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 472 Hotel/Motel Program 42 : Hotel Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-06 : PMS Service Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when using PMS-U10 and PMS feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 PMS Port Number 0~65535 02 3:00 AM Auto Room Scan 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Set maid required status for all checked-in rooms At 3:00 AM. 5129 03 CheckIn Message Type 0 = Off 1 = On 0 04 CheckOut Auto Status Change 0 = Off 1 = On 0 05 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Timing 1~128 (sec) 10 06 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Count 0~20 (times) 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel/Motel SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 473 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table Level: IN Description Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the default Toll Restriction class on check in for a room (PRG 42-02-02). Input Data Restriction Level Item No. 01 Item PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 0~3 Input Data 1~15 Default Level 0 = 10 Level 1 = 11 Level 2 = 12 Level 3 = 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 474 Hotel/Motel Program 42 : Hotel Setup Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route Level: IN Description Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the ARS/F-Route feature. Program Input Data Item No. 01 Item ARS/F-Route Time Schedule If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call. Input Data Default 0 = Not Used 1 = Used 0 44 If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to Program 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in Program 44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Uniform Numbering Network SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 475 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Level: IN Description Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route. Input Data Dial Analysis Table Number Item No. 01 Item Dial Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing. 02 Service Type Service Type 1 (Extension Number) The number goes to an extension after deleting the front digit(s). Additional Data Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage. At least one digit must be deleted. 1~120 Input Data Default Up to eight digits (Use line key 1 for a Don’t Care digit, @) No Setting 0 = No setting (None) 1 = Extension Call (Own) 2 = ARS/F-Route Table (F-Route) 3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table (Option) 0 Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route) The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route table. Additional Data: If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number for Program 44-05. If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used, assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for Program 44-04. Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table) The total length of the number exceeds more than 8 digits. Additional Data: Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table number to be used in Program 44-03. 2 - 476 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 03 Item Additional Data For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the additional data required. 1: Delete Digit = 0~255 (255 = Delete All Digits) 2: [Program 44-01 : 0] ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0~500 (0 = No Setting) Refer to Program 44-05. [Program 44-01 : 1] Input Data Default 1 = Delete Digit = 0~255 (255 : Delete All Digits) 2 = 0~500 (0 = No Setting) 3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0~4 (0 = No Setting) 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0~500 (0 = No Setting) Refer to Program 44-04. 04 3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0~4 (0 = No Setting) Refer to Program 44-03. Dial Tone Simulation Enable to send dial tone to the calling party after the routing is determined. This may be required if the central office at the destination does not send dial tone. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 477 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table Level: IN Description When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1~250, table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension Table Area (1~4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in tables 1~250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used. Input Data Extension Table Area Number 1~4 Dial Analysis Table Number 1~252 Dial Analysis Table Number : 1~250 Item No. 2 - 478 Item Input Data 01 Dial Up to 24 digits Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @ (Press Line Key 1 for wild character @) 02 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked. With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked. Default No Setting 0 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Dial Analysis Table Number : 251 Item No. Item 03 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number Input Data 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked. With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked. Default 0 Dial Analysis Table Number : 252 Item No. 04 Item Next Table Area Number Input Data 0~4 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 479 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule Level: IN Description Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/ F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access. Input Data ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1~500 Item No. ARS/F-Route Time Mode ARS/F-Route Table Number Default 01 1~8 0~500 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 480 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table Level: IN Description Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone. Input Data ARS/F-Route Table Number 1~500 Priority Number 1~4 Item No. 01 Item Trunk Group Number Select the trunk group number to use for the outgoing ARS call. 02 Delete Digits Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number. 03 Additional Dial Number Table Input Data Default 0~100, 255 0 = No Setting 255 = Extension Call 0 0~255 (255 = Delete All) 0 0~1000 0 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0~500 0 = No Setting 0 0~500 0 = No Setting 0 0~16 0 Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed. 04 Beep Tone Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used to dial out. 05 Gain Table Number for Internal Calls Select the gain table number to use for the internal call (defined in Program 44-07). 06 Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections Select the gain table number to use for the tandem call (defined in Program 44-07). 07 ARS Class of Service Select the ARS Class of Service to use for the table. An extension ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 481 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 08 Item Dial Treatment Input Data Default 0~15 0 0~24 0 0~16367 0 0~16 0 Select the Dial Treatment to use for the table. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead. 09 Maximum Digit Input the maximum number of digits to send when using the F-Route. 10 CCIS over IP Destination Point Code Input the Destination Point Code to send when using this F-Route. 11 Network Specified Parameter Table Enter a table number from Program 26-12. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 482 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-06 : Additional Dial Table Level: IN Description Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03. Input Data Additional Dial Table Number Item No. 01 1~1000 Additional Dial Up to 24 digits Enter: 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause) Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 483 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Level: IN Description Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number: The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated. The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings. If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route: The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated. The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line. For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated. Input Data Gain Table Number Item No. 2 - 484 Item 1~500 Input Data Default 01 Incoming Transmit 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) 02 Incoming Receive 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) 03 Outgoing Transmit 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) 04 Outgoing Receive 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 485 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: IN Description Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings. Input Data Schedule Pattern Number 01~10 Item No. Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 01~20 0000~2359 0000~2359 1~8 Default All Schedule Patterns : 0:00 – 0:00, Mode 1 Example: Pattern 1 0:00 8:00 18:00 22:00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Time Number 01 : 00:00 – 08:00 Time Number 02 : 08:00 – 18:00 Time Number 03 : 18:00 – 22:00 Time Number 04 : 22:00 – 00:00 0:00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Pattern 2 0:00 0:00 Mode 2 Time Number 01 : 0:00 – 0:00 Mode 2 2 - 486 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 487 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: IN Description Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01. Input Data Item No. 01 Day Number Schedule Pattern Number Default 1 = Sunday 1~10 Pattern 1 2 = Monday 1~10 Pattern 1 3 = Tuesday 1~10 Pattern 1 4 = Wednesday 1~10 Pattern 1 5 = Thursday 1~10 Pattern 1 6 = Friday 1~10 Pattern 1 7 = Saturday 1~10 Pattern 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 488 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: IN Description Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01. Input Data Item No. Date 01 0101~1231 Schedule Pattern Number 0~10 0 = No Setting Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection (ARS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 489 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 490 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options Level: IN Description Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options. Program Input Data Item No. 01 Item Voice Mail Department Group Number Assign Extension (Department) Group number as the voice mail group. 02 Voice Mail Master Name Input Data 0~64 0 = No Voice Mail Up to 12 Characters Enter the Voice Mail Master Name. 03 Voice Mail Call Screening Enable/Disable the ability to process the Call Screening commands (1+ extension number) sent from the Voice Mail. You should normally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your system has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.). 04 Park and Page Enable/Disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Park and Page () commands. You should normally enable this option. 05 Message Wait Enable/Disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings don’t contain the code for trunk access. 06 Record Alert Tone Interval Time Default 0 45 VOICE MAIL 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0~64800 (sec) 30 Set the time between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 491 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 07 Item Centralized Voice Mail Pilot Number Assign this number the same as the extension number or pilot number. 08 Centralized Voice Mail Department Group Number Input Data Dial (up to eight digits) 0~64 Default No Setting 0 Assign which Extension (Department) Group Number is used as the Centralized Voice Mail group. 09 Centralized Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 characters “C.V.M.” Assign the Centralized Voice Mail Master Name. 10 New NSL Protocol support 0 = Off 1 = On 0 11 Prefix for Call Screening Dial (One digit) 1 12 Prefix for Park and Page Dial (One digit) 13 Prefix for Message Wait Dial (One digit) # 14 CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number Dial (up to eight digits) No Setting Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice Mail over CCIS Link. This is assigned only in the remote switches. 15 Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection Assign whether fixed codes or the codes used in PRG 45-04 are used for analog voice mail protocol. 16 Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment 0: Fixed 1: Program Up to four digits 0 None Assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded. 17 Reply Mailbox Number Select whether or not to include the mailbox number in the analog voice mail protocol. 18 Trunk Number Mapping 0: No 1: Yes 1 2~3 2 Assign the digits of trunk number mapping. 2 - 492 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration (Analog) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 493 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-02 : NSL Option Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD message 0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port 1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port 1 03 Send 51A Message 0 = Off 1 = On 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 494 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Remote Logon (Internal) Up to four digits None 02 Direct Logon Up to four digits None 03 Transfer Message Up to four digits None 04 Forward-All Up to four digits None 05 Forward-Busy Up to four digits None 06 Forward RNA Up to four digits None 07 Remote Logon Up to four digits None 08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits None 09 Clear Down String Up to four digits None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 495 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Level: IN Description Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when PRG 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is set to Program. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Remote Log-On Internal 0 = Off 1 = On 0 02 Direct Log-On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 03 Transfer Message/QVM 0 = Off 1 = On 0 04 Forward-All 0 = Off 1 = On 0 05 Forward-Busy 0 = Off 1 = On 0 06 Forward RNA 0 = Off 1 = On 0 07 Remote Log-On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 08 Conversation Recording 0 = Off 1 = On 0 09 Clear Down String 0 = Off 1 = On 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 496 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration Program 47 : In-Mail 47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options Level: IN Description Use Program 47-01 : SV8100 InMail System Options to set up the SV8100 InMail system-wide options. Program Input Data Item No. 02 Item SV8100 InMail Master Name (MasterName) The CD-CP00-US must be reset for a change to this program to take effect. Modify the name for all UNIVERGE SV8100 VM8000 InMail ports. The system briefly displays this name when a display multiline terminal user calls a Voice Mail port (either by pressing Message, their voice mail key, or by dialing the master number). You should always end the name with the ## characters. The system substitutes the port number for the last #. Using the default name InMail ##, for example, the telephone display shows VM8000 InMail #1 when calling port 1. SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Up to 12 characters Default InMail ## 47 (The system substitutes the port number for the # when calling the port). 2 - 497 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 03 Item Subscriber Message Length Input Data Default 1~4095 (sec) 120 1~4095 (sec) 120 (Subs Msg Length) Set the maximum length of recorded messages for: Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message. Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO command and then dialing RS to record and send a message. Subscriber Mailbox Greetings. Announcement Messages. Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus. 04 The length of a Conversation Record is 10 times the Subscriber Message Length. Since the Conversation Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in Subscriber Message Length larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded conversations. Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length) Set the maximum length of recorded messages for: 2 - 498 Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox. Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 05 Item Message Backup/Go Ahead Time Input Data Default 5 1~60 (sec) (Msg Bkup/Adv Time) Set the backup/go ahead time. This time sets how far SV8100 InMail backs up when a user dials B while listening to a message. This interval also sets how far SV8100 InMail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening to a message. 07 Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager CBack) Set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number. Normally, this option should be XM#, where: X is the number of the extension that generated the notification. is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read). M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox. # is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect. SV8100 Programming Manual Digits (12 maximum, using 0~9, # and ) XM# M (Number of messages – entered by pressing LK1) X (Extension number – entered by pressing LK2) SV8100 InMail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension that initially received the message. 2 - 499 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 08 Item Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number Input Data 0~99 (sec) Default 30 (Pager Dial Delay) Set the delay that occurs just before SV8100 InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number. Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this option. When placing a digital pager notification, the system: Seizes the trunk specified. Dials the user-entered notification number (in Message + OP + N). Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number interval. Dials the number entered in 47-01-07: Digital Pager Callback Number. The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure. This means that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after trunk seizure. 2 - 500 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 09 Item Wait Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts Input Data Default 1~255 (min) 15 1~255 (min) 20 1~255 (min) 15 (Notify Pager Intvl) Set the minimum time between unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber acknowledges a digital pager notification by logging onto their mailbox.) After this time expires, SV8100 InMail tries the callout again (for up to the number of times set in 47-0114: Number of Callout Attempts). If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy, it retries the number in one minute. 10 Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify N-Pgr Intvl) Set the minimum time between non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code. 11 Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify Busy Intvl) Set the time SV8100 InMail waits after it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 501 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item 12 Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts Input Data Default 1~255 (min) 30 1~99 (rings) 5 (Notify RNA Intvl) Set the time SV8100 InMail waits, after it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. There are 3 types of unanswered non-pager callouts: 13 If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts option. If the destination answers, says Hello (or the system detects answer supervision) and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the callout, or if the callout is picked up by an answering machine. If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying Hello. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the callout (like the above example), or if the call is picked up by an answering machine with insufficient outgoing message volume. Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Rings) If a non-pager callout rings the destination longer than this number of rings, SV8100 InMail marks the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer) and hangs up. 2 - 502 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 14 Item Number of Callout Attempts Input Data Default 1~99 (attempts) 5 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled) 0 0 = 1st Last 1 = Last 1st 0 (Notify Call Attmpt) Set how many attempts SV8100 InMail retries an incomplete Message Notification callout. This total includes unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered destination. This option applies to pager and non-pager callouts. 15 Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged (Retry Until Ack) When this option is set to 1, SV8100 InMail continues to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If this option is disabled (0), SV8100 InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47-01-14 Number of Callout Attempts. This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers. A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the mailbox. 16 Name Format Specify if names are displayed in First Last format or Last First. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 503 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 17 Item InMail Port Specify the port number of the first InMail Port. With software version v1.11 or higher the following rules apply when programming VM8000. InMail ports in program 47-01-17 on a system that has the basic 64 port license: Input Data Default 0~497 The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports: 1, 5, 9, 12, 16, ......237, 241, 245, 249 and uses the first port assigned + next three consecutive ports. 0 When a PZ-ME50-US is NOT mounted to CD-CP00-US: The first port of VM800 InMail must be assigned to port 57 or lower. The number of licensed VM8000 InMail ports do not take away from the 64 port license. There can still be a combination of 64 trunks, TDM phones and IP phones. When a PZ-ME50-US is mounted to CD-CP00-US: The first port of VM8000 InMail can be assigned above port 64. 18 Play PAD Control 1~63 (-15dBm~ +15dBm) 32 19 Record PAD Control (for Networking) 1~63 (-15dBm~ +15dBm) 32 Conditions When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take affect. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 504 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-02 : SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1~26 should correspond to extensions 101~126. Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or Master. You can also set up Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes. Input Data Station Mailbox Number 1~512 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Mailbox Type 0 = None Enable/Disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is not accessible when it is disabled (even though its stored messages and configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a user pressing Message initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their mailbox number. A voice prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not exist.” 1 = Personal Default 1 2 = Group To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 101. 02 Mailbox Number Digits (8 maximum, Mailbox 1 = 101 Select the extension number associated with the mailbox you are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102, etc. using 0~9) Mailboxes 2~64 = 102~164 Mailboxes 65~512 = No entry To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 101. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 505 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 03 04 Item 06 2 - 506 Default Number of Messages 0~99 messages 99 for mailbox 1 Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear: “That mailbox is full.” SV8100 InMail then hangs up. To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes. 20 for all other mailboxes Message Playback Order 0 = FIFO (first-in/ first-out, or oldest messages first). Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, SV8100 InMail can play the oldest messages first , or the newest messages first. 05 Input Data 0 1 = LIFO ( last-in/ first-out, or newest messages first) 1 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 = Erase Determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, SV8100 InMail either automatically saves or erases the message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, SV8100 InMail retains the message as a new message. After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, SV8100 InMail erases the message. Message Retention 1~99 Days Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, SV8100 InMail deletes it. 0 = Indefinite 1 = Save After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, SV8100 InMail saves the message. 0 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 07 Item Input Data Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disable) (Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enable) Default 1 Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while SV8100 InMail records the conversation: Recording (followed by a beep) That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached) You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long) The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system software provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0~64800 seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option. 08 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disable) (Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enable) 1 Enable/Disable Message Waiting lamps at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, enable this option. For Guest Mailboxes, disable this option. 09 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 = No (Disable) (Auto-ATT DND) 1 = Yes (Enable) 0 Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A subscriber also can enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting. 10 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disable) (Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enable) 0 Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 507 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 11 Item Input Data Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disable) Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message SV8100 InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender (if known). 1 = Yes (Enable) Default 0 A subscriber also can enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox. 12 13 14 System Administrator 0 = No (Disable) Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto their mailbox. 1 = Yes (Enable) Dialing Option 0 = No (Disable) Provide additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action). 1 = Yes (Enable) Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Number (1~3 digits, 01~032) (Next CR Mbox) Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options. 15 Directory List Number Mailbox 1 (101)=1 Other mailboxes=0 0 No entry (Entered by pressing CLEAR) 1 (Call Routing Mailbox 01) By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 01~08. 0 0 = None 1~8 = List Number = All 16 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-10 47-02-16 Default Table 1 17 Enable Paging 0 = No (Disable) 0 1 = Yes (Enable) 18 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0 1 = Immediately 19 Telephone User Interface Type 0 = Numeric 0 1 = Mnemonic 20 2 - 508 Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No (Not supported in V2500 or lower) 1 = Yes 0 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 21 Item E-mail Address Input Data Default Up to 48 characters No Setting (Not supported in V2500 or lower) 22 Include Message as Attachment 0 = No (Not supported in V2500 or lower) 1 = Yes 0 Table 2-10 47-02-16 Default Table Item Name 47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language Input Data 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 509 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 510 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-03 : SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01~32). A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing. Input Data Group Mailbox Number 1~32 Item Input Data Item No. 02 Mailbox Number (Mailbox Number) The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master (pilot) number. Select the Department Group master (pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming. 03 Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Set the Group Mailbox type. Digits (eight maximum, using 0~9) No Setting (entered by pressing Hold) 0 = None 1 = Subscriber 2 = Routing Default No Setting 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 511 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Level: IN Description Use 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03: Master Mailbox Type. Input Data Item No. 01 02 Item 04 2 - 512 Default 20 Number of Messages 0~99 messages Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up. To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes. Message Playback Order 0 = FIFO (first-in/ first-out, or oldest messages first). Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the oldest messages first, or the newest messages first. 03 Input Data 0 1 = LIFO (last-in/ first-out, or newest messages first). 1 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 = Erase Determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, VM8000 InMail either automatically saves or erases the message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, VM8000 InMail retains the message as a new message. After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, SV8100 InMail erases the message. Message Retention 1~90 days Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it. 0 (Indefinite) 1 = Save After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, SV8100 InMail saves the message. 0 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 05 Item Input Data Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disable) (Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enable) Default 1 Enable/Disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while SV8100 InMail records the conversation: Recording (followed by a beep) That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached) You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long) The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system software provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0~64800 seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option. 06 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disable) (Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enable) 1 Enable/Disable Message Waiting light at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, enable this option. For Guest Mailboxes, disable this option. 07 08 Auto Attendant Direct to VoiceMail 0 = No (Disable) Enable/Disable Auto Attendant Direct to VM. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM, an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A subscriber also can enable Auto Attendant Direct to VM while recording their mailbox greeting. 1 = Yes (Enable) Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disable) (Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enable) 0 0 Enable/Disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 513 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 09 10 Item Input Data Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disable) Enable/Disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message SV8100 InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender (if known). A subscriber also can enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox. 1 = Yes (Enable) System Administrator 0 = No (Disable) (System Admin) 1 = Yes (Enable) Default 0 0 Designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the options after logging onto their mailbox. 11 12 0 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disable) Provide additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action). 1 = Yes (Enable) Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Number (0~32) (Next CR Mbox) 1 (Call Routing Mailbox 01) Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options. No entry (entered by pressing CLEAR) Directory List Number 0 = None Specify the Directory List number to which the Group Mailbox belongs. 1~8 = List Number 14 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-11 47-06-14 Default Table. 1 15 Enable Paging 0 = No 0 13 By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 01=16. 0 = All 1 = Yes 16 Paging Option 0 0 = RNA 1 = Immediate 17 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0 1 = Mnemonic interface 18 2 - 514 Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No (not supported in V2500 or lower) 1 = Yes 0 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 19 Item E-mail Address Input Data Up to 48 characters. Default No setting (not supported in V2500 or lower) 20 Include Message as Attachment 0 = No (not supported in V2500 or lower) 1 = Yes SV8100 Programming Manual 0 2 - 515 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-11 47-06-14 Default Table Item Name 47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language Input Data 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 516 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-07 : SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number Item No. 02 Item 1~32 Input Data Routing Mailbox Type 0 = None (Mailbox Type) 1 = Call Routing Set the Routing Mailbox type. 2 = Announcement 3 = Directory Default Mailboxes 01~08 = 1 (Call Routing) Mailboxes 09~32 = 2 (Announcement) 4 = Distribution 03 Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-12 47-07-03 Default Table 1 04 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0 1 = Mnemonic interface 2 = Octel (future) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 517 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-12 47-07-03 Default Table Item Name 47-07-03 Voice Prompt Language Input Data 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 518 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number Item No. 01 Item Input Data Default 1~16 (Dial Action Table 1~16) 1 (Dial Action Table 1) Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 (sec) 15 (Scrn Trf Timeout) Entering 0 causes immediate recall. Dial Action Table Assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox. 02 1~32 Set the time a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the Automated Attendant rings an unanswered extension before recalling. This option has a similar function as Customize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in SV8100 InMail. 03 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0~99 (sec) (Dialing Timeout) Entering 0 causes the Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to the Timeout destination programmed in the active Dial Action Table. Determine the time SV8100 InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination. Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action programmed. If the caller waits too long to dial: When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed, the caller routes to that destination. 5 When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then SV8100 InMail hangs up. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 519 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 04 05 Item Input Data Default Fax Detection 0 = No (Disable) 0 Enable/Disable Fax Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox. In enabled, the SV8100 InMail Automated Attendant (when using this Call Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call then routes to the company fax machine according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax Extension. If disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect incoming fax calls. 1 = Yes (Enable) Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 520 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number Item No. 01 Item Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls, provide additional routing options to the Automated Attendant callers. This option interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After below. 1~32 Input Data Default Call Routing Mailbox Number (1~32) 0 0 = Undefined For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail System Guide. 02 Repeat Count 0 (No Repeats) Enter the number of times you want the Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message, it repeats the number of times specified in this option. This option interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing options. 1~10 (Announcement repeats 1~10 times) 0 For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail System Guide. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 521 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 03 Item Input Data Hang Up After 0 = None (HangUp) 1 = Goodbye Along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above, provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant callers. 2 = Silent Default 0 For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail System Guide. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 522 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options Level: IN Description Use 47-10 : SV8100 InMail Trunk Options to assign SV8100 InMail options for each trunk. Currently, only 47-10-01: Answer Table Assignment is available. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. 01 Item Answer Table Assignment 1~200 Input Data Default Answer Table (1~8) 1 (Answer Table) Assign an SV8100 InMail Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the Automated Attendant should answer. The Automated Attendant follows the routing specified by the selected Answer Table. 02 Record PAD Control 1~63 (-15dBm~ +15dBm) 32 03 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-13 47-10-03 Default Table 1 04 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 1 = Mnemonic interface 2 = Octel (future) 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 523 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-13 47-10-03 Default Table Item Name 47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language Input Data 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 524 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options Level: IN Description Use 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. VM8000 InMail provides eight Answer Tables (1~8). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 : SV8100 InMail Answer Table Schedule. Input Data Answer Table Number 1~8 Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Answer Schedule Override 0 = No (Disable) (Schedule Override) 1 = Yes (Enable) Default 0 Enable/Disable Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table. If enabled (and you make an entry for Override Mailbox below), the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 525 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 02 Item Input Data Override Mailbox Category 0 (Undefined) (Override MB Ctg) 1 (Subscriber Mailbox – STA) Specify the category of the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. SV8100 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox. Default 0 2 (Group Mailbox) 3 (Routing Mailbox) SV8100 InMail handles the routing according to the type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement) within the specified category: If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, SV8100 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table. If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection (below). Override Mailbox Number (Override MB Num) Specify the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. The mailbox number you select in this option should match the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02: Override Mailbox Category above. 2 - 526 Digits (three maximum, using 0~9) No Entry Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 03 Item Input Data Default Default Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined) Answer Table 1 = 3 (Default MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox (STA) Answer Table 2~8 =0 Specify the category of mailbox used as the Default Mailbox. SV8100 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox. SV8100 InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect. 2 = Group Mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox SV8100 InMail handles the routing according to the type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement) within the specified category: If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, SV8100 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table. If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection (below). Default Mailbox Number (Default MB Num) Set the Answer Table Default Mailbox number. SV8100 InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect. By default, this occurs at all times other than Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. 04 Digits (Three maximum, using 0~9) Next Answer Table Answer Table (1~8) When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are not sufficient, link two Answer Tables together. SV8100 InMail treats the two linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table. 0 = Undefined SV8100 Programming Manual Answer Table 1 = 1 Answer Table 2~8 = No Entry 0 2 - 527 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 528 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules Level: IN Description Use 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the SV8100 InMail Automated Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Schedule Type 0 = Undefined (Entryxx Schedule Type) Assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule answers calls. The schedule can be one of the following types: 1. Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week. For this type of schedule, you select: The day of the week the schedule should run: The schedule start time. The schedule end time. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer calls. 2. Range of Days A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days. For this type of schedule, you select: The day of the week the schedule should start. The day of the week the schedule should stop. The time on the start day the schedule should start. The time on the stop day the schedule should stop. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls. 1 = Day of the Week 2 = Range of Days 3 = Date Default Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 2 All other schedules = 0 (continued on next page) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 529 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 01 Item (continued from previous page) 02 3. Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the year. For this type of schedule, you select: The specific date the schedule should run. On the selected date, the time the schedule should start. On the selected date, the time the schedule should stop. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls. Input Data Default Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 2 0 = Undefined 1 = Day of the Week All Other Schedules = 0 2 = Range of Days 3 = Date 3 Answering Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined (Entryxx MB Ctg) Specify the category of mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when the schedule is in effect. SV8100 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, or Routing Mailbox. 1 = Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 = Group Mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox SV8100 InMail handles the routing according to the exact type of Subscriber, Master, or Routing Mailbox specified. If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, SV8100 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table. Answering Mailbox Number (Entryxx MB Num) Set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect. This mailbox is defined in 47-12-02: Answering Mailbox Category. 03 Digits (three maximum, using 0~9) Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 1 All Other Answer Schedules = No Entry Day of the Week 1 = Sunday (Entryxx Day) For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer Schedules, select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should be active. 2 = Monday 1 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 2 - 530 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data (Continued) Item No. 04 Item Input Data Default Start Day 1 = Sunday 1 (Entryxx Start Day) For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should start. 2 = Monday Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 2 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday All Other Schedules = 1 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 05 End Day 1 = Sunday (Entryxx End Day) For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should end. 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 6 All Other Answer Schedules = 1 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 06 Date (Entryxx Date) For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, select the date the Answer Schedule should be active. 07 Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time) Specify the time the Answer Schedule should start. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for 47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08: Schedule End Time.) 08 Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time) Specify the time the Answer Schedule should end. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for 47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08: Schedule End Time.) SV8100 Programming Manual MMDD For example: 0101 = January 1 1231 = December 31 0000 = No date set 0000 HHMM (24-hour clock) For example: 0130 = 1:30AM 1700 = 5:00PM Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 0830 (8:30AM) HHMM (24-hour clock) For example: 0130 = 1:30AM 1700 = 5:00PM Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 1700 0000 = Undefined All other schedules are 0000. All Other Schedules = 0000 2 - 531 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Example Type 1 (Day of the Week) Answer Schedule Options Type 1 (Day of Week) Example In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows: Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9:00AM to 10:00AM. At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number. When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order: 2 - 532 Range of Days Day of Week Date Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Type 1 (Day of Week) Example Answer Table 1 Answer Schedule 1 Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM) Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednesday from10:30AM to 5:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 1 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 3 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 4 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1030 (10:30AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM) Answer Schedule 3 Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from9:00AM to 10:00AM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB num = 4 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 3 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0900 (9:00AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1000 (10:00PM) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 533 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Type 2 (Range of Days) Answer Schedule Options Type 2 (Range of Days) Example In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows: Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM. At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number. When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order: 2 - 534 Range of Days Day of Week Date Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Type 2 (Range of Days) Example Answer Table 1 Answer Schedule 1 Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs Sunday through Wednesday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 4 (Wednesday) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM) Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 4 (Wednesday) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 5 (Thursday) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1100 (11:00AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1300 (1:00PM) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 535 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Type 3 (Date) Answer Schedule Options Type 3 (Date) Example In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows: Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number. When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in the following order: Range of Days Day of Week Date Type 3 (Date) Example Answer Table 1 Answer Schedule 1 Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Sunday) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM) Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. 47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3 47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 9 47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter) 47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 1225 (December 25, Christmas day) 47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM) 47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM) 2 - 536 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 537 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-13 : SV8100 InMail Dial Action Tables Level: IN Description Use 47-13 : SV8100 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the SV8100 InMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default SV8100 InMail system. There are 16 Dial Action Tables. DIL to Voice Mail Master (200) 22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup 22-07-01 DIL Setup InMail Default Automated Attendant Answering Trunks Route to Answer Table 1 47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment Answer Table 1 47-11 Answer Table Options Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox 47-12 Answer Schedules All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1 Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM Default Mailbox active all other times 47-11-05 Default Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 1 47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options Dial Action Table 1 47-13 Dial Action Tables 2 - 538 From a System Administrator mailbox, record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for the active Call Routing Mailbox. Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options: Dial an extension number, or O for the operator. Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Dial Action Table Actions TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, SV8100 InMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer can go through. If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes through. If the destination does not answer during a preset interval, is busy, or is in Do Not Disturb, the Automated Attendant does not extend the call. It then provides the caller with additional options. Number Option Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number. For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to reach the extension. For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter TRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number. UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, SV8100 InMail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer. Number Option Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number. For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 539 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to reach the extension. For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter UTRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number. REC1 Action – Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller hears the extension greeting prior to leaving the message. Number Options To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should be the extension number. To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the corresponding Number option should be IXXX. To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter REC1 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. REC2 Action – Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller does not hear the extension greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep. Number Option To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Number option should be the extension number. To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the corresponding Number option should be IXXX. To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter REC2 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. 2 - 540 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON) Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto Voice Mail. Depending on programming (see Number Option below), the caller is logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON option with Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. Number Option To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Number option. For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for key 4 enter LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number. To have SV8100 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a Subscriber Mailbox to log into, enter N in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers. For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox where they want to log into, for key 3 enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When callers dial 3, they hear, Please enter your mailbox number. To have SV8100 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Subscriber Mailbox to log into (without playing an announcement), enter XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers. For example, to allow callers to log onto mailboxes 301~399, for key 3 enter LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding Number option. For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox number to log on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number. Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP) When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, SV8100 InMail says Goodbye and immediately hangs up. Number Option No entry is required in the corresponding Number Option. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 541 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales. Number Option To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Number option. For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 01, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action and 01 for the corresponding Number. To have SV8100 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox number. For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 000~015, for key 0 enter GOTO for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding Number option. For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox number to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number. UND Action – Undefined Routing (0) (UND) Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, That is an invalid entry. The caller can then dial another option. 2 - 542 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Dial Action Table Number Key No. 1 Dial Action Table Action TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) UTRF Action Unscreened Transfer (2) 2 3 REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1) REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON) Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP) GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND) 6 7 8 9 0 # TIMEOUT Additional Data Entry : 0-9, #, and (8 digits max.) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location (such as an extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number. Caller Dialed Digits Ignore Digits Entry : I (Entered by pressing LK3) Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Automated Attendant caller that SV8100 InMail ignores for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned to the * key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a caller can dial * + any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in that mailbox. SV8100 InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes according to the next 3 digits dialed. No Routing Entry : N (Entered by pressing LK1) Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.” Pause (UTRF) 4 5 01~16 SV8100 Programming Manual Digits Entry : X (Entered by pressing LK2) Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents one caller-dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301‘399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. Entry : P (Entered by pressing LK4) Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to pause while dialing. 2 - 543 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Defaults Dial Action Table Default Settings Key Dial Action Table 1 1 UTRF to XXX UND (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed extension) (Undefined) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 # TIMEOUT Dial Action Tables 2~16 UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) UTRF to XXXX UND (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed extension) (Undefined) UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) UND UND (Undefined) (Undefined) HNGUP UND (Hangup) (Undefined) UTRF to 101 UND (Unscreened Transfer to 101) (Undefined) REC1 to IXXX UND (Quick Message with greeting to user-dialed extension) (Undefined) LOGON to IXXX UND (Logon to user-dialed mailbox) (Undefined) UTRF to 101 UND (Unscreened Transfer to 101) (Undefined) TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 544 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4 (Directory). Input Data Master Mailbox Number Item No. 1~32 Item Input Data Default 01 Minimum Number of Letters Required 1~3 1 02 Directory List Number to Use 1~8 1 03 Name Match 0 = First 1 = Last 0 04 Transfer Option 0 = TRF 1 = UTRF 0 05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 15 06 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0~99 5 07 Fax Detection 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 08 Next Call Routing Mailbox 0~32 0 09 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 545 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-16 : InMail Language License Level: IN Description Use 47-16 : InMail Language License to define the language order InMail uses. Depending on the language license number, InMail uses the languages defined starting from Language 1. For example, if the system has a two language license InMail uses the language defined as Language 1 and 2 in the provided default table. Input Data Language Item No. 1~20 Item Input Data Default 01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 01 Language License 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian Refer to Table 2-14 4716-01 Default Table 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 2 - 546 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item Input Data Default 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish Table 2-14 47-16-01 Default Table Language No. 47-16-01 Default Language 1 01 (US English) Language 2 04 (French Canadian) Language 3 06 (Mexican Spanish) Language 4 00 (No entry) Language 5 00 (No entry) Language 6 00 (No entry) Language 7 00 (No entry) Language 8 00 (No entry) Language 9 00 (No entry) Language 10 00 (No entry) Language 11 00 (No entry) Language 12 00 (No entry) Language 13 00 (No entry) Language 14 00 (No entry) Language 15 00 (No entry) Language 16 00 (No entry) Language 17 00 (No entry) Language 18 00 (No entry) Language 19 00 (No entry) Language 20 00 (No entry) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 547 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options Level: IN Description Use 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution). Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 1~32 Entry Number 1~20 Input Data Item No. Item Distribution Mailbox Category Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox Number setting. 01 Input Data 0 = Undefined 1 = Station Mailbox 2 = Group Mailbox Default 0 Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting Mailbox Number to 1~512 (PRG 47-02). Use Group Number (2) for setting Group Mailbox (1~32) (PRG 47-03). Distribution Mailbox Number Up to three digits Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 548 Program 47 : In-Mail UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup Level: IN Description Use 47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification. (Not supported in V2500 or lower) Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 01 SMTP Enabled 0 = No 1 = Yes 02 Server Name Up to 48 characters 03 SMTP Port 0~65535 25 04 Encryption 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 05 Authentication 0 = No 1 = Yes 2 = POP3 0 06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting 08 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters No Setting No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 549 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 47 : In-Mail 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup Level: IN Description Use 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification. (Not supported in V2500 or lower) Item No. Item Input Data Default No Setting 01 Server Name Up to 48 characters 02 POP3 Port 0~65535 110 03 Encryption 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 550 Program 47 : In-Mail Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-01 : CCIS System Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 50-01 : CCIS System Setting to set the availability of CCIS in the UNIVERGE SV8100. No other CCIS settings function if this program is disabled. Input Data Item No. 01 Item CCIS Availability Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Program 50 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 551 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-02 : Connecting System Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 50-02 : Connecting System Settings to define the settings for each CCIS Route ID. Input Data CCIS Route ID Item No. Item Route ID 1~8: CCIS via DTI Route ID 9: CCIS via IAD/CD-PVAA (IP-CCIS) Description Input Data Default 01 Port Number of Common Signaling Channel (T1) Specify the Trunk port to send D-channel information. This program is available for using DTI package. 0~200 0 02 Common Signaling Channel Data Speed Assignment (T1) Assign the baud rate of Common Signaling Channel on DTI package. 0 = 64Kbps 1 = 56Kbps 2 = 48Kbps(1) 3 = 48Kbps(2) 1 03 Originating Point Code Assign the Point Code of own side. 0~16367 0 04 Destination Point Code (T1) Assign the Point Code of destination side on the DTI link. 0~16367 0 05 Calling Name Indication (T1) Calling name indication is not sent to destination party if switch is set to 0. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 06 --- Not Used --- 2 - 552 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions If 56K K-CCIS is used, 24 Multi-Frame (ESF) must be assigned in Program 10-03-02. DPC must be what the OPC is on the opposite side of the link. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 553 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings to assign information of remote systems in a CCIS Network. Input Data CCIS System ID Item No. Item 1~255 Description Input Data Default 01 Destination Point Code Define the Point Code at the Destination Party. 0~16367 0 02 CCIS Route ID (T1 only) Select the CCIS Route ID defined in Program 14-13 when the user tries to access the system in a CCIS network. 0~8 (CCIS Route IDs 5~8 are for future use and should not be used.) 0 03 IP Address (IP only) Assign the IP Address to a CCIS System ID. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx = 0~255) 0.0.0.0 04 Point Code Availability Define if the system associated with Destination Code can be Reached (1) or Not Reached (0). If set to 0, when using the IP-CCIS, that system cannot be called until it is set to 1. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 554 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment to define the Office Code when the CCIS Network is constructed with an Open Numbering Plan. Input Data Item No. 01 Item CCIS Office Code Input Data xxxx (up to four digits) 0~9 Default No Setting Conditions This program is used only in an Open Numbering Plan network. This should include the Trunk Access Code and Office Code number. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 555 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter Level: IN Description Use Program 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter to define the maximum hop counter of call forwarding. Input Data Item Maximum Hop Counter Input Data Default 1~7 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 556 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability Level: IN Description Use Program 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability to define the availability of CCIS features. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 01 Link Reconnect 0 = Not available 1 = Available 1 If this data is set to 0, Link Reconnect does not run. 02 Centralized Day/Night Switching (for message receiver side) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 If this data is turned to 0, Day/Night mode is not changed even if system receives Switching message from center. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 557 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office Level: IN Description Use Program 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office to define the Point Code and CCIS Route ID for the Billing Center Office. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing Center Office. Define the CCIS Route ID to send Billing Center Office. 01 Destination Point Code 02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 03 Billing Message Format 0 = Normal Format 1 = Expand Format 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 558 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment to define the destination of BLF for the sending system. Eight sending systems can be registered in this program. Input Data BLF Sending Group Item No. 1~8 Item 01 Destination Point Code 02 CCIS Route ID Input Data Default Description 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing Center Office. 0~8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send Billing Center Office. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 559 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment to define the extension number for sending BLF messages. One extension number can have a sending switch for each sending group, which is defined in Program 50-08. Input Data Entry Item No. 2 - 560 1~120 Item Input Data Default Description 01 Extension Number xxxxxxxx (up to eight digits) No Setting Extension number. BLF message is indicated when the status of the specified extension number is changed. 02 Send to Sending Group 1 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 1 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 03 Send to Sending Group 2 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 2 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 04 Send to Sending Group 3 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 3 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 05 Send to Sending Group 4 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 4 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 06 Send to Sending Group 5 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 5 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item Input Data Default Description 07 Send to Sending Group 6 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 6 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 08 Send to Sending Group 7 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 7 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. 09 Send to Sending Group 8 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Enable/Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 8 assigned in PRG 50-08-XX. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 561 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment to define the time to send BLF messages. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Type of Interval Time Define the time to send BLF messages. Input Data 0 = 4 seconds 1 = 8 seconds 2 = 12 seconds 3 = 16 seconds Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 562 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment to define Point Code and CCIS Route ID for sending Day/Night Switching message. Input Data Day/Night Mode Sending Group 1~16 Input Data Item No. Item 01 Destination Point Code 02 CCIS Route ID Input Data Default Description 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code for Day/Night Switching. 0~8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send Day/ Night Switching messages. (T1 only) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 563 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment to define corresponding night mode to switch to when Day/Night mode switching message arrives. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Day Mode 1~8 1 02 Night Mode 1~8 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 564 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment Level: IN Description Use Program 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment to define the response timeout value. Input Data Item No. 01 Item IAI Response Timer Input Data 0~99 Default 30 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 565 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return Level: IN Description Use Program 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return to eliminate the 9 on Caller ID redial except for 7- and 8-digit extensions. Input Data Item No. 01 Item CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return Input Data 0~24 (0 = Ignore setting) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 566 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting to set the basic parameters for CCIS over IP. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Connection Method 0 = Peer to Peer disable 1 = Peer to Peer enable 02 TCP Server Port Number 0~65535 57000 03 TCP Client Base Port Number 0~65535 59000 04 Connection Method for Terminal 0 = Peer to Peer disable 1 = Peer to Peer enable 1 1 Choose the connection method for the DT700 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 567 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 568 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting to define the parameters of the NetLink feature. Program Each system must be set with its own information. When the NetLink System ID is changed (Item 01), the system must be reset. Input Data Item No. 01 Item NetLink System ID This is the ID of each NetLink system. Setting should insure that no overlap occurs between nodes. 02 Primary Candidate Order Input Data 51 Default 0~50 (0 = No operation) 0 1~50 30 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 When the Primary system is turned off or disconnected from network, this value is used to select a new Primary system. Smaller number is higher priority. If this value is the same number, the System ID (PRG51-01-01) is referred, and the system which has the smaller number is selected as Primary system. 03 Secondary System Flag 0: NetLink is dynamically established based on Node List in PRG51-03-01. Primary System is selected in the order which the system wakes up. 1: The system connects with Top Priority Primary System. If Top Priority Primary System was not found, the system searches Primary System like this setting is 0. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 569 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 570 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting to set system data for each NetLink system. Program 51-02-03 is not used in US, but is used in other countries. Input Data System ID Item No. 01 Item System Name 1~50 Input Data Default Up to 20 characters. blank Enter the name given to each system. 02 Time Zone (Hour) 0~24 12 Determine the time offset from the Primary system. (0 = -12, 1 = -11, 2 = -10.... 12 = 0 13 = +1, 14 = +2, 24 = +12) This setting affects Time Display on MLT (see 51-13-02). 03 --- Not Used --- 04 Authenticate System MAC Address To use this function, set PRG 51-13-03 to 1 (enable), NetLink systems reject the connection from unauthenticated system access. SV8100 Programming Manual 00-00-00-00-00-00~ FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00-00-00-00-00-00 2 - 571 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 572 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting to set the IP address of the NetLink system. Input Data List ID Item No. 01 1~50 Item Internet Protocol Address List The system seeks the Primary system based on this list. Input Data Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail-Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish new link. This setting is necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than 0. Once the system connects to the Primary System, this setting is updated by the Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is On. So, enter IP address of the systems that may become Primary at least. Conditions When there is no Primary System yet, or Fail Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish new link. This setting is necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than 0. Once the system connects to the Primary System, this setting is updated by the Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is on. So, enter IP address of the systems that may become Primary at least. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 573 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink Level: IN Description Use Program 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink to set the IP address of the new Primary System. Input Data List ID Item No. 01 1~50 Item Internet Protocol Address of Top Priority Primary Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary System. Input Data Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 To use this feature, set PRG 51-06-01 to 1. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 574 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings to set the various timers in the NetLink system. Item No. 01 Item Keep Alive Sending Interval Input Data Default 1~3600 (sec) 5 0, 5~10800 (sec) (0 = infinity) 20 1~3600 (sec) 5 5~10800 (sec) 20 1~3600 (sec) 10 1~10800 (sec) 30 20~3600 (sec) 40 Set the Keep Alive sending interval time from the Secondary system to confirm communication with the Primary system. 02 Keep Alive Response Waiting Time Set the time the Secondary system waits for a response from the Primary system before cutting off communication. 03 Primary Search Packet Sending Interval While searching the Primary system, the system sends a packet at this interval. 04 Primary Search Time Maximum Value Total Primary system seek time. 05 Top Priority Primary Detection Packet Sending Interval When current Primary system is not Top Priority Primary System, the system sends packet to check if Top Priority System exists. 06 Primary Compulsion Specification Trial Maximum Time When the forced change Primary command is executed, the system searches the new Primary system for this time. 07 Socket Refresh Time If the IP connection becomes unstable, the keep-alive function does not work. If there is no data traffic for this time, the socket is refreshed. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 575 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 576 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting to set the automatic integration of the Primary system. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Primary Integration Right or Wrong When LAN cable was divided, multiple Primary systems may appear. If the LAN connection is recovered, multiple Net-Links exist in the network. When this option is enabling, NetLink is composed around Top priority Primary System. 02 Package Reset Timing Option When Primary System Automatic Integration is done, all packages of secondary systems reset. Select the timing of package reset. Input Data Default 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Reset when all packages are idle. 1 = Anytime 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 577 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting to set compulsion specification of the Primary system. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Forced Change Primary System Enabling Set whether or not the Forced Change Primary is available. 02 Package Reset Timing Option When Forced Change Primary System is done, all packages reset. Select the package reset timing. Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 0 = On 1 = Off 0 0 = Reset when all packages are idle, otherwise reject Primary System Integration. 1 = Anytime Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 578 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting to set the IP address and system ID of the compulsory specification of the Primary system. (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Input Data Item No. 01 Item IP Address of New Primary System Enter target IP address for New Primary system. When the Forced Change Primary system is done, this setting is erased. 02 System ID of New Primary System When set to 0, top priority Primary system is assumed to be the new Primary system. Input Data Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 0~50 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 579 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings to set the various communication ports used on the system. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Primary Waiting Port Input Data Default 0~65535 58000 0~65535 58001 0~65535 0 0~65535 0 0~65535 0 0~65535 58002 Set the communication port that the Primary system uses to communicate with the Secondary system. 02 Communication Waiting Port Select port used to communicate between nodes. It is always opened by all nodes. 03 Secondary Communication Port Secondary system communicates with Primary system at this port number. If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected. 04 Primary Search Port When Fail-Over occurs, each system communicates with other system at this port number. If 0 is set, temporary port is dynamically selected. If 0 is not specified, the number and continuous maximum 50 number is used. (Ex. 5000 is specified 5001, 5002…5049 are used). 05 Primary Detection Port Enter port number to seek the Top Priority Primary system. If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected. 06 Database Replication Communication Listening Port Use this port to replicate database. 2 - 580 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item 07 Database Replication Primary Detection Port Use Input Data 0~65535 Default 0 Use this port to replicate database. If 0 is specified, temporary port is dynamically selected. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 581 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-10: Virtual Slot Setting to view the number of Virtual slots that are remaining in a NetLink network. There can be up to 240 virtual slots available in NetLink. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Default Number of Available Virtual Slots 240 slots can be controlled in NetLink. This command can check how many slots are available. Conditions This Program is Read Only. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 582 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-11 : NetLink System Information Level: IN Description Use Program 51-11: NetLink System Information to reference information about other systems in the NetLink network. Input Data System ID Item No. 1~50 Item Input Data Default 01 System Name For reference only. blank 02 Connected State For reference only. 0 03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000 04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00 05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0 06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX Conditions This Program is Read Only. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 583 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-12 : Primary System Information Level: IN Description Use Program 51-12: Primary System Information to reference information about the Primary System in the NetLink network. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 System ID For reference only. 0 02 System Name For reference only. blank 03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000 04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00 05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0 06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX Conditions This Program is Read Only. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 584 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-13 : NetLink Options Level: IN Description Use Program 51-13: NetLink Options to enable automatic IP address List Operation updates, time zone information, and MAC address authorization. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Automatic IP Address List Operation Update When set to 1, the list in PRG51-03-01 is automatically updated. 02 Time Zone Option When set to 0, the following features are affected: Clock Display, Incoming/Outgoing History List. Input Data Default 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 1 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 When set to 1, the following features are affected: VRS Time Announce, Date and Time Setting Service Code, Alarm Clock setting, and Hotel mode wake-up call. 03 MAC Address Authorization Enable Refers to PRG 51-02-04 for setting MAC address. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 585 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-14 : NetLink System Control Level: IN Description Use Program 51-14: NetLink System Control to delete system and slot information. (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Input Data Item No. 01 System ID 1~50 Menu Number 1 = System information deletion Item Delete System Information Input Data Default 1~50 1 Delete system information and the slot information. The system must be disconnected. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 586 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-15 : Demonstration Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-15: Demonstration Setting to automatically set the minimum setting values in NetLink. A system reset occurs after this command is executed. (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Input Data Menu Number 1 = Primary automatic setting 2 = Secondary 1 - automatic operation setting 3 = Secondary 2 - automatic operation setting 4 = Secondary 3 - automatic operation setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 587 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 51 : NetLink Service 51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 51-16: NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting to set the system data replication between the Primary and Secondary systems. Input Data Item No. 01 Item System Data Replication Mode Set the synchronous mode of the system data. When set to 1, the systems are synchronized at the time set in Item 02 below. Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Setting Time Mode 2 = Interval Mode Default 1 When set to 2, the systems are synchronized at regular time intervals set in Item 03 below. 02 System Data Replication Time Setting 0000~2359 0200 Set the time of day that both systems synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 1.) 03 System Data Replication Interval Setting 15~1440 (minutes) 30 (min) Set the time interval that both systems synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 2). 04 05 Month: 0~12 – Replication Time Stamp Day: 0~31 – Show next replication time. (Read-Only) Hour: 00~23 – Minute: 00~59 – System Data Replication Wait Time 1~86400 (seconds) 180 sec 0~86400 (seconds) 1 sec Set the wait time until replication starts when NetLink is created. 06 System Data Replication Interval Set the time to start replication to the next node after replication to one node is completed. 2 - 588 Program 51 : NetLink Service UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 589 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 590 Program 51 : NetLink Service Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones. Program Input Data Service Tone Number Item No. 01 01~64 Item Repeat Count Input Data 0~255 (0 = until On-Hook) Unit Number 1~8 Item No. Item 02 Basic Tone Number 1~33 (0 = No Tone) (33 = Default Time Slot) 03 Duration Count 1~255 (100~25500ms) 04 Gain Level (dB) 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5) SV8100 Programming Manual 80 Input Data 2 - 591 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-15 Basic Tones Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) 01 400 - 13 17 520 / 650 -13 / -19 02 520 -13 18 650 / 780 -13 / -19 03 580 -13 19 780 / 1040 -13 / -19 04 660 -13 20 1040 -13 05 700 -13 21 450 -13 06 800 -13 22 950 -13 07 880 -13 23 1080 -13 08 1050 -13 24 400/450 -13/-13 09 350 / 440 -16 / -16 25 -- Reserve -- - 10 440 / 480 -16 / -16 26 -- Reserve -- - 11 480 / 620 -21 / -21 27 -- Reserve -- - 12 440 -16 28 -- Reserve -- - 13 -- Reserve -- - 29 -- Reserve -- - 14 520 / 650 -19 / -13 30 -- Reserve -- - 15 650 / 780 -19 / -13 31 -- Reserve -- - 16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13 32 -- Reserve -- - Default Service Tone No. 2 - 592 Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No. Duration Gain Level (dB) 1 No Tone 0 Basic 1 0 10 32 (0dB) 2 Internal Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB) 3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 Basic 6 0 9 0 9 0 9 2 1 1 1 1 77 32 (0dB) 4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 2 Basic 2 9 0 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 10 32 (0dB) Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No. Duration Gain Level (dB) 6 Internal Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 11 5 5 20 (-6dB) 20 (-6dB) 7 DND Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 2 2 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 8 B-Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 11 5 5 20 (-6dB) 20 (-6dB) 9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 11 0 3 2 20 (-6dB) 20 (-6dB) 10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 6 5 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB) 13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB) 14 Intercom Ringback Tone 0 Basic 2 9 0 10 20 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 15 Override Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB) 16 Lock-out Tone 0 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 17 Clock Alarm Tone 0 Basic 4 6 0 6 0 1 1 1 7 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 18 BGM 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB) 19 Door Box Chime 1 3 Basic 6 4 4 2 2 2 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) 20 Door Box Chime 2 3 Basic 6 7 7 5 5 5 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) 21 Door Box Chime 3 3 Basic 6 8 8 6 6 6 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 593 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Duration Gain Level (dB) 22 Door Box Chime 4 3 Basic 6 4 4 2 2 2 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) 23 Door Box Chime 5 3 Basic 6 7 7 5 5 5 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) 24 Door Box Chime 6 3 Basic 6 8 8 6 6 6 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 38 (+3dB) 26 (-3dB) 14 (-9dB) 32 (0dB) 25 Service Set Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 26 Service Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) The originator hears this tone when placing a handsfree speaker ICM call. 2 - 594 Basic Tone No. 29 Door Relay Tone 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 30 Door Box Call Tone 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 31 Paging Tone 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 Splash Tone 1 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 33 Splash Tone 2 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 34 Splash Tone 3 3 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 35 1-Second Signal Tone 1 Basic 1 6 10 32 (0dB) 36 External Audible Ring Tone 0 Basic 2 7 0 2 2 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No. Duration Gain Level (dB) 37 External Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 7 0 5 5 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 38 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 7 0 7 7 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 0 Basic 6 0 11 0 11 10 0 5 5 5 5 10 20 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 Basic 1 12 2 32 (0dB) 41 Intrusion Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 (0dB) 42 Conference Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 (0dB) 43 Intrusion Tone 2 0 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB) 44 External Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 1 26 (-3dB) 45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 0 10 30 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 46 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 11 0 5 5 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 47 Number Unobtainable Tone 0 Basic 1 11 0 32 (0dB) 48 Voice Mail Message Indication Tone 0 Basic 2 9 0 1 1 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 49 --- Not Used --- 50 External Special Audible Ring Tone 0 3 10 12 0 10 2 30 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 51 External Intercept Tone 0 2 12 4 3 2 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 52 External Call Waiting Tone 1 1 12 3 32 (0dB) 53 External Executive Override Tone 1 1 12 10 32 (0dB) 54 --- Not Used --- 55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 Basic 1 3 0 32 (0dB) 56 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1 Basic 1 2 8 32 (0dB) 57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing Tone 0 Basic 5 0 2 0 2 0 2 1 1 1 20 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 595 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No. Duration Gain Level (dB) 58 Opening Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 2 2 14 14 15 15 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 59 Ending Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 32 (0dB) 26 (-3dB) 60 Splash Tone 1 (Mute) 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 (-12dB) 8 (-12dB) 61 Splash Tone 2 (Mute) 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 (-12dB) 8 (-12dB) 62 Splash Tone 3 (Mute) 3 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 (-12dB) 8 (-12dB) 63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 0 10 30 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 11 2 35 (+1.5dB) 0 3 32 (0dB) 11 2 35 (+1.5dB) 0 12 32 (0dB) 64 Special Hold Tone 0 4 Conditions The system must be reset for any change to these items to take affect. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 596 Selectable Ring Tones Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Duration 1~255 5 (100ms) 02 Pause 1~255 5 (100ms) 03 Tone Level (Low) (dB) 1~97 65 (-13dB) -45 : +3 04 Tone Level (High) 1~97 69 (-11dB) -45 : +3 Duration Pause SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 597 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 598 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver. DTMF Tone Receiver Type: 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk 3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk 4, 5 = Reserved Input Data DTMF Tone Receiver Type No. Item No Item 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk 3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk 4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved --- Input Data 01 Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm 3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm 4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm 5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm 6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm 02 Start Delay Time 0~255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 599 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No 2 - 600 Item Input Data 03 Min. Detect Level 0~15 Detect Level 0 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Detect Level 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Detect Level 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15) Detect Level 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15) Detect Level 4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15) Detect Level 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15) Detect Level 6 : -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15) Detect Level 7 : -45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15) Detect Level 8 : -50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15) Detect Level 9 : -55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15) Detect Level 10 : -60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15) Detect Level 11 : -65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15) Detect Level 12 : -70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15) Detect Level 13 : -75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15) Detect Level 14 : -80dBm(0) to - 95dBm(15) Detect Level 15 : -85dBm(0) to -100dBm(15) 04 Max. Detect Level 0~15 Detect Level 0 : 0dBm(0) to -15dBm(15) Detect Level 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15) Detect Level 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) Detect Level 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) Detect Level 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15) Detect Level 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15) Detect Level 6 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15) Detect Level 7 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15) Detect Level 8 : -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15) Detect Level 9 : -45dBm(0) to -60dBm(15) Detect Level 10 : -50dBm(0) to -65dBm(15) Detect Level 11 : -55dBm(0) to -70dBm(15) Detect Level 12 : -60dBm(0) to -75dBm(15) Detect Level 13 : -65dBm(0) to -80dBm(15) Detect Level 14 : -70dBm(0) to -85dBm(15) Detect Level 15 : -75dBm(0) to -90dBm(15) 05 Forward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB) 06 Backward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB) 07 ON Detect Time 1~255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) 08 OFF Detect Time 1-255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms) Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default Item No Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min. detect level 10 (-20dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 04 Max. detect level 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 05 Forward twist level 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 06 Backward twist level 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 07 ON detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 08 OFF detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 601 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector. Tone Detector Type: 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4, 5 = Reserved Input Data Tone Detector Type Number Item No Item Input Data 01 Detection Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm 3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm 4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm 5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm 6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm 02 Min. Detection Level 0~15 0 = -10dBm(0) 1 = -15dBm(0) 2 = -20dBm(0) 3 = -25dBm(0) 4 = -30dBm(0) 5 = -35dBm(0) 6 = -40dBm(0) 03 2 - 602 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved --- S/N Ratio to -25dBm(15) to -30dBm(15) to -35dBm(15) to -40dBm(15) to -45dBm(15) to -50dBm(15) to -55dBm(15) 0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB) Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No Item Input Data 04 No Tone Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms) (0 = not detect) 1~255 = 60~7680ms. The formula is 30+30N. When set to N=1, it means 30+30*1=60 When set to N=255, it means 30+30*255=7680 05 Pulse Count 1~255 06 ON Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms) 07 ON Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms) 08 OFF Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms) 09 OFF Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms) 12 Frequency No. 1 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07) 13 Frequency No. 2 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07) Default Item Name Type 1 (DT) Type 2 (BT) Type 3 (RBT) Type 4 Type 5 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 0 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 0 0 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 0 0 1 Detect Level 2 Min. detect level 3 S/N ratio 4 No tone time 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 0 0 5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0 6 ON min. time 9 (300ms) 12(390ms) 25 (780ms) 0 0 7 ON max. time 0 20(630ms) 40 (1230ms) 0 0 8 OFF min. time 1 (60ms) 12(390ms) 83 (2520ms) 0 0 9 OFF max. time 1 (60ms) 20(630ms) 115 (3480ms) 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 603 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Level: MF Description Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Date Format Input Data 0 = American Format (Month / Day / Year) 1 = Japanese Format (Year / Month / Day) 2 = European Format (Day / Month / Year) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 604 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13. Input Data Frequency Table No. Input Data Default 1 35 (350 Hz) 2 44 (440 Hz) 3 48 (480 Hz) 4 5 0, 10~255 (100~2550 Hz) (0 = Not used) 62 (620 Hz) 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 605 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-09 : Short Ring Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SV8100 multiline terminals. Input Data Short Ring Number Item No. Item 01~32 Description Default 01 Frequency 1 Refer to Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table 00 = No Setting, 01~15 02 Frequency 2 Refer to Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table 00 = No Setting, 01~15 03 Ring Cycle Refer to Table 2-17 Ring Cycle Table 00 = No Setting, 01~14 When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value. Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table 2 - 606 Data Frequency (Hz) 01 392 02 440 03 494 04 523 05 587 06 659 07 698 08 784 09 880 10 988 11 1046 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table (Continued) Data Frequency (Hz) 12 1175 13 1318 14 1397 15 1568 Table 2-17 Ring Cycle Table Data SV8100 Programming Manual Ring Cycle (ms) 01 125(On)/Off 02 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off 03 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off 04 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off 05 250(On)/Off 06 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off 07 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off 08 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off 09 325(On)/Off 10 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off 11 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off 12 500(On)/Off 13 500(On)/500(Off)/500(On)/Off 14 1000(On)/Off 2 - 607 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-18 Default Table Short Ring No. Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle 1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1 2 Error Tone 8 8 14 3 Alarm Tone for long conversation call 4 4 14 4 Not defined 0 0 0 : : : : : 32 Not defined 0 0 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 608 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup to various data for the MF signal detection. Input Data MF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = MF Receiver for Extension 2 = MF Receiver for Trunk 3 = Reserved 4 = Reserved 5 = Reserved Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm 1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm 2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm 3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm 4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm 5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm 6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm 02 Start delay time 0~255 (0.25step, 0ms~64ms) 03 Min. detect level 0~15 MF Tone 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) MF Tone 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15) MF Tone 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15) MF Tone4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15) MF Tone 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 609 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 04 Max. detect level 0~15 MF Tone 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15) MF Tone 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15) MF Tone 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15) MF Tone 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15) MF Tone 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15) MF Tone 6 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15) 05 Twist level 0~9 (1dB~10dB) 06 S/N ratio 0~4 (-5step, 0dB~ -20dB) 07 ON detect time 1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms) 08 OFF detect time 1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms) Table 2-19 Default Table Item Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min. detect level 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 04 Max. detect level 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 05 twist level 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 06 S/N ratio 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 2 (-10dBm) 07 ON detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 08 OFF detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 610 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the COT (CO blade) Unit. Program Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 PCM Encoding Method Specification 0 = -law 1 = A-law 02 Loop Current Detection Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 75 (600ms) 03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 38 (304ms) 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 13 (104ms) 05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum Time 0~255 (0,8~2040ms) 82 (656ms) 06 Double Ringing Detection Minimum Off Time 0~255 (0,8~2040ms) 13 (104ms) 07 Double Ringing Detection Maximum Off Time 0~255 (0,8~2040ms) 50 (400ms) 08 Ringing Signal not Detection Minimum 1~255 (8~2040ms) 88 (704ms) 09 Time Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1~255 (64~16320ms) 94 (6016ms) 10 Continuous Ringing Minimum Time 0~255 (0,8~2040ms) 38 (304ms) 11 Continuous Ringing Maximum Time 0-255 (0,8~2040ms) 88 (704ms) 12 Caller ID Detection Time 0~255 (0~16320ms) 0 (0ms) SV8100 Programming Manual 0 81 2 - 611 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 2 - 612 Item Input Data Default 13 Grounding Time 1~255 (16~4080ms) 9 (144ms) 14 Hook Flash 1 Time 1~255 (16~4080ms) 50 (800ms) 15 Hook Flash 2 Time 1~255 (16~4080ms) 156 (2496ms) 16 Pause Time 1~255 (64~16320ms) 16 (1024ms) 17 PFT Idle Detection Time 1~255 (64~16320ms) 47 (3008ms) 18 Grounding Start Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 19 Grounding Start Give Up Time 1~255 (64~16320ms) 47 (3008ms) 20 Loop Reverse Detect Minimum Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 13 (104ms) 21 Loop Reverse Detect Maximum Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 107 (856ms) 22 Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 50 (400ms) 23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 80 (640ms) 24 On Hook Normal Detect Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 2 (24ms) 25 On Hook Reverse Detect Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 2 (16ms) 26 On Hook Disconnect Detect Time 1~255 (16~4080ms) 188 (3008ms) 27 Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps) 1~255 (8~2040ms) 8 (64ms) 28 Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps) 1~255 (8~2040ms) 5 (40ms) 29 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 (32~8160ms) 25 (800ms) 30 Dial Pulse Break Time (20pps) 1~255 (8~2040ms) 4 (32ms) 31 Dial Pulse Make Time (20pps) 1~255 (8~2040ms) 2 (16ms) 6 (48ms) Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item 32 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 33 --- Not Used --- 34 --- Not Used --- 35 --- Not Used --- 36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum Time Input Data Default 1~255 (32~8160ms) 16 (512ms) 1~255 (16~4080ms) 150 (2400ms) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 613 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the DID Unit. Input Data Item 2 - 614 Name Input Data Default 01 PCM Method Type 0 = -law 1= A-law 02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 6 (60ms) 03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 7 (700ms) 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 10 (100ms) 05 Hook Flash Time 1~255 (8~2040ms) 25 (200ms) 06 Pause Time 1~255 (32~8160ms) 94 (3008ms) 07 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 20 (200ms) 08 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 3 (300ms) 09 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 48 (4800ms) 10 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 13 (130ms) 11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 31 (310ms) 12 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 5 (10ms) 13 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 50 (100ms) 0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 14 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 5 (10ms) 15 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 50 (100ms) 16 Receive DP Inter-Digit Time 1~255 (32~8160ms) 6 (192ms) 17 Loop Off Guard Time 0~25 (0,100~25500ms) 20 (2000ms) 18 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 (4~1020ms) 16 (64ms) 19 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 (4~1020ms) 8 (32ms) 20 DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps) 1~255 (16~4080ms) 38 (608ms) 21 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 (4~1020ms) 8 (32ms) 22 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 (4~1020ms) 4 (16ms) 23 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) 1~255 (16~4080ms) 29 (464ms) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 615 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the E&M Tie Line Unit. Input Data Item 2 - 616 Name Input Data Default 01 PCM Method Type 0 = -law 1= A-law 02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 6 (60ms) 03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 7 (700ms) 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 10 (100ms) 05 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 7 (700ms) 06 Hook Flash Time 1~255 (10~2040ms) 20 (200ms) 07 Pause Time 1~255 (60~15300ms) 50 (3000ms) 08 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 20 (200ms) 09 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 3 (300ms) 10 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 (100~25500ms) 48 (4800ms) 11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 13 (130ms) 12 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 (10~2550ms) 31 (310ms) 13 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 5 (10ms) 0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 14 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 50 (100ms) 15 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 5 (10ms) 16 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 (2~510ms) 50 (100ms) 17 Pause Time after WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 (8~2040ms) 13 (104ms) 18 Loop Off Guard Time 0~255 (0,100~25500ms) 20 (2000ms) 19 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 (2~512ms) 32 (64ms) 20 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 (2~512ms) 16 (32ms) 21 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 (32~8160ms) 19 (608ms) 22 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 (2~510ms) 16 (32ms) 23 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 (2~510ms) 8 (16ms) 24 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 1~255 (32~8160ms) 16 (512ms) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 617 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 1 of ISDN BRI. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Wait time for Physical Activation (Timer 3) 1~255 (200~5100ms) 100 (20sec) 02 Detection time for Physical Deactivation 1~255 (200~5100ms) 5 (1sec) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 618 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN BRI and PRI. Input Data Item No. Item Description Input Data Default 01 Timer T200 Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a second at the end of which transmission of a frame may be initiated. 1~255 (100~25500ms) 10 (1sec) 02 Timer T201 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages. 1~255 (100~25500ms) 10 (1sec) 03 Timer T202 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages. 1~255 (100~25500ms) 20 (2sec) 04 Timer T203 Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a second allowed without exchanging frames. 1~255 (100~25500ms) 250 (25sec) 05 N200 Specify the retransmission count. 1~255 06 N201 Specify the frame lengths in ocelots. 1~65535 (Byte) 07 N202 Specify the maximum number of transmissions from a TEI identity request message when the user requests a TEI. 1~255 SV8100 Programming Manual 3 260 3 2 - 619 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 620 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04). Input Data Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1~5 Item No. Item 01 T301 Specify the timer value started when the ALERT message is received. 0,180~254 (sec) 180 02 T302 Specify the timer value started when the SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received. 1~254 (sec) 15 03 T303 Specify the timer value started when SETUP is sent. 1~254 (sec) 4 04 T304 Specify the timer value started when the SETUP ACK is received. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received. 0~254 (sec). 30 05 T305 Specify the timer value started when DISC without progress No. 8 is sent. 1~254 (sec) 30 06 T306 Specify the timer value started when DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is sent. This timer is valid for Network side use only. 0~254 (sec) 30 07 T307 Specify the timer value started when SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is valid for Network side use only. 1~254 (sec) 180 08 T308 Specifies the timer value started when REL is sent. 1~254 (sec) 4 09 T309 Specify the timer value started at data link disconnection. 1-254 (sec) 90 10 T310 Specify the timer value started when CALL PROC is sent. 0~180 (sec) 180 11 T312 Specify the timer value started when SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast data link. This timer is valid only for Network side use only. 1~254 (sec) 6 SV8100 Programming Manual Description Input Data Default 2 - 621 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Description 12 T313 Specify the timer value started when connection request is sent. Valid range 1 ~ 4 seconds in 1 second increments. Value of 0 indicates timer not used. 1~254 (sec) 4 13 T314 Specify the timer value started when message segment is received. 1~254 (sec) 4 14 T316 Specify the timer value started when RESTART is sent. (T317+1)~254 (sec) 120 15 T317 Specify the timer value started when RESTART is received. 1~(T316-1) 60 16 T318 Specify the timer value started when RES is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only. 1~254 (sec) 4 17 T319 Specify the timer value started when SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only. 1~254 (sec) 4 18 T320 Specify the timer value when B-channel access: connection is received, or D-channel access: DL-ESTABLISH confirmation or indication is received. 1~254 (sec) 30 19 T321 Specify the timer value started when STATUS ENQ is received. 1~254 (sec) 30 20 T322 Specify the timer value upon D-channel failure. 1~254 (sec) 4 Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 622 ISDN Compatibility Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port Level: IN Description Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC) Filter for each analog trunk port. Input Data Trunk Number CODEC Filter Type 0 = No filter 1 = Type 1: 600 Line loss 0dB (~500m from CO Ex) 2 = Type 2: 600 Line loss 4dB (1~2km from CO Ex) 3 = Type 3: 600 Line loss 8dB (~3km from CO Ex) 4 = Type 4: Enable PRG81-17 setting 1~200 Default 2 (see Conditions below) Conditions The adjustments of PRG 81-07 and 81-17 require CPU software 2.51 or higher. Version 2.51 or lower will have a default value of 1. Version 3.00 or higher will have a default value of 2. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 623 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type. Item 2 - 624 Name Input Data Default 01 Answer Signal Detection Time (Loop) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 02 Answer Signal Detection Time (Ground) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 03 Answer Signal Detection Time (DID) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 04 Answer Signal Detection Time (E&M) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 05 Answer Signal Detection Time (OPX) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 06 Clear Signal Detection Time (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 07 Clear Signal Detection Time (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 08 Clear Signal Detection Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 09 Clear Signal Detection Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 10 Clear Signal Detection Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 11 Ringing Signal Detection Time (Loop) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 10 80ms 12 Ringing Signal Detection Time (Ground) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 10 80ms 13 Ringing Signal Detection Time (DID) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 10 80ms Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item Name Input Data Default 14 Ringing Signal Detection Time (E&M) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 10 80ms 15 Ringing Signal Detection Time (OPX) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 10 80ms 16 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 50 5000ms 17 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 50 5000ms 18 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 50 5000ms 19 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 50 5000ms 20 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 50 5000ms 21 Loop Current Detection Time (Loop) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 40 160ms 22 Loop Current Detection Time (Ground) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 40 160ms 23 Loop Current Detection Time (DID) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 40 160ms 24 Loop Current Detection Time (E&M) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 40 160ms 25 Loop Current Detection Time (OPX) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 40 160ms 26 DP Break Send Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 15 60ms 27 DP Make Send Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 10 40ms 28 DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 7 700ms 29 HookFlash Send Time (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5 500ms 30 HookFlash Send Time (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms ) 5 500ms 31 HookFlash Send Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms ) 5 500ms 32 HookFlash Send Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms ) 5 500ms SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 625 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item 2 - 626 Name Input Data Default 5 500ms 33 HookFlash Send Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms ) 34 Pause Send Time (ALL) 1~255 (1sec ~ 255sec ) 3 3sec 35 Wink Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 25 200ms 36 Delay Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 25 200ms 37 Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 3 300ms 38 Wink Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 25 200ms 39 Delay Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 25 200ms 40 Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 3 300ms 41 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 48 4800ms 42 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time (DID) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 12 96ms 43 Receive Wink Duration Max. Time (DID) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 45 360ms 44 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 48 4800ms 45 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time (E&M) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 12 96ms 46 Receive Wink Duration Max. Time (E&M) 1~250 (8ms ~ 2000ms) 45 360ms 47 Receive DP Make Min. Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 3 12ms 48 Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 19 76ms 49 Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 3 12ms 50 Receive DP Break Max. Time ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 25 100ms 51 Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 125 500ms Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item Name Input Data Default 52 Receive HookFlash Duration Min. Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 3 300ms 53 Receive HookFlash Duration Max. Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 54 Receive HookFlash Duration Min. Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 3 300ms 55 Receive HookFlash Duration Max. Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 56 Loop Off Guard Time (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 57 Loop Off Guard Time (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 58 Loop Off Guard Time (DID) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 59 Loop Off Guard Time (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 60 Loop Off Guard Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5 500ms 62 Double Between Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 5 500ms 63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 25 2500ms 64 Double Between Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 30 3000ms 65 Single Ringing Send Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 10 1000ms 66 Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms 67 Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms 68 Receive DP Break Max. Time ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms 69 Single Between Ringing Send Time (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms 70 Guard Time 1 (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 627 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item Name Input Data Default 71 Guard Time 1 (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 9 900ms 72 Guard Time 1 (DID) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 3 12ms 73 Guard Time 1 (E&M) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 20 2000ms 74 Guard Time 1 (OPX) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 40 4000ms 75 Guard Time 2 (ALL) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 6 24ms 76 Dial Sending Complete Time (ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 77 ON-HOOK bit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 78 Open Loop Time (Loop) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 79 Open Loop Time (Ground) 1~255 (100ms ~ 25500ms) 6 600ms 80 Open Loop Time (DID) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 13 52ms 81 Open Loop Time (E&M) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 13 52ms 82 Open Loop Time (OPX) 1~250 (4ms ~ 1000ms) 13 52ms Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 628 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when Program 81-07 is set to 4). Item Name Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 42 02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 90 03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 42 05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 18 06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 178 07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 220 08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 55 09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 163 10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 42 11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 51 12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 36 13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 210 14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 64 15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 52 16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 176 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 0 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 34 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 172 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 178 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 164 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 629 Issue 4.0 2 - 630 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item Name Input Data Default 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 202 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 181 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 170 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 78 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 51 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 78 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 171 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 162 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 182 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 179 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 208 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 227 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 171 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 169 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 60 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 37 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 179 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 162 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 179 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 43 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 167 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 180 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 202 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 48 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 170 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 45 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item Name Input Data Default 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 170 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 164 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 74 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 159 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 61 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 79 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 171 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 65 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 194 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 224 Conditions This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data). Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 631 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for each COT trunk port. Input Data Trunk No. Item No. 01 1~ 200 Item Input Data 0 = Pattern A (Pattern A: 10pps – 650ms, 20pps – 50ms) 1 = Pattern B (Pattern B: 10pps – 800ms, 20pps – 80ms) DP Interdigit Time Selection The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum pause time between dial pulses. Select either Pattern A or pattern B. 02 Prepause Time Selection Specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the CO or PBX when the Recall key on a multiline terminal is pressed. A single line telephone (SLT) generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a SLT hookflash is assigned. 03 Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection Specify the time after the incoming signal from another system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out. 04 Disconnect Recognition Time Selection Specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can be accessed again. 05 Auto Release Signal Detection Time Specify the signal detection time for release of a CO/PBX line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant CO or PBX. 06 2 - 632 Pause Time Selection 1~13 (1~13 seconds) (0 = No Setting) Default 1 (Pattern B) 1 (1sec) 0~15 (50~800ms) 3 (200ms) 1~15 (100ms~1.5 seconds) (0 = No Setting) 3 (300ms) 1~14 (50~700ms) 15 = (No limit) (0 = No Setting) 7 (350ms) 1~15 (500~7500ms) 6 (3000ms) Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 07 Item Hookflash Time Selection 1 Normal Hook Flash 08 Hookflash Time Selection 2 Long Hook Flash Input Data Default 0 = 20ms 1 = 40ms 2 = 60ms 3 = 80ms 4 = 100ms 5 = 140ms 6 = 160ms 7 = 200ms 8 = 400ms 9 = 600ms 10 = 800ms 11 = 1.0 second 12 = 1.5 seconds 13 = 2.0 seconds 14 = 3.0 seconds 15 = 5.0 seconds 9 0 = 20ms 1 = 40ms 2 = 60ms 3 = 80ms 4 = 100ms 5 = 140ms 6 = 160ms 7 = 200ms 8 = 400ms 9 = 600ms 10 = 800ms 11 = 1.0 second 12 = 1.5 seconds 13 = 2.0 seconds 14 = 3.0 seconds 15 = 5.0 seconds 14 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 633 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup to define the various initial data for DID/ TLI/DTI packages. Input Data Trunk No. Item No. 01 1~ 200 Item Input Data 0 = Pattern A (Pattern A: 10pps – 650ms, 20pps – 500ms) 1 = Pattern B (Pattern B: 10pps – 800ms, 20pps – 800ms) DP Interdigit Time Selection The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum pause time between dial pulses. Select either Pattern A or pattern B. 02 Prepause Time Selection Specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the Tie Line when the Recall key on a multiline terminal is pressed. A Single Line Telephone (SLT) generates a hookflash to the Tie Line when a SLT hookflash is assigned. 03 Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection Specify the time before a UNIVERGE SV8100 system answer (Off-Hook) is recognized as an answer. 04 Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection Specify the circuit disconnect detected on the Tie Line on the distant system side is recognized as Tie Line. 2 - 634 1~4 (1~4 = 0.5~2.0 seconds) (5~15 = 3.0~13 seconds) (0 = No Setting) Default 1 0 (No Setting) 0~15 (130ms~1950ms) (0 = No Setting) 4 (520ms) 0~15 (130ms~1950ms) (0 = No Setting) 4 (520ms) Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 05 Item Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection Specify the time after the incoming signal from another system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out. Input Data Wink Start 1~15 (130ms~1950ms) (0 = No Setting) Delay 1~15 (30ms~450ms) (0 = No Setting) 06 Loop Off-Guard Time Selection Assign loop off-guard time to prevent noise that could cause the system to be unable to answer an incoming Tie line. 07 Length of Wink Signal Selection Specify the time a wink pulse is sent to another system. 08 Length of Delay Signal Selection Specify the time a delay pulse is sent to another system. 09 Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection Specify the time that an address signal is missing during the incoming call detection process before an error tone is returned to the other system. 10 Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection To specify a maximum time, in seconds, for receiving an acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone. 11 Disconnect Recognition Time Selection Specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can be accessed again. 12 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection Specify the signal detection time for release of a Tie Line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant CO or PBX. 13 Pause Time Selection SV8100 Programming Manual Default Wink Start 3 (390 Delay 3 (90) 1~4 (0.5sec~2.0sec) 5~15 (3sec~13sec) (0 = No Setting) 4 (2.0) 0~15 (30ms~480ms) 5 (180) 1~15 (300ms~4.5sec) (0 = No Setting) 1 (300ms) 0=8 1~15 (1~15 seconds) 6 0=8 1~15 (1~15 seconds) 7 1~15 (0.1~1.5 seconds) (0 = No Setting) 3 (0.3) 1~14 (50~700ms) 15 = (No limit) (0 = No Setting) 7 (350) 1~15 (500~7500ms) 6 (3000ms) 2 - 635 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Input Data Default 14 Hookflash Time Selection 1 0 = 20ms 1 = 40ms 2 = 60ms 3 = 80ms 4 = 100ms 5 = 140ms 6 = 160ms 7 = 200ms 8 = 400ms 9 = 600ms 10 = 800ms 11 = 1.0 second 12 = 1.5 seconds 13 = 2.0 seconds 14 = 3.0 seconds 15 = 5.0 seconds 9 (600ms) 15 Hookflash Time Selection 2 0 = 20ms 1 = 40ms 2 = 60ms 3 = 80ms 4 = 100ms 5 = 140ms 6 = 160ms 7 = 200ms 8 = 400ms 9 = 600ms 10 = 800ms 11 = 1.0 second 12 = 1.5 seconds 13 = 2.0 seconds 14 = 3.0 seconds 15 = 5.0 seconds 14 (3.0sec) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 636 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup to define the various initial data for TLI/DTI/DID/BRT/PRT package. Input Data Trunk Number Item No. Item 01 Internal Transmit Pad Level 02 Internal Receive Pad Level 03 External (tandem) Transmit Pad Level 04 External (tandem) Receive Pad Level 1~200 Input Data 0 = +2dB 1 = +4dB 2 = +6dB 3 = +8dB 4 = +12dB 5 = +16dB 6 = +3dB 7 = -3dB 8 = 0dB Default 3 = +8dB 3 = +8dB 8 = 0dB 8 = 0dB Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 637 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-14 : DIOPU (LD Trunk) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the CODEC filter data. 2 - 638 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 178 02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 90 03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 186 05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 27 06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 50 07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 42 08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 45 09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 51 10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 173 11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 52 12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 179 13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 77 14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 48 15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 186 16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 160 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 64 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 58 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 174 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 58 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 135 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 162 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 55 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 90 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 151 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 207 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 115 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 207 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 151 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 29 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 171 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 187 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 42 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 162 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 183 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 50 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 162 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 35 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 59 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 66 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 164 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 639 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144 Conditions This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4. This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 640 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-15 : TLIU(2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the TLIU (2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data. Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 195 02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 87 03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 51 05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 34 06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 162 07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 171 08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 50 09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 179 10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 90 11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 50 12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 163 13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 42 14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 48 15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 36 16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 176 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 64 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 165 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 173 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 43 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 213 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 641 Issue 4.0 2 - 642 UNIVERGE SV8100 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 170 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 54 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 34 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 190 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 166 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 47 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 50 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 181 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 159 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 50 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 208 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 159 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 178 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 169 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 43 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 164 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 171 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 35 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 76 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 59 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 42 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 180 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144 Conditions This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4. This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 643 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-16 : TLIU(4W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the TLIU (2W) CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data. 2 - 644 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 9 02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 0 03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0~255 144 04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0~255 9 05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0~255 0 06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0~255 144 07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0~255 9 08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0~255 0 09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0~255 144 10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0~255 9 11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0~255 0 12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0~255 144 13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0~255 9 14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0~255 0 15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0~255 1 16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0~255 144 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 0 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 1 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 144 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 645 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144 Conditions This Program is valid when Program 81-07 is set to filter type 4. This Program is not valid when Program 81-17 is set to option type 5~15. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 646 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup to define the CODEC filter option data type. Input Data Line Type Item No. 01 Item Option Type 1:COIU/082U(COIDB)/002U(COIDB) 2:DIOPU(LD Trunk) 3:TLIU(2W) 4:TLIU(4W) Input Data 0 = None 1 = Type 5: 600Ω Line loss 2dB 2 = Type 6: China standard (200Ω+(100nF//680Ω)) 3 = Type7: China seimence tel (160Ω+(150nF//1100Ω)) 4 = Type 8: Brazil 900Ω 5 = Type 9: 600Ω Line loss 10dB 6 = Type 10: Reserved 7 = Type 11: Reserved 8 = Type 12: Reserved 9 = Type 13: Reserved 10 = Type 14: Reserved 11 = Type 15: for test Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 647 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 648 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Level: MF Description Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1~4), also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each Range there are three frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range. Program 82 Input Data Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming) 2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming) 3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming) 4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming) 5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern 6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern Ringing Tone Type Number 1 = High 2 = Mid 3 = Low Item No. SV8100 Programming Manual Item 01 Frequency 1 02 Frequency 2 Input Data 1 = 520Hz 2 = 540Hz 3 = 660Hz 4 = 760Hz 5 = 1100Hz 6 = 1400Hz 7 = 2000Hz 2 - 649 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 03 Item Input Data Modulation 0 = No Modulation 1 = 8Hz Modulation 2 = 16Hz Modulation 3 = Envelope Default Incoming Ringing Tone Number Tone Type Frequency 1 (Hz) Frequency 2 (Hz) Modulation Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 5 Intercom Incoming Pattern High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 6 Alarm Sensor Pattern High Mid Low 760 760 760 760 760 760 No Modulation No Modulation No Modulation Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 650 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Selectable Ring Tones Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for special functions on a DSS console. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 ACD Log In 0~7 1 02 ACD Log Out 0~7 4 03 ACD Emergency Call 0~7 3 LED Pattern 0 : [OFF] On Off LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)] On Off LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)] On Off LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)] On Off SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 651 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)] On Off LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)] On Off LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)] On Off LED Pattern 7 : [ON] On Off Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 652 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the LCA. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Companding Method Type 0 = -law 1 = A-law 0 02 Ringing Frequency 0 = 25Hz 1 = 20Hz 2 = 16Hz 1 (20Hz) 03 Minimum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms) 04 Maximum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20(100ms) 05 Minimum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms) 06 Maximum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20 (100ms) 07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms) 08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 200 (1000ms) 09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms) 10 Minimum Off-Hook Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms) 11 No Detection Time after Off-Hook 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 60 (300ms) 12 No Detection Time after Pulse Dial Detection 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 70 (350ms) 13 Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal Time 1~255 (10ms~2550ms) 60 (600ms) 14 Ring, Message Wait Period Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 150 (750ms) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 653 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 654 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port Level: IN Description Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port. Input Data Station Port Number CODEC Filter Type 0 = No filter 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 1~ 256 Default 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection (DSS) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 655 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup Level: MF Description Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume. There are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk. Input Data Item No. 01 Input Digital Sidetone Level Analog Sidetone Level 0 -54 (dB) -54 (dB) 1 -48 (dB) -54 (dB) 2 -42 (dB) -54 (dB) 3 -36 (dB) -48 (dB) 4 -30 (dB) -42 (dB) 5 -24 (dB) -36 (dB) 6 (default) -18 (dB) -30 (dB) 7 -12 (dB) -24 (dB) 8 -12 (dB) -18 (dB) 9 -12 (dB) -12 (dB) Description Sidetone Volume Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 656 Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program 82-07 is set to 4). Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 58 02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 242 03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 191 04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 44 05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 90 06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 165 07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 168 08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 159 10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 185 11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 246 12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 159 13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 201 14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240 15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 221 16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 21 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 163 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 201 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 36 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 163 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 657 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data 2 - 658 Item Name Input Data Default 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 59 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 194 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 196 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 195 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 43 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 38 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 193 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 188 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 37 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 64 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 83 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 135 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 35 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 52 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 71 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 172 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 43 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 197 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 66 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 97 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 162 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 176 Conditions This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data). Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 659 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup to define the various timers for LCA Packages. Input Data Item No. Item Description 01 Bounce Protect Time Specify a time for detection of a valid off-Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new Off-Hook indication from a Single Line Telephone. 0 = No Setting 1~15 = 100ms~1.5sec 3 (300ms) 02 HookFlash Start Time Specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash. 0 = 40ms 1~15 = 90ms~790ms 5 (450ms) 03 HookFlash End Time Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line Telephone to receive a second dial tone. 0 = HST+0ms 1~15 = HST+100ms~HST+1500ms (HST=Hookflash Start Time) 7 (700ms) Input Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 660 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup to define the various initial data for OPX packages. Input Data Item No. Item Description 01 Bounce Protect Time Specify a time for detection of a valid off-Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new Off-Hook indication from a single line telephone. 0 = No Setting 1~15 = 100ms~1.5sec 3 (300ms) 02 HookFlash Start Time Specify the minimum hookflash time from a single line telephone or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash. 0 = 40ms 1~15 = 90ms~790ms 5 (450ms) 03 HookFlash End Time Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a single line telephone to receive a second dial tone. 0 = HST+0ms 1~15=HST+100ms~HST+1500 ms (HST=Hookflash Start Time) 7 (700ms) Input Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 661 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone Level: IN Description Use Program 82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone to set the sending and receiving gain of the Multiline telephone handset. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Description Handset Transmit Gain Level The handset gain level is set for sending (transmit). Input Default 1~32 (-3.5dB, ...... , +58.5dB) 2dB basis 0 0 = Fixed Value (+12.5db) 02 Headset Receive Gain Level The headset gain level is set for receiving (hearing). 1~32 (-3.5dB, ...... , +58.5dB) 2dB basis 0 0 = Fixed Value (0db) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 662 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 82-15 : OPX CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the filter data setup information (when Program 82-07 is set to 4). Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 202 02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 125 03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 164 04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 34 05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 71 06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 69 07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 169 08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 135 10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 248 11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 254 12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 143 13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 168 14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240 15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 46 16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 50 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 170 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 42 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 106 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 35 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 663 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data 2 - 664 Item Name Input Data Default 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 69 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 162 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 210 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 165 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 202 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 187 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 52 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 163 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 177 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 51 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 208 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 144 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 144 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 665 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 82-16 : SLI CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Data Setup to define the filter data setup information (when Program 82-07 is set to 4). Input Data 2 - 666 Item Name Input Data Default 01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 58 02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 242 03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 191 04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 44 05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 90 06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 165 07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 168 08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 159 10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 185 11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 246 12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 159 13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 201 14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240 15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 221 16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1 17 AISN and Analog Gains 0~255 21 18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 163 19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 201 20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 36 21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 163 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 59 23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 194 24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 196 25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 195 26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 170 27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 43 28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 38 29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 193 30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 163 31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 188 32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0~255 1 33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 1 44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 144 45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0~255 1 46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0~255 144 47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 37 48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 64 49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0~255 83 50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0~255 171 51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0~255 42 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 667 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0~255 135 53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0~255 35 54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0~255 52 55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0~255 71 56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0~255 172 57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0~255 43 58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0~255 197 59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 66 60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 97 61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0~255 162 62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0~255 176 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 668 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 81-17 : CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup to define the CODEC filter option data type. Input Data Line Type Item No. 01 Item Option Type 1 = SLIU 2 = OPX 3 = SLI Input Data 0 = None 1 = Type 5 2 = Type 6 3 = Type 7 4 = Type 8 5 = Type 9 6 = Type 10 7 = Type 11 8 = Type 12 9 = Type 13 10 = Type 14 11 = Type 15 Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 669 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 670 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic information of the H.323 Trunk. Program Input Data Item No. Item 02 Number of G.711 audio frames 1~4 3 03 G.711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 04 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 05 Number of G.729 audio frames 1~6 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 5 = 50ms 6 = 60ms 3 06 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 07 G.729 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~270ms 30 08 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 60 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 120 11 Number of G.723 audio frames 1~2 1 12 G.723 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 13 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual Input Data Default 84 2 - 671 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Default 15 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Fixed 2 = Self adjusting (silence period) 3 = Self adjusting 3 16 G.711 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~160 30 17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160 60 18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160 120 19 G.723 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~270 30 20 G.723 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270 60 21 G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270 120 22 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~ +10dB and self adjustment) 0 = Self adjustment 1 = -19dB (-49dBm) : 20 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = 9dB (-21dBm) 30 = 10dB (-20dBm) 20 23 Idle Noise Level -5000dBm ~ -7000dBm 24 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 25 Signal Limiter Mode 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 26 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 28 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting 0 = Automatic level adjustment 1 = Fixed level 0 30 TX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm~ +20dBm) 20 31 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm~ +20dBm) 20 Priority CODEC setting 0~3 0 = G.711 1 = G.723 2 = G.729 3 = G.722 0 33 Priority of voice encoding method. 2 - 672 Input Data 7000 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 34 --- Not Used --- 35 --- Not Used --- 36 The Maximum FAX Transmission Rate 0 = V.27ter, 2400bps 1 = V.27ter, 4800bps 2 = V.29, 7200bps 3 = V.29, 9600bps 4 = V.17, 12000bps 5 = V.17, 14400bps 37 FAX FIFO Considering Delay Time 0~600ms 300 38 Size of FAX Packet 20~48 bytes 20 39 FAX Modem Transmission Level 0~13 (0dBm ~ -13dBm) 9 40 FAX Modem Carrier Signal Detection Threshold 0 = -26dBm 1 = -33dBm 2 = -43dBm 1 41 FAX Communication no Communication Time-Out 10~32000 seconds 30 43 High-speed Signal Data (fax picture signal) Packet Length 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 4 44 Low-speed Signal Data (FAX Procedure Signal) 0~5 0 45 High-speed Signal Data (FAX Procedure Signal) 0~2 0 46 TCF Operation Setting 1 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is locally generated and checked. 2 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is sent over the network. 1 47 The Maximum, Low-speed Signal Data (Size of Packet) 1~65535 bytes 1 48 Network Transmission Time-out 10~32000 seconds 150 49 Eflag Beginning Timer 0~65535 2600 50 Eflag Stop Timer 0~65535 2300 51 The Former Line Substitution of Scanning Line 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 5 1 (FAX Relay item) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 673 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 52 Item Input Data Default 1 Eflag Setting at Head DIS (FAX Relay item) 53 (FAX Relay item) 54 1 TFOP Protocol NSF Superscription 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 (FAX Relay item) 55 ECM (Error Correction Mode) 1 56 Enable Modified Read Code 1 57 NSF Country Code Setting 58 NSF Vendor Code Setting 59 FAX Relay Function 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Each port mode 0 61 Auto Gain Control 0~5 0 62 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = VoIP 1 = RFC2833 2 = H.245 3 = Disable 0 Set up information of VoIP is set by PRG 84-06-10. 2 - 674 0~65535 0 0 63 Number of G.722 audio frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 64 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 65 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 66 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 60 67 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 675 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information of H.225 and H.245. Input Data Item No. 2 - 676 Item Input Data Default 01 H.225 0~255sec 180 02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0~255sec 9 03 H.225 Setup Timer 0~255sec 4 04 H.225 Info Ack Timer 0~255sec 9 05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0~255sec 10 07 H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0~255sec 5 08 H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count 0~255sec 3 09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0~255sec 5 10 H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer 0~255sec 50 11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0~255sec 50 12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0~255sec 50 13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0~255sec 50 14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0~255sec 50 15 RAS GRQ Timer 0~255sec 5 16 GRQ Retry Count 0~255 2 17 RAS RRQ Timer 0~255sec 5 18 RRQ Retry Count 0~255 3 19 RAS URQ Timer 0~255sec 3 20 URQ Retry Count 0~255 1 21 RAS ARQ Timer 0~255sec 5 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 22 ARQ Retry Count 0~255 2 23 RAS BRQ Timer 0~255sec 5 24 BRQ Retry Count 0~255 2 25 RAS IRR Timer 0~255sec 5 26 IRR Retry Count 0~255 2 27 RAS DRQ Timer 0~255sec 8 28 DRQ Retry Count 0~255 2 29 RAS LRQ Timer 0~255sec 5 30 LRQ Retry Count 0~255 2 31 RAS RAI Timer 0~255sec 3 32 RAI Retry Count 0~255 2 33 Call Signaling Port Number 0~65535: 0~1719, 1721~65535 1730 35 Fast Start Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0~65535 37 Terminal Type setting 0~255 20001 60 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 677 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup to define the details of IP Terminals and Adapters. Input Data Terminal Type Item No. 2 - 678 Item 1 = Dterm IP / UNIVERGE SV8100 Multiline Terminal with IP Adapter 2 = Soft Phone 3 = Bundle IP Phone Input Data Default 01 Port Number for Dterm IP Reception 0~65535 3458 02 DRS Port Number 0~65535 3456 06 Area Number 0 = Japan 1 = USA 2 = Australia 3 = EU 4 = Asia 5 = Other Country 6 = Germany 7 = Italy 8 = Netherlands 9 = Austria 10 = Belgium 11 = Spain 12 = Sweden 13 = UK 14 = Denmark 15 = Greece 16 = Switzerland 17 = RSA 18 = New Zealand 1 07 Type of Service Mode 1 = Invalid 2 = IP Precedence 3 = Diffserve 1 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item Input Data 08 Type of Service 0x00~0xFF 09 Start Port Number 1~42 10 Signaling Server Port 0~65535 11 Negotiation Timer 0~255 (sec) Default C0 1 5029 5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 679 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-06 : PVA Data Setting Level: IN Description Use Program 84-06 : PVA Data Setting to set up threshold levels of every CD-PVAA slot. (This program is not available with V1000) (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Input Data Slot Number Item No. 2 - 680 Item 01~24 Input Data Default Description 01 RTP Port Number 0~65534 10020 02 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021 04 Fract Lost Threshold 0~100% 0 The data is sent to the CD-CP00-US if the value exceeds the defined value. 05 Packets Lost Threshold 0~16777215 0 The data is sent to the CD-CP00-US if the value exceeds the defined value. 07 Jitter Threshold 0~4294967295 (sec) 0 The data is sent to the CD-CP00-US if the value exceeds the defined value. 09 Delay LSR Threshold 0~4294967295 (sec) 0 The data is sent to the CD-CP00-US if the value exceeds the defined value. 16 IMCP Redirect 0=No 1=Yes 0 The VOIP blade supports sending the Internet Message Control Protocol (IMCP) redirect message. It has to be RTP Port Number + 1. Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions System programming must be exited before these program options take affect. Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 681 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central Firmware Download for IP phones. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Server Mode 0 = TFTP 1 = FTP 02 File Server IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 Default 0 0.0.0.0 128.0.0.1~191.255255.254 192.0.1.1~223.255.254.254 03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters None 04 Password Up to 20 Characters None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 682 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup to set up the directory and filename for the firmware that is downloaded to IP phones. Input Data Terminal Type 1 = IP Terminal 2 = IP Adapter Input Data Item No. 02 Item Firmware File Name Input Data Up to 30 Characters Default None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 683 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-09 : VLAN Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data for Ethernet interface ports. Input Data Ethernet Interface 1 = CPU 2 = IPLA Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 VLAN (Future Use) 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 02 VLAN ID (Future Use) 1~4094 0 03 Priority (Future Use) 0~7 0 Conditions System programming must be exited before these program options take affect. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 684 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-10 : ToS Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data. Input Data Protocol Type Item No. 1 = Not Used 2 = Not Used 3 = Voice Control 4 = H.323 5 = RTP/RTCP 6 = SIP 7 = CCISoIP 8 = DT700 MLT 9 = SIP Trunk 10 = NetLink Item Input Data Default Description 01 ToS Mode 0 = Disable (Invalid) 1 = IP Precedence 2 = Diffserv 0 When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is invalid. When Data is set to 2, Item No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid. 02 Priority, IP Precedence 0~7 0 = Low 7 = High 0 1 = Router queuing priority 03 Low Delay 0~1 0 = Normal Delay, Low Delay 0 1 = Optimize for low delay routing 04 Wideband (Throughout) 0~1 0 = Normal Throughput 1 = High Throughput 0 1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing 05 High Reliability 0~1 0 = Normal Reliability 1 = Low Reliability 0 1 = Optimize for reliability routing 07 Priority (D.S.C.P. Differentiated Services Code Point) 0~63 0 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 685 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions The system must be reset for these program options to take affect. Feature Cross Reference 2 - 686 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP packet) encoding parameters. Input Data Type Item No. 1~5 Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G711 Audio Frames 1~4 (10ms steps) 3 02 G711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 03 G711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 3 08 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 12 Number of G723 Audio Frames 1~2 1 13 G723 VAD mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 687 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Input Data Default 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Adaptive during silence 3 = Adaptive immediate 3 18 VAD Threshold 0~30 = -19dB~+10dB 0 = Adaptec Threshold 1 = -19dB(-49dBm) : 20 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = 9dBm(-21dBm) 30 = 10dBm(-20dBm) 20 19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 (-5000dBm~ -7000dBm) 7000 20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 1. There is no limitation. 2. The limitation is the maximum. 3. Limitation size 4. It is limiting it. 5. Limitation smallness 6. The limitation is minimum. 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode When the NLP mode is turned on, the voice with low level is replaced with the NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level. 2 - 688 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 24 Item Echo Canceller Cng Cfg It is invalid if 84-11-22 is disabled. Input Data Default 0 = Adaptive 1 = Fixed 0 0~40 (-20dBm~ +20dBm) 14 Setting of noise level adjusting method added with NLP. 0: A set value of the self adjustment. 1: 84-01-27 is used. 26 TX Gain 0 1 : 14 : 19 20 27 RX Gain Audio Capability Priority = 0dBm = 5dBm = 6dBm 0~40 (-20dBm~ +20dBm) 0 1 : 14 : 19 20 28 = -14dBm = -13dBm 14 = -14dBm = -13dBm = 0dBm = 5dBm = 6dBm 0 = G.711_PT 2 = G.729_PT 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 689 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. 2 - 690 Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 (1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms) 2 02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 20 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 40 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 80 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 (1 = 10ms, 6 = 60ms) 2 08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~270ms 20 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 40 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 80 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frames 1~2 1 13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~270ms 30 15 G.723 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 60 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 120 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Fixed 2 = Adaptive during silence 3 = Adaptive Immediately 3 18 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~+10dB) 0 = Self adjustment 1 = -19dB (-49dBm) : 2 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = 9dBm (-21dBm) 30 = 10dBm (-20dBm) 20 19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 (-5000dBm~ -7000dBm) 7000 20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 1. There is no limitation. 2. The limitation is the maximum. 3. Limitation size 4. It is limiting it. 5. Limitation smallness 6. The limitation is minimum. 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode When the NLP mode is turned on, the voice with low level is replaced with the NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level. SV8100 Programming Manual 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 2 - 691 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 24 Item Echo Canceller Cng Cfg It is invalid if 84-11-22 is disabled. Input Data Default 0 = Adaptive 1 = Fixed 0 Setting of noise level adjusting method added with NLP. 0: A set value of the self adjustment. 1: 84-01-27 is used. 2 - 692 26 TX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19 dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 27 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19 dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 28 Audio Capability Priority 0 = G.711_PT 1 = G.723_PT 2 = G.729_PT 3 = G.722_PT 4 = G.726_PT 5 = Not Used 0 31 DTMF Payload Number 96~127 32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = RFC2833 0 33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 34 G.722 VAD Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 110 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 60 37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 (1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms) 3 39 G.726 VAD Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 60 42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 43 --- Not Used --- 44 --- Not Used --- 45 --- Not Used --- 46 --- Not Used --- 47 --- Not Used --- 48 --- Not Used --- Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 693 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Default 7 INVITE ReTx Count Specifies the number of times the INVITE message is sent. 02 Specifies the number of times Request message except INVITE are sent. 03 11 Request ReTx Count 0~255 7 Response ReTx Count Specifies the number of times the Response message is sent. 04 2 - 694 Request ReTx Start Time 5(500ms) 0~65535 (0ms~6553.5sec.) 40(4000ms) 05 Request Maximum ReTx Interval 06 SIP Trunk Port Number 1~65535 5060 07 Session Timer Value 1~65535 0 08 Minimum Session Timer Value 1~65535 1800 09 Called Party Information 0 = Request URI 1 = To Header 0 10 URL Type 0 = SIP-URL 1 = TEL-URL 0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 11 Item URL/To HeaderSetting Information 0: If 10-29-12 and 10-29-13 are set for the Proxy server domain, the value is put. The value of 10-29-11 is put on the URL/TO header when not set. Input Data 0 = Proxy Server Domain 1 = SIP UA Domain Default 0 1: Information is acquired and put from 10-28-01/ 10-28-02 of the SIP UA domains. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 695 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the H.323/SIP phone. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Registration Information Automatic Deletion When set to 1, the registration information is automatically deleted (for H.323). 02 Keep Alive Message Interval Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 1~10 minutes 1 1~10 seconds 5 1~5 times 3 Time interval that system sends a Ping to the terminal. 03 Keep Alive Message Timeout Time that system waits for a Ping response from the terminal. 04 Keep Alive Timeout How many times the system waits for a non response before determining the terminal is down. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 696 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain to set the Limiter Control Gain configuration of VoIP. Input Data Item No. 01 Item RX Limiter Control Gain Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of IP PCM. This option adds gain to the voice input from the LAN and removes it from the voice output to highway. 02 TX Limiter Control Gain Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of PCM IP. Input Data 0~30 (-15dBm ~ +15dBm) 0 = -15dBm 1 = -14dBm : 15 = 0dBm : 29 = 14dBm 30 = 15dBm Default 15 (0dBm) 15 (0dBm) This option adds the gain to the voice input from highway and removes it from the voice output to the LAN. 03 RX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU call in the IP to PCM direction. 04 TX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU call in the PCM to IP direction. 15 (0dBm) 15 (0dBm) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 697 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC information for the SIP extensions. Input Data Item No. 2 - 698 Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 2 02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 20 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 40 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 80 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 5 = 50ms 6 = 60ms 2 08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~270ms 20 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 40 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 80 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frames 1~2 1 13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~270ms 30 15 G.723 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 60 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 120 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Adaptive during Silence 3 = Adaptive Immediately 3 18 VAD Threshold 0~30 20 19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 (-5000dBm~ -7000dBm) 7000 20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 1. There is no limitation. 2. The limitation is the maximum. 3. Limitation size 4. It is limiting it. 5. Limitation smallness 6. The limitation is minimum. 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode When the NLP mode is turned on, the voice with low level is replaced with the NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level. SV8100 Programming Manual 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 2 - 699 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 24 Item Echo Canceller Cng Cfg It is invalid if 84-11-22 is disabled. Input Data Default 0 = Adaptive 1 = Fixed 0 Setting of noise level adjusting method added with NLP. 0: A set value of the self adjustment. 1: 84-01-27 is used. 2 - 700 26 TX Gain 0~30 (-19dB ~ +10dB, Auto) 0 = Auto Adjust 1 = -19dB (-49dBm) : 20 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = +9dB (-21dBm) 30 = +10dB (-20dBm) 20 27 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = +19dBm 40 = +20dBm 20 28 Audio Capability Priority 0 = G.711_PT 1 = G.723_PT 2 = G.729_PT 3 = G.722 4 = G.726 5 = Not Used 0 31 DTMF Payload Number 96~127 96 32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = RFC2833 0 33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 34 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 (1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms) 3 39 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 43 --- Not Used --- 44 --- Not Used --- 45 --- Not Used --- 46 --- Not Used --- 47 --- Not Used --- 48 --- Not Used --- Conditions These commands are for SIP analog extensions. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 701 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session timers, called party information and expire value of invite. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Registrar/Proxy Port 1~65535 5070 02 Session Timer Value 0~65535 180 03 Minimum Session Timer Value 0~65535 180 04 Called Party Info 0 = Request URI 1 = To Header 0 05 Expire Value of Invite 0~256 (seconds) 180s 1~3600 (seconds) 180s Arrival of a message is ended when this time expires and there is no cut from the caller. 06 Expire Value of Invite (send) The expiration time is set for the Invite message. Conditions These commands are for SIP analog extensions. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 702 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the codec parameters of the PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA, and PZ-128IPLA. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 02 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 03 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30 05 G711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120 07 G.729 Audio Frame Number 1~6 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 5 = 50ms 6 = 60ms 3 08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 09 G729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 10 G729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 11 G729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 703 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 2 - 704 Item Input Data Default 12 G.723 Audio Frame Number 1 = 30ms 2 = 60ms 1 13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 15 G723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 17 TX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 0 = -20 dBm 1 = -19 dBm : 20 = 0 dBm : 39 = +19 dBm 40 = +20 dBm 20 18 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dBm ~ +20dBm) 0 = -20 dBm 1 = -19 dBm : 20 = 0 dBm : 39 = +19 dBm 40 = +20 dBm 20 19 1st Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 1 = G.723 PT 2 = G.729 PT 3 = G.722 4 = G.726 5 = Not Used 0 20 2nd Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 1 = G.723 PT 2 = G.729 PT 3 = G.722 PT 4 = G.726 PT 5 = Not Used 1 21 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Inbound (RFC2833) 2 = Outbound (H.245) 0 22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Silence 3 = Immediate 3 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0 = Self adjustment 1 = -19dBm (-49dBm) : 20 = 0dBm (-30dBm) : 29 = +9dBm (-21dBm) 30 = +10dBm (-20dBm) 20 24 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 25 NLP Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 26 UDP Checksum Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 27 G.722 Audio Frame Number 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 28 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 29 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 30 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 31 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 32 G.726 Audio Frame Number 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 33 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 34 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 35 G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 36 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 37 --- Not Used --- 38 --- Not Used --- 39 --- Not Used --- SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 705 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item 40 --- Not Used --- 41 --- Not Used --- 42 FAX Relay Mode Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Each Port Mode (each extension) Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 706 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DT700 Multiline logon information. Input Data Personal ID Index 1~512 Input Data Item No. 01 Item User ID Input Data Default Up to 32 characters No Setting Up to 16 characters No Setting Input the User ID when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01). 02 Password Input the Password when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01). 03 IP Multiline terminals only support numerical user IDs, not alphanumeric. User ID Omission Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again. 04 Log Off When the registration mode (10-46-01) is set to manual, and the phone prompts for a login, the previous user ID appears so the user only has to enter the password. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 = Off 1 = On 1 When enabled, the extension assigned to the Personal ID Index can be logged off or overridden by another IP multiline station or Softphone. In Manual mode, a user can also log off the IP phone to allow another user to login with their own login ID and password. To logoff the IP phone use the following operation: Press the "Down Arrow" Soft Key, press the "Prog" soft key, and then press the "LOGOFF" soft key. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 707 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 05 Item Nick Name Input Data Up to 32 characters Default No Setting Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 708 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the DT700 Multiline Terminal. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Registration Expire Timer Input Data Default 60~65535 (sec) 180 60~65535 (sec) 3600 60~65535 (sec) 180 60~65535 (sec) 180 0~65535 (sec) 180 0x00~0xFF (0~9, A~F) 00 0~65535 (sec) 0 The Expires value of the REGISTER message which received from DT700 terminal is out of range or when the Expire value is not set up, in case it assigns the effective time to the DT700 terminal. The timer for supervising whether DT700 terminal is connected or not. 02 Subscribe Expire Timer The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and receive the terminal operation instructions between the Main Device and DT700 terminal. 03 Session Expire Timer Set effective time for supervising the Voice Path. 04 Minimum Session Expire Timer Set minimum value of effective time for supervising the Voice Path. 05 Invite Expire Timer Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call when the Expire value is not set in the INVITE message received from DT700 terminal. 06 Signal Type of Service Set Type of Service value which applied to send SIP Message Packet from DT700 terminal to Main Device. 07 Error Display Timer SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 709 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 08 Digest Authorization Registration Expire Timer 0~4294967295 (sec) 0 10 Number of Password Retries 0~255 0 0 Input the number of times an incorrect password can be entered when the security key is pressed. 11 Password Lock Time 0~120 12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits (0~9, , #, P, R, @) 13 Media Type of Service 0x00~0xFF (0~9, A~F) 00 14 Refer Expire Timer 0~65535 (sec) 60 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 710 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each type of DT700 Multiline Telephone. Input Data Type Item No. 01 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 Item Number of G.711 Audio Frames Input the amount of audio in the packets when using the G.711 CODEC. 02 --- Not Used --- 03 G.711 Type This decides the G.711 type. In North America, typically u-law is used. Input Data Default 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 2 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 20 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 40 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 80 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 2 08 --- Not Used --- 09 G729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 20 10 G729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 40 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 711 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Default 11 G729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 80 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Adaptive during silence 3 = Adaptive immediate 3 18 --- Not Used --- 19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 (-5000dBm~ 7000dBm) 20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 21 Signal Limiter Mode 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 24 Echo Canceller CNG Configuration 0 = Adaptive 1 = Fixed 0 26 TX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 0~3 0 = G.711_PT 2 = G.729_PT 3 = G.722_PT 0 Input the TX gain from the IPLA to the telephone. 27 RX Gain Input the RX gain from the IPLA to the telephone. 28 2 - 712 Input Data Audio Capability Priority 7000 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. 30 Item Auto Gain Control Input Data Default 0~5 0 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 Auto (0) means that the system automatically decides a type (Type 4 or Type 5) of echo canceller on PRG 84-17 for a telephone on the basis of a seized trunk. 32 G.722 Audio Frame Number 33 --- Not Used --- 34 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 713 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the CODEC with NetLink. Input Data Item No. 2 - 714 Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 5 = 50ms 6 = 60ms 3 08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frames 1~2 1 = 30ms 2 = 60ms 1 13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30 15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120 17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Adaptive during silence 3 = Adaptive immediate 3 18 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~ +10dB) 0 = Self adjustment 1 = -19dB (-49dBm) : 20 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = 9dB (-21dBm) 30 = 10dB (-20dBm) 20 19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 (-5000dBm~ -7000dBm) 20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 21 Signal Limiter Mode 1 = Mode 0 2 = Mode 1 3 = Mode 2 4 = Mode 3 5 = Mode 4 6 = Mode 5 6 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1 = 2 wire only 1 24 Echo Canceller CNG Configuration 0 = Adaptive 1 = Fixed 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 7000 2 - 715 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 2 - 716 Item Input Data Default 26 TX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 27 RX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 28 Audio Capability Priority 0~3 0 = G.711_PT 1 = G.723_PT 2 = G.729_PT 3 = G.722_PT 4 = G.726 5 = Not Used 0 30 Auto Gain Control 0~5 0 31 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = RFC2833 0 32 Fax Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Each port mode 0 33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 34 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 3 39 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30 41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60 42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120 43 --- Not Used --- 44 --- Not Used --- 45 --- Not Used --- 46 --- Not Used --- 47 --- Not Used --- 48 --- Not Used --- Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 717 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup to set the IP address of IPL and the port. Index 1 Item No. 1 VoIP GW Number 01~08 Item Input Data Default Slot 1 = 172.16.0.20 : Slot 4 = 172.16.0.44 VoIP GW Number 1~8: 172.16.0.20~172.16.16.0.27 01 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 02 RTP Port Number 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10020 VoIP GW2 = 10052 VoIP GW3 = 10084 VoIP GW4 = 10116 VoIP GW5 = 10148 VoIP GW6 = 10180 VoIP GW7 = 10212 VoIP GW8 = 10244 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10021 VoIP GW2 = 10053 VoIP GW3 = 10085 VoIP GW4 = 10117 VoIP GW5 = 10149 VoIP GW6 = 10181 VoIP GW7 = 10213 VoIP GW8 = 10245 03 2 - 718 Slot Number Only even numbered RTP ports are supported. RTCP Port Number (RTP Port Number +1) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 719 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the IPL. Index 1 Slot Number 1 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 DTMF Relay Setup 0 = DTMF Relay disabled 1 = In-Band DTMF Relay -Do not report to host processor 2 = Out of Band Relay - Do not pass tones as voice 2 02 Setup CODEC Mode 0 = Default 1 = Mode 1 (G.723) 0 Default means the system uses another CODEC except G.723. Mode 1 means the system uses all CODECs, but the limitation of the total number of available DSP will be applied. 2 - 720 03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 04 SRTP Mode Select 0 = Mode1 0 06 H.245 Port Number 0~65535 10100 07 Preparation Completion Response Port Number 0~65535 4000 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 721 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download for the IP Phone. Index 1 Terminal Type 1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1 2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT1D/ITL-24PA-1D 3 = ITL-320C-1 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting 02 Firmware File Name Maximum 30 characters No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 722 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast. Index 1 Type 1 = Type 1 (Multicast) 2 = Type 2 (reserved) 3 = Type 3 (reserved) 4 = Type 4 (reserved) 5 = Type 5 (reserved) Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Audio Capability 1 = G.711 A-law 2 = G.711 -law 3 = G.729 4 = G.723 5 = G.722 2 02 Number of Audio Frames 1~6 1 = 10ms 2 = 20ms 3 = 30ms 4 = 40ms 5 = 50ms 6 = 60ms 2 Conditions When using G.711, PRG 84-29-02 only 10ms, 20ms, 30ms and 40ms are used. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 723 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 84-30 : PVA-CCIS over IP CODEC Setup to set the CODEC information of the PVA-CCIS over IP. Input Data Item No. 2 - 724 Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~2 1 = 20ms 2 = 30ms 2 02 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1 03 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30 05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60 06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120 07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~3 1 = 20ms 2 = 30ms 3 = 40ms 2 08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500ms 30 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~500ms 60 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500ms 120 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frames 1~2 1 = 30ms 2 = 60ms 1 13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500ms 30 15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~500ms 60 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500ms 120 17 TX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 18 RX Gain 0~40 (-14dBm~+14dBm) 0 = -20dBm 1 = -19dBm : 20 = 0dBm : 39 = 19dBm 40 = 20dBm 20 19 1st Priority of Audio Capability 0 20 2nd Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711_PT 1 = G.723_PT 2 = G.729_PT 21 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Inbound (RFC2833) 2 = Outbound (H.245) 0 22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 2 = Adaptive during silence 3 = Adaptive immediate 3 23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0~30 (-19dB~ +10dB) 0 = Self adjustment 1 = -19dB (-49dBm) : 20 = 0dB (-30dBm) : 29 = 9dB (-21dBm) 30 = 10dB (-20dBm) 20 24 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 25 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 SV8100 Programming Manual 1 2 - 725 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. 26 Item LDP Check Sum Mode Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Default 1 Conditions PVA-CCIS CODEC changes require a reset of the CD-PVAA blade. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 726 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-01 : HUB(8) LAN Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 85-01 : HUB(8) LAN Setup to define the LAN setup for each slot. Program (V2500 or higher required) 85 Input Data Item No. Hub Slot 1~24 Hub Port 0~8 Item Input Data Default Description 01 Auto Negotiation 0 = Enable 1 = Disable 0 When enabled, Link Speed, Duplex and MDI/ MDIX setting are negotiated with the other connected device. 02 Link Speed 0 = 10Mbps 1 = 100Mbps 1 85-01-01 – Disable 03 Half Duplex/Full Duplex 0 = Half 1 = Full 1 85-01-01 – Disable 04 Auto MDI/MDIX 0 = MDIX 1 = MDI 2 = Auto 2 When 85-01-01 is enabled, Auto MDI/MDIX will function. Auto MDI/ MDIX (Media Dependent Interface / Media Dependent Interface Cross-over) enables a switch port to sense the appropriate transmit/ receive pairs of an Ethernet cable. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 727 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. 05 Item Back Pressure, Half-Duplex Input Data 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Default 0 Description 85-01-01 – Disable, 85-01-03 – Half-Duplex When enabled, a switch applies back pressure to a half-duplex ingress port while an output queue is congested. 06 Flow Control, Full-Duplex 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Full Duplex – 802.3x 85-01-01 – Disable 85-01-03 – Full-Duplex When enabled, a switch applies flow control to a full-duplex ingress port while an output queue is congested. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 728 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-02 : HUB(8) VLAN Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 85-02 : HUB(8) VLAN Setup to define the VLAN setup for each HUB(8) blade. The CHS1U-US can support up to 16, 802.1q VLANs (numbered 1 ~ 16). Program Block 85-02 assigns supported VLAN IDs, with a range of 1 ~ 4095. At default, 802.1q support is disabled. If Program Block 85-02-01 is set to ENABLE, 802.1q VLAN tagging is supported. 85-02-02 through 85-02-09 establish the default VLAN for ports 1 ~ 8 of the HUB(8). (V2500 or higher required) Input Data Hub Slot Item No. SV8100 Programming Manual 1~24 Item Input Data Default 01 VLAN Mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 02 Port 1 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 03 Port 2 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 04 Port 3 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 05 Port 4 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 06 Port 5 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 07 Port 6 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 08 Port 7 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 09 Port 8 VLAN ID 1~4095 1 2 - 729 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 730 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-03 : Priority Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 85-03 : Priority Setup to establish the queuing prioritization rules for the low and high priority queues. Each port has a low and a high priority queue for both ingress and an egress. These queues serve to buffer packets during times of heavy network traffic. The HUB(8) supports 802.1q/p layer 2 Quality of Service. (V2500 or higher required) Input Data Hub Slot 1~24 Hub Port 0~8 Item No. Item 01 Default Priority 0 = Disable 2 = Low 3 = High 0 Assigns untagged frames to either the Low or the High queue, and tags them with a priority assigned in Program 85-03-03 (High) or Program 85-03-04 (Low). 02 RX High 0~7 1 RX High establishes the minimum threshold for frames designated for the high priority queues. 03 TX High 0~7 7 When Program 85-03-01 is set to High, untagged frames are marked with this priority setting. Previously tagged frames are unchanged. 04 TX Low 0~7 0 When Program 85-03-01 is set to Low, untagged frames are marked with this priority setting. Previously tagged frames are unchanged. Input Data Default Description Conditions None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 731 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Cross Reference 2 - 732 Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup to define the port mirroring for each HUB(8) blade. This permits traffic from one port to be simultaneously transmitted to a second port. Port mirroring is typically used for debugging with a protocol analyzer. (V2500 or higher required) Input Data Hub Slot Item No. Item 1~24 Input Data Default Description 01 Port Mirroring 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 02 Source Port 1~8 1 Set to the port to be monitored. 03 Target Port 1~8 1 Set to the port where the protocol analyzer is connected. Conditions Set to the port where the protocol analyzer is connected. Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 733 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup 85-05 : HUB(8) VLAN Group Settings Level: IN Description Use Program 85-05 : HUB(8) VLAN Group Settings to define the VLAN group setup for each HUB(8) blade. (V2500 or higher required) Input Data Item No. 2 - 734 Slot 1~24 VLAN Group 00~15 Item Input Data Default Description 01 VLAN ID 0~4095 02 Port 00000000~11111111 00000000 Represents the eight physical ports of the HUB(8), numbered from left to right as 8 to 1. Setting a port to 1 enables the port to allow traffic from the VLAN ID specified in Program 85-05-01. 03 Tag Egress Retention 00000000~11111111 00000000 Represents the eight physical ports of the HUB(8), numbered from left to right as 8 to 1. At the point of egress, should VLAN tags be retained or removed? (Many Ethernet devices do not process VLAN tagged packets.) Setting a port to 1 permits VLAN tags to be retained. 0 802.1q VLAN ID Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 735 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 - 736 Program 85 : HUB(8) LAN Setup Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-01 : Installation Date Level: IN Description Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system. Program Input Data Item No. Item 01 Year 00~99 00 (No Setting) 02 Month 01~12 00 (No Setting) 03 Day 01~31 00 (No Setting) Input Data Default 90 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 737 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a: Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters) Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0~9, # and ) Password level The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs, and SB level password can access to SB programs only.) CAUTION Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Programming or WebPro Programming to make a backup copy of your system data. Input Data User Number 2 - 738 1~8 Item No. Item 01 User Name Maximum 10 characters 02 Password Up to 8 digits 03 User Level 0 = Prohibited User 1 = MF (Manufacturer Level) 2 = IN (Installer Level) 3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1) 4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2) 5 = UA (User Programming Level 1) Input Data Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Default User No. User Name Password Level 1 necii 47544 1 (MF) Manufacturer Level - Access to all system programs. 2 tech 12345678 2 (IN) Installer Level - Access to all IN level programs. 3 ADMIN1 0000 3 (SA) System Administrator Level 1 - Restricted Access 4 ADMIN2 9999 4 (SB) System Administrator Level 2 - More Restricted Access 5 USER1 1111 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1 6 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1 7 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1 8 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1 Level Description Conditions More than one extension can be in the programming mode. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 739 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-03 : Save Data Level: SA Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the USB Flash Drive. This program should be used after changing the programmed data. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Save Data Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions When reloading a customer database, the system must be reset (either using Program 90-08 or power down/power up) before all uploaded programming takes affect. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 740 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-04 : Load Data Level: SA Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted USB Flash Drive to the SRAM and Flash ROM in the system. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Load Data Input Data Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel) Conditions After uploading the programming, reset the system and wait a few minutes for the system to reset completely before accessing any line or special system feature. Otherwise, some unusual LED indications may be experienced. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 741 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-05 : Slot Control Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) blades (slots 1~24). Delete allows you to completely uninstall the blade. You should do this if you want to remove a blade and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface blade is being installed in a slot previously used (e.g., changing from a LCA to an DLCA blade), the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the new interface blade. Reset allows you to send a reset code. Input Data Menu Number Item No. 01 Item Slot Control 1 = Delete 2 = Reset 3 = Set Busy Out 4 = Reset Busy Out Input Data Slot Number (1~24) Conditions When you delete or reset a blade, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05. When reusing the slot for another blade, you must plug the blade in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again. When you delete or reset a blade, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to default. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 742 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-06 : Trunk Control Level: SA Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a blade from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the blade switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the blade can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down. Input Data Menu Number Item No. 01 Item Trunk Control 0 = Set Busy Out 1 = Reset Busy Out (idle) Input Data Trunk Port Number: 001~200 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 743 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-07 : Station Control Level: SA Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance. Input Data Menu Number Item No. 01 Item Extension Control 1 = Hardware Reset 2 = Software Reset Input Data Extension Number (up to eight digits) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 744 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-08 : System Reset Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset. Input Data Item No. Item 01 System Reset Input Data Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer key to cancel) Conditions After restoring a customer database, the system must be reset using Program 90-08 or by powering down/powering up before all the restored programming takes affect. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 745 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to automatically reset. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Month 00~12 (Note 1) 00 02 Day 00~31 (Note 2) 00 03 Hour 00~23 00 04 Minute 00~59 00 Note 1 If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system is automatically reset every month on the predefined day. Note 2 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and Minute) is set, the system automatically resets every day at the predefined time. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 746 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to the predefined destination. Input Data Alarm Number 001~100 Item No. Item 01 Alarm Type 02 Report Input Data 0 = Not Set 1 = Major Alarm 2 = Minor Alarm 0 = Not Report (No autodial) 1 = Report (autodial) Table 2-20 Description of Alarm Alarm No. Type Report Name 1 2 0 PKG Initialize Error. 1. The PKG failed to initialize. 2. The PKG did not start normally. 1. PKG not inserted firmly. 2. PKG was removed, but not reinserted firmly. 3. Old PKG data still reported due to no initialization. 1. Insert PKG firmly. 2. Insert PKG firmly. 3. Delete slot information in PRG 90-05 and insert the PKG again. During initialization, the PKG is recognized. ERR REC 2 2 0 PKG Mounting Error The unit did not step on a regular procedure and it was pulled out. Or, it is not normally inserted. 1. The package is not completely inserted. 2. The package is out of order. 1. Insert the package firmly. 2. Try again after initializing the system data once when LED doesn't blink normally. 3. Exchange packages. When unit is reconfirmed, the error is recovered. ERR REC SV8100 Programming Manual Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery Alarm Status 2 - 747 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report Name 3 2 0 Connection fault between CD-CP00-US and other PKGs. 4 2 0 5 1 0 Content of Alarm Action Recovery The error occurred when communicating with the package. When the package is broken, it recognizes it as a communication fault. 1. The unit is not completely installed. 2. The powersupply voltage of the system is outside ratings. 3. The equipment that generates the noise in the same power supply system as the power supply origin of the system is connected, and it malfunctions because of the power supply noise. 4. The equipment to which it is adjacent to of a main device, and has put out the radiation noise exists, and it malfunctions because of the radiation noise. 5. The chassis is not properly grounded. 1. Insert the unit firmly. 2. The power-supply voltage must use another power supply when is in the range of ratings or measuring with the voltmeter, and deviating from the rated range. 3. Use the power supply besides the equipment with the possibility of the noise source. 4. Separate as much as possible and use a main device from the equipment by which you seem may generate the radiation noise. 5. Ground the chassis correctly. When unit is confirmed, the error is recovered. ERR REC PKG S/W Download Error The unit program could not be downloaded normally. The unit could not be started normally. 1. The package software is not stored in the downloaded USB memory. 2. The stored package software is illegal. Package information that was installed before remains. 1. Delete slot information that corresponds by PRG90-05-01 to delete package information that was installed before. 2. There is a possibility that the unit program is broken though an external factor of the noise etc. 3. load into the USB memory and try again when you back up the unit program. 4. Check with maker on uncertain points. Please exchange units, though it is likely to restore by mounting the unit again. When the unit program is normally downloaded, the error is recovered. ERR REC Cooling fan error The cooling fan does not work normally. 1. The cooling fan has stopped working. 1. Confirm the cooling fan is turning. Replace the cooling fan if it is defective. 2. The cooling fan has come off. 2 - 748 Alarm Status Cause 2. Verify the cooling fan mounting. Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report 6 0 0 Blocking 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 Name Content of Alarm Alarm Status Cause Action Recovery The link of terminals connected with the ESI package came off. 1. Terminal breakdown. 2 Faulty wiring and wiring termination. 3. External noise. 4. ESI package Breakdown. 1. Confirm the terminal connected with same ESI. If they work normally, confirm the breakdown or the wiring for the terminal. 2. Exchange the terminal that doesn't work and the working terminal, and confirm it’s working. An external factor of the noise etc. is thought. 3. Confirm wiring and the installation,etc. 4.Check with manufacturer if the problem occurs again. The error is recovered when connecting or exchanging it. ERR REC Power failure The supply of the commercial power stopped. 1. The power cable came off. 2. Power failure 3. The power supply broke down. 1. Confirm the power supply outlet when the commercial power has not stopped. 2. Check with the manufacturer if the problem occurs again. When the commercial power is restored, the error is recovered. ERR REC RAM Backup Battery Error RAM backup battery on the CD-CP00-US blade is unplugged or defective. Check the battery connector. If it is connected correctly, replace the battery. The error is recovered once the battery is replaced. ERR REC --- Reserved --- 10 0 0 ISDN Link Error Layer1 link of ISDN lines came off. 1. Check connection between main device and ISDN line. 2. DSU breakdown 3. The setting of PRG10-03 does not correspond to an actual line. 1. Confirm the data of PRG10-03. 2. Confirm wiring and installation of DSU. 3. Check with the manufacturer if the problem occurs again. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC 11 0 0 CTI Link Error The link with the CTI server came off. 1. LAN cable defective. 2. Connected HUB broken. 3. The CTI server doesn't start normally. 1. Confirm the CTI server, wiring, and the connection. 2. Check with manufacturer if the problem occurs again. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC 12 0 0 ACD MIS Link Error The link with ACD MIS client PC came off. 1. LAN cable defective. 2. Connected HUB broken. 3. The CTI server doesn't start normally. 1. Confirm ACD MIS client PC and connected part. 2. Check with manufacturer if the problem occurs again. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 749 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action 13 0 0 Charge Management Link Error The link with the charge management device came off. 1. Wiring problem in connecting main device with charge management device. 2. PC Problem. 1. Confirm that there is no problem in wiring to connect a main device with the charge management device. (Whether ping passes for LAN connection is confirmed.) 2. Restart the charge management software. 3. Reboot PC, and start charge management software. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC 14 0 0 LAN Link Error The link with LAN on CD-CP00-US came off. 1. LAN cable defective. 2. Connected HUB broken. 3. Defective CD-CP00-US. Confirm the operation of LAN connector, LAN cable, and HUB again. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC 15 0 0 Network Keep Alive 1. The network connection has been cut. 2. Network Keep Alive restoration. 3. Response notification on network Keep Alive. 1. LAN cable is defective. 2. Net side trouble. 3. Packet blocked by firewall. 4. Repetition of IP address. 1. Confirm that the defect is on the Network side. 2. Confirm the settings of HUB and the router, etc. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC WAR 16 0 0 SMDR Link 17 1 0 Denial of service The system received an illegal packet. Service outage (DOS Confirm that the defect is on the Network side. 18~28 Recovery Alarm Status WAR --- Reserved --- 29 0 0 Charge Management Buffer full The temporary buffer for the charge management in main device overflowed, and a part of unoutput charge data disappeared because it could not output the charge management data. 1. The charge data is printed and not deleted at the simple charge management. 2. The charge data is not output to PC for the charge management software. 1. Print and delete the charge data at the simple charge management. 2. Connect the charge management software for the charge management software and output the charge data. When the output is restarted, the error is recovered. However, the charge management data after the error occurs is not recorded. ERR REC 30 2 0 SMDR Buffer full The temporary buffer for SMDR in main device overflowed, and a part of unoutput SMDR data disappeared because it could not output SMDR data. 1. Problem of wiring to connect main device with PC. 2. PC Problem. 1. Confirm whether there is problem in wiring to connect a main device with PC. 2. Execute the reactivation of PC. When the output is restarted, the error is recovered. However, the SMDR data after the error occurs is not recorded. ERR REC 31~34 2 - 750 --- Reserved --- Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report 35 0 0 CS Blocking 36 0 0 37 0 38 Action Recovery The link of the CSIU and CS came off. 1. Outgoing noise. 2. Method of setting up CS. 3. Wiring to connect CSIU unit with CS. 4. Hard defect of CS. 5. Hard defect of CSIU. Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation. 1 Confirm CS is normally connected. 2. Confirm the wiring between CSIU-CS is normal. 3. Exchange CS. 4. Exchange CSIU. The error is recovered when reconnecting or exchanging it. ERR REC CS error notification 1 CS detected the problem occurring in the air synchronous signal between CS-CSIU, BBIC reset was executed, and it was restored automatically. 1. Outgoing noise. 2. Method of setting up CS. 3. Wiring to connect CSIU unit with CS. 4. Hard defect of CS. 5. Hard defect of CSIU. Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation. 1. Confirm CS is normally connected. 2. Confirm the wiring between CSIU-CS is normal. 3. Exchange CS. 4. Exchange CSIU. This error has been recovered when it is notified. ERR REC 0 CS transmission error. Because CS had not returned the response to the control signal from a main device longer than the fixed time, it was restored automatically specifying reset to concerned CS with a main device. 1. Outgoing noise. 2. Method of setting up CS. 3. Wiring to connect CSIU unit with CS. 4. Hard defect of CS. 5. Hard defect of CSIU. Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation. 1. Confirm CS is normally connected. 2. Confirm the wiring between CSIU-CS is normal. 3. Exchange CS. 4. Exchange CSIU. This error has been recovered when it is notified. ERR REC 0 0 CSIU Dch Error× It was restored automatically specifying reset to concerned CS with a main device because a main device had detected the control signal from a main device not normally reaching CS. 1. Outgoing noise. 2. Method of setting up CS. 3. Wiring to connect CSIU unit with CS. 4. Hard defect of CS. 5. Hard defect of CSIU. Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation. 1. Confirm CS is normally connected. 2. Confirm the wiring between CSIU-CS is normal. 3. Exchange CS. 4. Exchange CSIU. This error has been recovered when it is notified. ERR REC 39 0 0 CSIU transmission error. This alarm is integrated into Communication fault between the CD-CP00-US and other PKG, and it is not used in SV8100. 40 0 0 CS error notification 2. CS detected the factor that the noise is generated between CS-PS, BBIC reset was executed, and it was restored automatically. 1. Outgoing noise. 2. Method of setting up CS. 3. Wiring to connect CSIU unit with CS. 4. Hard defect of CS. 5. Hard defect of CSIU. Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation. 1. Confirm CS is normally connected. 2. Confirm the wiring between CSIU-CS is normal. 3. Exchange CS. 4. Exchange CSIU. This error has been recovered when it is notified. ERR REC System Start Notification The system started. The system was started. No action needed. 50 Content of Alarm Alarm Status Cause 41~49 Name --- Reserved --1 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 751 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report 51 0 0 System Data change 52 0 0 --- Reserved --- 53 0 0 --- Reserved --- 54 2 0 License Management Table Full A new TCP/IP terminal and the DSP board were not able to be added to the application license management table. • The license management table is registering full. Maximum 512 license information on the TCP/IP terminal is registered, and a new terminal cannot be registered. Delete license information on an unnecessary TCP/IP terminal with PRG 90-44. 55 2 0 Regular maintenance exchange notification. The regular maintenance exchange day has passed. • The regular maintenance exchange day that had been set with PRG 90-51 exceeded it. Do the maintenance exchanges of pertinent parts, and set the next regular maintenance exchange day with PRG 90-51. The excess on the regular maintenance exchange day is canceled by changing PRG 90-51 or when the function is invalidated, the error is recovered. SIP Registration Error Notification. 1.The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed. 1. The system data setting is wrong. 1. Confirm the following system data setting -PRG 10-12, 10-28, 10-29, 10-30, and 1036. 2.Confirm the setting of routers. 3.Confirm whether abnormality occurs on the net side. 4. Confirm the authentication system data setting 5. Confirm wiring and the system data setting. Inquire on uncertain points of the maker. The error is recovered when normally connecting it. 56~59 60 Name Content of Alarm Cause CD-CP00-US Upgrade is performed or Programming change is made. Alarm Status No action needed. 2 0 2. The router setting is wrong. 3. LAN link error . 4. Net side trouble. 3.There is no response from the SIP server to the SIP registration request. 2 - 752 Recovery WAR ERR REC --- Reserved --- 2.The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed in the authentication. 61 Action 0 0 SIP extension trouble information. 1. Failed registration of the SIP extension terminal. 2. The SIP extension terminal DSP was not acquired: • At registration of SIP extension terminal to SV8100. • When you cannot acquire the DSP resource when it is sent. 1. The registered port is used by other extension. 2. The license is insufficient. 3. DSP of VoIPDB not acquired. 1. Confirm wiring and system data setting. ERR REC ERR REC 2. Confirm whether each equipment such as access points works normally. Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report 62 0 0 63 0 0 Name DtermIP trouble information. SIP-MLT trouble information. Content of Alarm Cause The error occurred by the DtermIP relation. • When the error occurs while communicating with VoIPU or DtermIP. • When it becomes impossible to do the communication between SV8100 and DtermIP • When failing in the acquisition of DSP. 1. The packet loss occurred on the network or the wiring cutting occurred. 1. The trouble occurred in the SIP-MLT relation. 1. The packet loss occurred on the network or the wiring cutting occurred. 2. The DSP resource could not be acquired at incoming/outgoing. 3. The negotiation with VoIPDB failed. 64 1 0 VoIPDB LAN Link Error. The link of LAN of VoIPDB came off. Action Recovery Confirm whether each equipment such as wirings and HUB is normal. Alarm Status ERR REC 2. DSP of VoIP not acquired. WAR Confirm whether each equipment such as wirings and HUB is normal. 2. DSP of VoIP not acquired. 1. LAN cable defective. 2. Connected HUB broken. 1. Confirm LAN connector and wiring. 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered. ERR REC 3. Defective CD-CP00-US. 65 0 0 VoIPDB trouble information. When DSP of VoIPDB notifies Error. PZ-32IPLA defective. 1. Possibility of defective hardware. WAR 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. 66 2 0 SIP extension License Error. More than the number of licenses to which the SIP extension terminal was turned on at REGISTER. Wrong number of licenses. 1. Confirm number of licenses for SIP extension terminals. 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. 67 0 0 SIP illegal packet received. The system received an illegal packet. A client or network is in an illegal state. Check with maker on uncertain points. 68 2 0 VoIP DSP All Busy Alarm 1. Provides alert when all DSP resources are being used. 2. Used to troubleshoot or alerting when upgrade is needed. Not enough DSP resources in system. Install PZ-VMDB with more DSP resources. 69~79 When the number of registration of SIP extension terminals falls below the number of licenses. WAR INF --- Reserved --- 80 1 0 NetLink start error. The error occurred when NetLink started. Defective CD-CP00-US. 1. Possibility of defective hardware. 2. Check with maker. ERR 81 2 0 NetLink call trouble information. 1. The trouble occurred in the NetLink relation. PZ-32IPLA DSP not acquired. 1. Confirm wiring and system data settings. WAR 2. The DSP resource was not acquired at incoming/outgoing. SV8100 Programming Manual 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. 2 - 753 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report 82 2 0 83 2 0 Name Content of Alarm Cause NetLink Virtual Slot accommod. error. The trouble occurred with virtual Slot relation. • It exceeded the upper slot accommodation. • It failed to make a virtual slot. Exceeds slot accommodations in the NetLink system. NetLink Communicati on Error. 1. Communication error occurred on NetLink. 1. The Router setting is wrong. 2. Checksum error occurred. 2. LAN Link error. Action 1. Confirm upper slot number. Recovery Alarm Status WAR 2, Check with maker on uncertain points. 3. Net side error. 1. Confirm LAN connector and wiring. WAR 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. 3. Index error occurred. 84 2 0 NetLink License Error 1. License error occurred on NetLink. 1. Approaching expiration date of a temporary license. 2. A temporary license was nullified. 1. Confirm license information. The connection of Secondary was refused in NetLink. • SystemID overlaps. • SystemID is illegal. • The license is insufficient. • Memory shortage. 1. System ID Repeated. 2. SystemID is illegal. 3. The number of licenses is wrong. 4. Insufficient system memory. 1. Confirm the setting and license information on SystemID. Because the versions of DB is different, replication cannot be executed between Primary and Secondary. The versions of data bases between Primary and Secondary is different. 1. Confirm the version of data bases of Primary and Secondary using PC PRO. 2. Expiration date of the license approaches. 3. License nullified. 85 86 2 2 0 0 NetLink node connection refusal. Data base replication fail. WAR 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. WAR 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. WAR 2. Check with maker on uncertain points. 87 2 0 Data base replication fail. Because the error occurred in the communication between Primary and Secondary, replication cannot be executed. LAN link between Primary and Secondary was disconnected. Confirm LAN link between Primary and Secondary. 88 2 0 NetLink phase shift. Operation began as Primary. Operation began as Primary. No action is necessary. INF 89 2 0 NetLink phase shift. Operation began as Secondary. Operation began as Secondary. No action is necessary. INF 90 2 0 NetLink phase shift. It shifted to the node search mode. Shifted to the node search mode. No action is necessary. INF 91 2 0 Primary autointegration. Primary auto-integration function operated. Primary autointegration function operated. No action is necessary. INF 92 2 0 Primary compulsion specification. The Primary compulsion specification function was executed. Primary compulsion specification function was executed. No action is necessary. INF 2 - 754 WAR Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued) Alarm No. Type Report Name 93 2 0 NetLink node connection detection. Node connection with NetLink Primary was detected. Node connection with NetLink Primary was detected. No action is necessary. INF 94 2 0 NetLink node secession detection. Secession of the node detected with NetLink Primary. Secession of the node detected with NetLink Primary. No action is necessary. INF 95 2 0 Data Base replication failure. Because Secondary is in programming mode, the replication of DB cannot be executed. Logging in with Secondary in the Web Pro or the PC Pro is possibly the cause. Log out from Secondary programming mode. WAR 96 1 0 Data base recovery fail. Error happened when DataBase recovery operation. Lack of resource Memory, protected area, recovery data file corruption are possible reasons for this. Delete unnecessary file and restore open area, then try operation again. WAR Start Data base recovery operation. No action is necessary. INF INF Content of Alarm Backup/Restore 97 2 0 DB recovery operation start. Start Data base recovery operation. Cause Action Recovery Alarm Status Backup/Restore/Delete 98 2 0 DB recovery operation finish. Finish DataBase recovery operation. Backup/Restore/Delete Finish Data base recovery operation. No action is necessary. 99 1 0 NetLink configuration error. The error occurs when the system tries to start NetLink without MEMDB. PRG51-01-01 is set without PZ-ME50US. Install PZ-ME50-US. 100 WAR --- Reserved --- Conditions The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at PRG90-50-01. System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display Setting is set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display. The priority level (highest -> lowest): Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm 52> Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 755 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report Level: IN Description Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report. Input Data Item No. 02 Item Report Method When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this option to 1. E-mail address set in PRG 90-11-08. 04 --- Not Used --- 06 SMTP Host Name Input Data 0 = No Report 1 = E-mail Address Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP name (ex: smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed. 07 SMTP Host Port Number 0~65535 Default 0 No Setting 25 When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP host port number. Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed. 08 To E-mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting Up to 255 Characters No Setting Up to 255 Characters No Setting 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address to where the report should be sent. 09 Reply Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the e-mail address where replies should be e-mailed. 10 From Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address for the station sending the report. 11 DNS Primary Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS primary address. 12 DNS Secondary Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS secondary address. 2 - 756 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Input Data Item No. 13 Item Customer Name When alarm reports are e-mailed, enter a name to identify the particular system. Input Data Up to 255 Characters Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 757 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output Level: IN Description Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports. Input Data Item No. 01 02 Item Input Data Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02. 0 = No Setting 1~3 = -- Reserved -4 = CTA/CTU 5 = USB Memory CTA Output Destination Extension Number Up to eight digits Output Port Type Default 0 No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 758 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-13 : System Information Output Level: IN Description Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system information output. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Default 0 Indicate the type of connection used to print the system information. 0 = No Setting 4 = CTA/CTU 5 = USB 02 CTA Output Destination Extension Number Up to eight digits 04 Output Destination System ID 0~50 0 05 Output Command Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) – Output Port Type No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 759 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-16 : Main Software Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the CD-CP00-US. Main software information can also be viewed outside of system programming by pressing Feature and the 3 key on any multiline terminal. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Component 01 Version Number 01.00~99.99 ASCII Code (5 Bytes) 02 Software Release Date May 22 2002 17:53:46 ASCII Code (20 Bytes) Conditions This Program is Read Only. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 760 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-17 : Firmware Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system blades. Input Data Item No. 01 Item DSP Firmware Version No. Display Data 00.00.00.00~15.15.15.15 Data Format BCD Code (2 Byte) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 761 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release Level: SA Description When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is released from the Dial Block restriction. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Dial Block Release Up to eight digits Input Data [Release?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 762 Code Restriction Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Call Traffic Output 02 --- Not Used --- 03 Input Data Default 0 = Not Measured 1 = Measure 0 All Line Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 08 ACD Operator All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 763 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 09 Attendant Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 10 Base Station All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 1~256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 764 Traffic Reports Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output Level: IN Description Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report output. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Output Port Type Input Data 0 = No Setting 3 = LAN Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Traffic Reports SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 765 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-22 : Terminal Version information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-22 : Terminal Version Information to determine the hardware and firmware versions. These are read-only commands and cannot be changed. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Hardware Version 00~FF 02 Firmware Version 00.00~FF.FF Default 00 00.00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference 2 - 766 None Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone from the system. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Delete IP Telephone This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station. Up to 8 digits Input Data [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 767 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the alarm report to print. Input Data Notification Number 1~12 Item No. Item 01 Month 00~12 00 02 Day 00~31 00 03 Hour 00~23 00 04 Minute 00~59 00 Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 768 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup. Input Data CC Number Item No. Item 01 CC Mail Address 1~5 Input Data Up to 255 Characters Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 769 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to change a system program. Input Data Program Numbers 1001~9201 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Maintenance Level 1 = MF Level 2 = IN Level 3 = SA Level 4 = SB Level Refer to the Level indication for each individual program (located in the upper left corner at the beginning of each program). Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 770 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the user programming mode. Input Data Extension Numbers Item No. 01 Item Password Up to eight digits Input Data Fixed four digits Default 1111 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 771 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet Level: IN Description Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level information. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 (Disable) 01 Access Enabling 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 02 Username 20 characters (alphanumeric) SV8100 03 Password 20 characters (alphanumeric) 12345678 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 772 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-34 : Firmware Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware blades installed in the system. Input Data Slot No. Item No. 1~24 Item 01 Pkg Name 02 Firmware Version Number Display Data PKG Name 00.00~0F.FF Conditions These Programs are Read Only. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 773 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard Programming. Input Data Wizard Number Item No. 01 1~250 Item Maintenance Level Display Data 0 = All 3 = SB (System Administrator B) 4 = SA (System Administrator A) 5 = IN 6 = MF Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 774 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update feature. This data is available to set for the WebPro/PC Programming FW update feature. A compact flash card must be inserted in the CD-CP00-US for this feature. The following firmware is available to update with this feature: main.bin Dspdbu.bin dsp.bin Item No. 01 Item Firmware Update Schedule Time Input Data Default Description Year: 0~99 0 Month: 0~12 0 Day: 00~31 0 Set the time to update the firmware using a compact flash card. Time registration fails if an expired time is registered. Hour: 00~23 0 Minute: 00~59 0 0 02 Update mode 0 = Non Active 1 = Activated 03 Update Report 256 characters max. SV8100 Programming Manual No Setting Activate the Firmware Update feature. If this setting is 1, new firmware on the compact flash card updates according to the setting at 90-36-01. Output a report when the update is executed and saves one copy on the system. If a new update occurs, the new report overwrites the old report. Refer to the Sample Report shown. 2 - 775 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Sample Report Result Report Display Update Success Update is successful with the Update Time. Update Fail Update failed. Drive A (Compact Flash) was not available. Update Fail Update failed. The file, main.up, does not exist on drive A. Update Fail Update failed. The scheduled time has expired. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 776 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each User Programming Feature Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Time setting 0 = Off 1 = On 1 02 Change of music on hold tone 0 = Off 1 = On 1 03 Automatic Night Service Pattern 0 = Off 1 = On 1 04 Weekly Night Service Switching 0 = Off 1 = On 1 05 Text Data for Night Mode 0 = Off 1 = On 1 06 Holiday Night Service Switching 0 = Off 1 = On 1 07 DISA User ID Setup 0 = Off 1 = On 1 08 Mail Box Setup 0 = Off 1 = On 1 09 Text Messages Setup 0 = Off 1 = On 1 10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 0 = Off 1 = On 1 11 Abbreviated Dial Number and Name 0 = Off 1 = On 1 12 Night-mode switching Other Group 0 = Off 1 = On 1 13 DSS Key Assignment 0 = Off 1 = On 1 SV8100 Programming Manual Description 2 - 777 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Item No. Item Input Data Default 14 Doorphone Ringing Assignment 0 = Off 1 = On 1 15 Extension Numbering 0 = Off 1 = On 1 16 Extension Name 0 = Off 1 = On 1 17 Night-mode switching Own Group 0 = Off 1 = On 1 18 Call Forward-Immediate/No Answer/Both Ring 0 = Off 1 = On 1 19 Call Forward-Busy 0 = Off 1 = On 1 20 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Off 1 = On 1 21 Internal Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 (PRG15-02-03) 22 Display Language Selection (PRG15-02-01) 23 Toll Restriction Override Password Description (PRG21-07) 24 User Programming Password (PRG90-28) 25 Programmable Function Key (PRG15-07) 26 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment (PRG15-09) 27 One Touch Key Assignment (PRG15-14) 28 Trunk Name (PRG14-01) 29 Automatic Transfer per Trunk (PRG11-10-6,7) 30 SPD Area No. (PRG24-04) 2 - 778 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Item No. Item Input Data Default 31 Telephone Data Copy 0 = Off 1 = On 1 32 Dial in Name 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 = Off 1 = On 1 (PRG22-11-03) 33 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Description (PRG15-20) 34 IntraMail Station Mailbox Options (PRG47-02) Conditions Switch reset is required for changes to take effect. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 779 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset Level: IN Description Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status. (Not supported in V1000) Input Data Item No. 01 Item Virtual Loop Back Reset Input Data [Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 780 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data Level: IN Description Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address. Input Data Server Information Item No. 01 02 03 1~13 Item Input Data Default Server Address Type 0 = IPv4 1 = IPv6 0 Server Address IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx) – Port Number 0~65535 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 781 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and firmware version of the DT700 MLT Terminal. Input Data Terminal Type Item No. Item 1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1 2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT-1D/ITL-24PA-1D 3 = ITL-320C-1 Input Data Default 01 Software Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00 02 Hardware Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 782 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 Level: IN Description Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 to delete the terminal license information delivered to the DT700 terminal. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Delete Terminal License Up to eight digits Input Data [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 783 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface Level: IN Description Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface. Input Data License Delete Code Item No. 01 Item Delete Terminal License 000~000~000 – 999~999~999 Input Data [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 784 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone Level: IN Description Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Temporary Password Change Request Input Data 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF Change? (Yes :1) Default 00.00.00.00 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 785 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone Level: IN Description Use Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone to set the button kit information on a new telephone on the SV8100 system. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone Eight digits (except virtual extension) Input Data 0 = No Setting 1 = Not Used 2 = Type A with Cursor Key 3~9 = Not Used 10 = Type A without Cursor Key (Retrofit) 11~12 = Not Used Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 786 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone Level: IN Description Use Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone to set the protection mode of each multiline (IP) telephone. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item Up to eight digits Input Data Default 01 Release Protection Mode Release? (Yes : 1) None 02 Initialize Protection Password Initialize? (Yes : 1) None Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 787 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display. Input Data Index Number Item No. 01 Item System Alarm Display Telephone 01~50 Input Data Up to eight digits Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 788 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange Level: IN Description Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance. Input Data System ID 0~50 Index 1~10 Item No. Item Input Data Default Refer to table 01 Display Name Up to 16 characters 02 Year 00~99 00 03 Month 01~12 00 04 Day 01~31 00 SV8100 Programming Manual Index Default 01 Power battery 02 Backup battery 03 Cooling fan 04~10 --- No setting --- 2 - 789 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 790 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save Level: IN Description Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation. Input Data System ID of Source System 0~50 System ID of Destination System 0~50 Item No. Item Input Data 01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes) 02 Save New Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes) Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 791 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear Level: IN Description Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm. Input Data System ID Item No. 01 Item Clear All Alarm Reports 0~50 Input Data Default All Clear? ( 1 = Yes) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 792 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming Level: IN Description Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming. Item No. 01 Item Web Pro TCP port number Input Data Default 1-65535 80 1-65535 8000 The port number of TCP of the Web programming of SV8100 is set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro to the logout of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting. 02 PC Pro TCP port number The port number of TCP of the PC programming of Cygnus is set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the PC professional to the logout of the user of the PC professional who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 793 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-55 : Free License Select Level: IN Description Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License. (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Input Data Item No. 01 Item Start Free License Input Data Default 0 = Stop 1 = Start Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 794 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-56 : NTP Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 NTP Synchronize 0 = No 1 = Yes 02 Server Address IPv4 form: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IPv6 form: xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx Default 0 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 795 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data Level: IN Description Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the flash memory on the CD-CP00-US and to make the recovery data. Input Data Data ID Item No. 01 1~5 Item Backup Recovery Data Input Data [Backup?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 796 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data Level: IN Description Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the flash memory of the CD-CP00-US. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically. Input Data Data ID Item No. 01 Item Restore Recovery Data 1~5 Input Data [Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 797 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data Level: SA Description Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the flash memory of the CD-CP00-US. Input Data Data ID Item No. 01 Item Delete Recovery Data 1~5 Input Data [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 798 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1/PRI/BRI/CD-CCTA packages. Input Data Item No. 01 System ID 1~50 Slot No. 1~24 Item Link Status Input Data – = No link 0 = Link N/A = No card seen in slot Default N/A Conditions This Program is Read-Only. Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 799 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Install Level: IN Description Use Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Install to manually install any package. If another package is already assigned, the new package cannot be assigned. Input Data System ID 1~50 Slot No. 1~24 Item No. 01 Item Install Input Data 0 = None 1 = Router 2 = PVA-NAT Default 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 800 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-62 : Security ID Information Level: IN Description Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to display the security ID of the CD-CP00-US. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Security ID Display Data 0~9 and A~F (32 digits or less) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 801 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-63 : DT700 Control Level: IN Description Use Program 90-63 : DT700 Control to adjust settings of the DT700. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Priority Timer Input Data Default 0~255 80 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 802 Program 90 : Maintenance Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-64 : SNMP Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-64 : SNMP Setup to configure the SNMP function. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 Max. 12 characters Public 01 SNMP 02 Community Name 03 Target Host 1 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0 04 Target Host 2 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0 05 Target Host 3 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0 06 Target Host 4 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0 07 Target Host 5 XX.XX.XX.XX 0.0.0.0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 803 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup Level: IN Description Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication password. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Password Input Data Default Up to 16 characters nec-i Sets the authentication password when the 1st Party CTI application is connected to the system via a NAT router. If a password is not set, the system does not certify it. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 804 Program 90 : Maintenance Program Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy Program Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal, port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied. Input Data Program Number Item No. 01 Program 92 XX-XX Item Input Data Source Number Enter the extension, trunk, group or other number from which the data is to be copied. For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number 1~200 For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group Number 1~100 For Extension Base : Extension Number (up to eight digits) For Department Group Base : Department Group Number 1~64 For DSS : DSS Console Number 1~32 Destination Number (From) Enter the first extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied. Destination Number (To) Enter the last extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied. If the information is being copied only to one extension, trunk, group or other number, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry. SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 805 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs: Trunk Port Base Program No. Program Name 14-01 Trunk Basic Data Setup 14-02 Analog Trunk Data Setup 14-04 Behind PBX Setup 14-08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks 14-09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk 21-03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 21-12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 21-21 Toll Restriction for Trunks 21-22 CO Message Waiting Indication 22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup 22-03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup 22-05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk 22-08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG 31-05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker Note Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01). Trunk Group Base Program No. 35-03 Program Name Note SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Extension Base Program No. 2 - 806 Program Name 15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Extension) 15-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Note Copy all data except extension name (item 01). Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program No. Program Name 15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension 15-07 Programmable Function Key 15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 15-17 CO Message Waiting Indication 15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options 15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment 15-25 DESI-less Page Setup 20-06 Class of Service for Extension 20-29 Timer Class for Extension 21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 21-11 Hotline Assignment 23-02 Call Pickup Groups 23-03 Ringing Line Preference 23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 24-03 Park Group Assignment 31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 82-14 Handset/Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone Note Department Group Base Program No. Program Name 16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup 35-04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group SV8100 Programming Manual Note Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01). 2 - 807 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 DSS Console Base Program No. Program Name 30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode 30-03 DSS Key Assignment Note Door Box Base Program No. 32-02 Program Name Note Door Box Ring Assignment Conditions Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied. Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 808 Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted. Input Data Extension No. Delete Yes: 1 [Dial 1] + Transfer key (Only press Transfer key is canceled) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 809 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside line. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Source Number Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied. 02 Destination Number (From) Enter the first port number where the information is to be copied. 03 Destination Number (To) Enter the last port number where the information is to be copied. If the information is to be copied only to one port, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry. Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 810 Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap Level: IN Description (This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming). Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions. Input Data Item No. Item 01 1st Extension Number 02 2nd Extension Number Input Data Up to eight characters. The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function. Program Number Program Name 11-02 Extension Numbering 12-05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 13-03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions 13-06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name 15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup 15-02 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension 15-07 Programmable Function Key 15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 811 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program Number 2 - 812 Program Name 15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 15-13 Loop Key Data 15-14 Programming One-Touch Keys 15-17 CO-Message Waiting Indication 15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options 15-19 System Telephone book Setup for Extension 15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment 15-25 DESI-less Page Setup 16-02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions 20-06 Class of Service for Extension 20-29 Timer Class for Extensions 21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extension 21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extension 21-07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup 21-10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions 21-11 Hotline Assignment 21-13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21-15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-18 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21-20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension 21-23 Out Going Key Sized Virtual Extension Priority Setup 22-04 Incoming Ring Group Setup 22-06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 23-02 Call Pickup Group 23-03 Ringing Line Preference 23-04 Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension 24-03 Park Hold Group Assignment 24-06 Fixed Call Forward 24-07 Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program Number Program Name 24-08 Call Forward for Centrex 24-09 Call Forward Split Settings 26-04 ARS Class of Service 26-07 LCR Cost Center Code Table 31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 41-02 ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group 41-17 ACD Login Mode Setup 42-02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup 43-33 Print Table for Extension 43-37 Fixed Call Restrict Table Setup 82-14 MLT Handset/Headset Gain Control 90-28 User Programming Programming Password Setup 92-05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 813 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password Level: IN Description Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Password Password required per station when using the station swap feature. Input Data Fixed four digits (No setting at default) Related Programming 11-15-12 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 814 Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-06 : Fill Command Level: IN Description Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table. Input Data Program Number Item No. XX-XX Item Input Data 01 Source Number 02 Destination Number (From) 03 Destination Number (To) Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02) Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04) Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06) Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07) Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08) Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17) The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function. Program Number Program Name 11-02 Extension Numbering 11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering 11-06 ACI Extension Numbering 11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number 11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number 11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 815 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 816 Program 92 : Copy Program UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 4.0 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-07 : Delete Command Level: IN Description Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table. Input Data Program Number Item No. XX-XX Item Input Data 01 Destination Number (From) 02 Destination Number (To) Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02) Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04) Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06) Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07) Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08) Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17) The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function. Program Number Program Name 11-02 Extension Numbering 11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering 11-06 ACI Extension Numbering 11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number 11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number 11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number SV8100 Programming Manual 2 - 817 Issue 4.0 UNIVERGE SV8100 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 2 - 818 Program 92 : Copy Program ® PROGRAMMING MANUAL NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. Issue 4.0 (Version 3000)
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project